Um Geopak 2 4 e

GEOPAK
The geometric 3D software for co-ordinate

measurement machines
User's Manual
v 2.4
General Information
General Information
GEOPAK
registers and calculates the geometric data of your parts

records program runs for the following measurements
provides, among others, all data (nominal-actual comparison) for
statistics (STATPAK)
is the basic program for the 3D nominal-actual comparison of
surfaces (3D-TOL).
Copyright (c) 2004 Mitutoyo

Neuss, September 2004
Mitutoyo Messgeraete GmbH
Borsigstrasse 8 - 10
D - 41469 Neuss
Phone ++49 - 21 37-102-0
Fax
++49 - 21 37-86 85
E-mail:MitutoyoGmbH@mitutoyo.de
International copyright laws protect the program itself as well as this online help.
It is not allowed to copy or pass to third persons the total or part of it. The
copyright is exclusively at Mitutoyo Messgeraete GmbH.
I-2
v 2.4
14.09.04
General Information
Overview
The most important topics of the program GEOPAK
I General Information and Contents
II Learn Mode
III Probe
IV Workpiece Alignment
V Elements: Basics
VI Elements: Further Options
VII Elements: Graphical Presentation
VIII Variance Comparison
IX Output of Data
X Contours
XI CMM Movement
XII Appendix
14.09.04
v 2.4
I-3
Part Program Editor
II Learn Mode
Contents
1
Part Program Editor ........................................................ 5

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Introduction Part Program Editor............................................... 5

Part program window .................................................................. 6
Rights to write.............................................................................. 6
Insert / Overwrite ......................................................................... 7
Copy / Insert ................................................................................. 7
Undo ............................................................................................. 7
Learn Mode: Basics ........................................................ 8

2.1
2.2
2.3
Learn Mode: Introduction ........................................................... 8

Starting Learn Mode .................................................................... 9
Start up Wizard .......................................................................... 10
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.4
Temperature Compensation ..................................................... 12
2.4.1
2.5
Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM ..................................... 13
Reference Position .................................................................... 16
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.6
Compensation and Rotary Table ..................................................... 16

Define Reference Position ............................................................... 16
Procedure........................................................................................ 16
Volume Compensation.............................................................. 17
2.6.1
2.6.2
Definition ......................................................................................... 10
Procedure........................................................................................ 10
Hints ................................................................................................ 11
Configuration ................................................................................... 11
Probe Offset to Z-spindle................................................................. 17

Automatic Control ............................................................................ 17
Learn Mode Main Window ............................................ 18

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
PartManager and GEOPAK ....................................................... 18

The layout of the main window ................................................ 18
Windows and Tools................................................................... 20
Window Positions...................................................................... 21
Exit Single Measurement .......................................................... 22
Relearn from Repeat Mode ....................................................... 22
Measurement Window / Measurement Time ........................... 23
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
14.09.04
Measurement Window..................................................................... 23
Measurement time........................................................................... 23
Input Characteristics ................................................................. 24

Reset System ............................................................................. 24
Printer Settings .......................................................................... 25
Reset Controller......................................................................... 25
Sound Output............................................................................. 25
v 2.4
II-1
Part Program Editor

3.13 Pallet Co-Ordinate System ....................................................... 26
3.13.1 Definitions ....................................................................................... 26
3.13.2 Connection to Manager Programs and Q-PAK ................................ 26
Programming Help Contents........................................ 28

4.1
4.2
Programming help: Functions ................................................. 28

Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence .................. 29
Variables and Calculations........................................... 30

5.1
Definition of Variables .............................................................. 31
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.3
5.4
Input of Variables ...................................................................... 33

Yes/No Variable ......................................................................... 34
Save / Load Variables ............................................................... 34
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Decimal Places................................................................................ 31
Variables: Input of Formula ............................................................. 32
Include Element Characteristics ...................................................... 32
Save ................................................................................................ 34
Load ................................................................................................ 34
Definition ......................................................................................... 34
Calling Variable from File ................................................................ 35
Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable .............................. 35

Actual Temperature in Variable ............................................... 36
Settings for Temperature Compensation................................ 37
Settings in the dialogue............................................................ 38
Definition of String Variables ................................................... 39
Input of String Variables........................................................... 39
Store/Load String Variables ..................................................... 40
Wait for file with string variable ............................................... 41
System Variable in the Formula Calculation........................... 41
Operators and Functions.............................................. 42

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
Arithmetic Operators ................................................................ 42

Relational operators ................................................................. 42
Logical Operators ..................................................................... 43
Constants................................................................................... 43
Trigonometrical Functions ....................................................... 44
Arithmetic Functions ................................................................ 44
Operator Precedence................................................................ 45
Basic Geometry Elements ........................................................ 45
Element components ................................................................ 46
GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes ............................................ 47
GEOPAK Probes........................................................................ 48
GEOPAK Rotary Table Data ..................................................... 49
Minimum Maximum ................................................................... 49
6.13.1 Minimum maximum calculation........................................................ 49

II-2
v 2.4
14.09.04
Part Program Editor

6.13.2 Minimum maximum features............................................................ 49
6.13.3 Minimum maximum components ..................................................... 50
6.13.4 Example for minimum maximum access:......................................... 50
6.14 Best Fit ....................................................................................... 51

6.14.1 Best Fit Components ....................................................................... 51
6.14.2 Example for best fit access:............................................................. 51
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.21
6.22
6.23
6.24
Other GEOPAK Variables.......................................................... 52

Date and Time ............................................................................ 52
Week-days .................................................................................. 52
Week numbers ........................................................................... 52
System Time............................................................................... 53
Examples.................................................................................... 53
Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons.............................. 54
Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison........................................ 55
Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last Element .................... 56
Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons ........................ 57
Scale Factor................................................................... 59
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Scale all elements (including element point) .......................... 59

Scale only element point........................................................... 59
Set scaling centre into origin ................................................... 60
Use scale factor for 3D-TOL ..................................................... 60
Sequence Control.......................................................... 61
8.1
Loops.......................................................................................... 61
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.2
8.3
Branches .................................................................................... 62
Subprograms ............................................................................. 62
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
14.09.04
Definition ......................................................................................... 61
Symbol or Special Character ........................................................... 61
Procedure........................................................................................ 61
Definition and Types........................................................................ 62

Create a Local Sub-Program ........................................................... 62
Using an already existing Sub-Program........................................... 63
Delete Last Step......................................................................... 63

Error While Executing Command............................................. 64
Comment Line............................................................................ 64
Programmable Stop................................................................... 65
Show Picture.............................................................................. 65
Clear Picture .............................................................................. 65
Play Sound ................................................................................. 65
Send E-Mail ................................................................................ 66
Send SMS ................................................................................... 66
Create Directory......................................................................... 67
Input Head Data ......................................................................... 67
v 2.4
II-3
Part Program Editor

8.15
8.16
8.17
8.18
8.19
8.20
8.21
8.22
II-4
Set Head Data Field................................................................... 69

Sublot Input ............................................................................... 70
Set Sublot .................................................................................. 71
Program Call.............................................................................. 72
IO Condition (IO Communication)............................................ 73
Possibilities of Text Input/Data Name ..................................... 74
Single Selection ........................................................................ 75
Group Selection ........................................................................ 76
v 2.4
14.09.04
Part Program Editor
Part Program Editor
1.1
Introduction Part Program Editor

The part program editor allows you to
view a part program,
change a previously learnt part program,
create new programs.
Select your part in the PartManager's part list, then activate the editor by a
mouse click on the symbol shown above or via the menu bar "CMM / Part
program editor". The main menu of the editor will be displayed.
Then you find a window (one for each part) in the centre of the screen (second
window). With the <CTRL> key, you can call multiple part program windows from
the parts list. The title line contains the name of the corresponding part program.
It is possible to randomly move the part program windows as well as all the
following dialog windows.
Activate Window
If you work with several part program windows, you can activate the single
windows as you want (Menu Bar / Window / Window ).
In the list of the following window, you click on the title of the
window you want and
then on "Activate".
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-5
Part Program Editor
1.2
Part program window
The part program window contains the following information (subdivided into five
columns):
Sequence number of the line (infinitely)
Loop nesting
Symbols of the function
Text (name) of the function
Parameter(s) of the function
To call the dialog from the learn mode, activate the corresponding line via mouse
click. This line is shown now as a dark field. Now you have three possibilities to
continue your work:
Double click into the program line
Click the symbol of the machine tools (e.g. "circle" if the element
"circle" has been used in the single/learn mode for the
measurement). The "Automatic Circle Measurement" dialog window
is displayed.
You can also use the way via the menu bar
"Measurement"/"Automatic Element"/"Circle" (our example)
You can also click on a tool of your machine tools, which has not yet
been measured. You get a dialog window to this tool (e.g. "Automatic
Element Measurement Cylinder"). Depending on the mode you selected
before overwrite or insert you overwrite the activated line or insert a
new line.
1.3
Rights to write
If you want to change a part program or create a new one, you need the
corresponding user right. The administrator assigns these rights (cf. also User
Rights). You can see by the pen symbol in the status bar, lower left corner,
whether you are actually allowed to change the program or not.
II-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
Part Program Editor
1.4
Insert / Overwrite
You have two possibilities to toggle between Insert/Overwrite. You can see the
mode in the status line on the right below.
You toggle with the insert key of your keyboard.
You can change via the menu bar "Edit / Overwrite". The
"Overwrite" gets a tic, or the tic is removed.
1.5
Copy / Insert
You can also copy one or several command (program lines) by marking
them with the mouse; if you want to mark several lines, keep - as usual - the
<CTRL> key pressed when selecting. Thus the lines are put to the clipboard;
from there they can be inserted into the same program at a different place, or
even inserted into another part program. You deactivate the lines with the mouse
or the <Shift> key.
1.6
Undo
If you want to copy lines, use the icon of the editor tool bar. If the tool bar
is not displayed, you can undo all changes you have made, until the beginning of
your editor session. Cancelling of any action can be achieved in two ways:
Click on the backspace arrow of your editor tool bar, or
Choose the menu bar "Edit / Undo".
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-7
Learn Mode: Basics
2
2.1
Learn Mode: Basics

Learn Mode: Introduction
Using GEOPAK, you can obtain the geometrical data of your parts by a
measurement procedure. To prepare the measurement program, you are
automatically guided until all conditions for a smooth program run are fulfilled:
Check of the connected devices
Definition of the probe data
Alignment of the part
Usually, you want to compare certain features of your parts against their nominal
values shown on the drawing (e.g. diameter, straightness, and parallelism).
GEOPAK offers elements (circle, plane etc.) that can be used to get these
features.
Example:
You want to measure a diameter (cf. drawing below) and to check whether its
size is within the specified limits (here: 30mm diameter, the limits defined by a
table value of H8).
In the main window of "Single / Learn", click the circle in the icon bar on top.
Then you get a window to define how your circle must be constructed:
the type of construction (measurement, intersection, etc.)
the type of calculation, if made from single points or not (Gauss,
minimum circumscribed, etc.)
further measurement parameters (e.g. automatic measurement,
graphic, tolerancing),
for measured element, the number of points,
give also a name and a number to each element,
After confirmation, you may only concentrate on the measurement.
II-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Learn Mode: Basics

In the next step, - if you have activated tolerances via the symbol, you can
input:
the tolerance values, e.g.: +-0.100 or
e.g. with H8 the tolerance field according to DIN/ISO.
This measurement sequence is automatically stored. The data registered and
stored in the learn mode is the prerequisite for any subsequent or later repeat
mode.
2.2
Starting Learn Mode
You have called learn mode of a part for which at least one part program already
exists. Furthermore, there do exist measuring data of the last program run. Now
you have the following possibilities:
Relearn: You can extend the existing program, i.e. continue it. If you
select this possibility, GEOPAK restores the data that resulted
during the last program run. You can continue at the position, you
e.g. stopped the day before. You do not have to execute the
measurement again.
If you have changed the program in the meantime with the
editor, it happens that the stored data do not correspond any more
with the program run. The editor changes the part program but has
no influence on the data!
You can overwrite the existing part program if you do not use it any
longer
You can create a New Part Program if you want, e.g. determine a
position program for a part and a separate CNC-operational
sequence.
14.09.04
Enter your new part program into the text field and confirm
(OK).
When starting the repeat mode, you can select from a part
program table, which part programs you want to execute.
v 2.4
II-9
Learn Mode: Basics
2.3
2.3.1
Start up Wizard
Definition
To control the program start for the learning mode, you can use the "Start up
Wizard". This Start up Wizard is designed to give you the possibility to learn the
part program start in a standardised form. It is basically possible to configure the
Start up Wizard regarding its settings yourself. The Mitutoyo defaults are
described under the topic "Procedure" below.
2.3.2
Procedure
Start the part program like usual in the PartManager.

Following the two windows you know "Which probe tree is active?" and
"Temperature coefficient", the dialogue "Start up Wizard" opens.
In the first window of the Start up Wizard you already define
the probe to be used.
Click on "Next" to get to the co-ordinate system,
then click on "CNC-Parameter and CNC on",
then on "Print format specification "
and finally on the selection of the protocol.
As you can see, you have to work with five windows according to the default
values, which is also indicated by the contents of the bracket in the title: (2/6). In
this example, you are in the first of five windows. If you, however, decide in
favour of the "Pattern alignment" in the subsequent window (ill. below), you need
to go through one window more, i.e. six windows.
Otherwise, also your settings in the PartManager (Settings / Defaults for

Programs / GEOPAK / Menus) are decisive for with how many windows you have
to work with when using the Start up Wizard (see ill. below). If you have not
requested the optional protocol, the Start up Wizard will not offer a respective
option.
II-10
v 2.4
14.09.04
Learn Mode: Basics
2.3.3
Hints
The symbols in the windows of the Start up Wizard are each complemented by a
balloon.
However, the following symbols are particularly important:
You use this symbol to decide that you do not want your inputs to be learned.
You click on this symbol when you wish to make an input and you want this
input to be learned.
2.3.4
Configuration
If you want to change the configuration, go to GEOPAK and click on the menu
"Settings" and the function "Start up Wizard: Configuration". In the following
dialogue...
...you have the choice between these options:

Start up Wizard
Initialisation dialogues and
No "Start up Wizard" or "Init. Dialogues".
Only when you have activated the option "Start up Wizard", you have the choice
between the "Standard settings" and the "CAT300 settings".
If you, for example, click on "Standard settings", you can subsequently work in
nine to twelve windows. It starts with entering the decimals, the comment lines
(up to 32,000 characters are possible), the temperature coefficient etc. By
clicking once onto the buttons "Next", "Back" or "Done" you proceed as usual.
The individual topics as well as the clearance height or subprogram are
described in the GEOPAK-Help in detail.
Another symbol
You use this symbol to decide that you want the part program automatically
learnt as per your configuration definitions. That means that the system learns
without queries.
CAT300-Settings
If you work with the program CAT300/3D-TOL, click on this button. The
procedure is identical to the procedure for the "Standard settings".
Further options
The options "Initialisation dialogues" and "No Start up Wizard and no initialisation
dialogues" are self-explanatory.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-11
Learn Mode: Basics
2.4
Temperature Compensation
This topic concerns the co-ordinate measuring instruments by means of which

you can realise a temperature compensation.
What you should know

The program control automatically executes the compensation of
the machine.
The compensation of the part is executed by GEOPAK.
Depending on material, take the expansion coefficient from the
tables for expansion coefficients of longitudinal.
You must input the temperature coefficient.
Activate the temperature compensation on the motherboard of the
CMM.
The machine control reads the values of the temperature sensors in
minute steps again.
The fact that the co-ordinate measuring instrument supports the
temperature compensation is displayed through a thermometer in
the "Machine Position" window.
Procedure
In learn mode, you can input the temperature coefficient via the
menu Settings/Temperature Coefficient. It has the unit K-1. The
reference temperature is 20 C (68 F).
In repeat mode, you can input the temperature coefficients into the
start dialog.
The input value is multiplied by 10*E-6.
The software analyses the arithmetic mean value of the connected
temperature sensors at the part.
Each measured point is divided by the following factor:1,0 +
temperature coefficient * (current temperature - 20C)
If you do not want a temperature compensation, you must input as
temperature coefficient 0.000.
when proceeding this way, but if the CMM compensation is
activated, a more important failure would occur as if you would not
at all have activated the temperature compensation. Therefore, the
input 0.000 is not allowed. Nevertheless, if you want this, it is
necessary to enable it via an input in the INI file.
See also detailed in the topic "Reference Position ".
II-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
Learn Mode: Basics
2.4.1
Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM
Except for CNC-operated machines which have the temperature compensation

feature integrated also with regard to the hardware components, beginning from
Version 2.2. the present option will be offered for manual CMMs, as well.
When you have installed MCOSMOS and wish to install the drivers, in the
following dialogue window you get to the option "Temperature Sensor; Manual
CMM" (see dialogue window below).
Clicking this option you get to the dialogue window "Temperature Sensor
Settings" (see picture below).
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-13
Learn Mode: Basics
You are offered up to eight temperature probes (sensors). For your MCOSMOS
installation you can get a "Thermal Compensation System" (Hardware Box) with
up to eight sensors supplied from Mitutoyo. This is possible for CMMs beginning
from EURO-M version. With your order you already decide whether you want to
use "Workpiece" and/or "Scale" sensors.
II-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Learn Mode: Basics

In the dialogue you then have to relate the sensor type to the sensor numbers (18). Theoretically, every combination is possible. As a rule, the situation will be
similar to what is shown in the example dialogue above. Also in the picture
below, you see, on the left, a sensor on the green workpiece. Three sensors are
integrated within the axes.
Procedure
At the beginning of the driver installation you insert the disk supplied
with the sensor calibration data into drive A: and select the file with
the ending ".dat".
Then you select the serial communication port (Comport) to which
you have connected the device (COM1 through COMn).
The sensors to be set are shown in the dialogue as activated.
Should you have ordered e.g. only five sensors, the buttons 6-8 are
deactivated.
The sensors are assigned their individual tasks by mouse-click into
the check buttons.
You click on the "Store" button to inform the MCOSMOS program of
the settings. This also causes the program to be left.
For detailed information on this subject, see Temperature Compensation .
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-15
Learn Mode: Basics
2.5
Reference Position
The compensation of the part temperature is carried out in machine co-ordinates.

The part co-ordinates are not suited for a compensation because they can
change in the course of a part program, e.g. through relocation of the origin. This
could cause that the compensation would not be uniformly realised to the whole
part and thus would be wrong.
2.5.1
Compensation and Rotary Table
When using a rotary table, also the machine co-ordinates are not sufficient to
realise the temperature compensation. Example: A rectangular part is placed on
the rotary table and measurement is done from one side. Then, the part is
rotated by 180 and you measure the other side. Since the measurements are
carried out at the same machine position, indeed no compensation will be
realised.
2.5.2
Define Reference Position
For this reason, compensation is realised in the machine co-ordinates but it is

also possible to enter a reference point for the compensation. If you work with a
rotary table, the calibrated rotary table position is automatically taken as
reference point for the compensation. But it is also possible to define a reference
position. You can do that via the GEOWIN.INI file:
Section [TempCompRefPos]; in the variables TempCompRefX,
TempCompRefY, TempCompRefZ
2.5.3
Procedure
The temperature compensation will then be realised in the following steps:

If a rotary table is defined respectively calibrated, you take the rotary
swivel point as the reference point.
If a reference point is given, you take this one as the reference point.
If no case applies, take (0/0/0) as reference point.
The reference point will be subtracted from the co-ordinates proceeding from the
machine. Then, calculation is realised with the factor described above followed
by translation of the co-ordinates to the part system.
II-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
Learn Mode: Basics
2.6
Volume Compensation
The volume compensation is realised for some of the CMM. At the first program
start, after program installation, a window to input the necessary parameters for
the volume compensation appears.
If you do not input the correct values (Z offset to Z-spindle will always be
negative), this dialogue will appear with each new software initialisation
of the machine. You must enter these values correctly; otherwise the
measurement will not have the specified accuracy.
2.6.1
Probe Offset to Z-spindle
When producing our CMM, Mitutoyo does not know the probe systems
used from customers during the measurement; therefore Mitutoyo has
determined and stored the compensation values of the Z-spindle. In order to
execute compensation at the actual measurement place, the program must know
the offset from Z-spindle to stylus tip. You must enter these values.
The Z offset is always a negative value because the Z-axis of the
machine co-ordinate system shows into the opposite direction.
2.6.2
Automatic Control
Generally, it is possible to change the probe system. An automatic control of

every change is programmed. The Z offset to the Z-spindle is calculated through
calibration of probe no. 1. For calculation, a fixed reference is necessary.
As reference point, you can choose between two methods.
Method with table distance
To determine "Distance machine table / Z-spindle", you must move the Zspindle to Z = 0. Normally, you have to remove your probe system to
determine this distance. The distance machine table / masterball is
defined from the table to the centre of the masterball.
Method with position of the masterball
You only have to input the Z value. To determine this value, only calibrate
probe no. 1 and press the button "Last measured masterball position".
The X and Y values are only for information.
Attention
If you change the probe configuration, you must at least calibrate probe no. 1 in
order that the program automatically recalculates the Z offset. For details, refer
to Probe Calibration.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-17
Learn Mode Main Window
3
3.1

PartManager and GEOPAK
You want to realise a measurement and have created a new part in the
PartManager (see Create New Part). Activate the part and come to the main
window of the GEOPAK learn mode, either via the pull-down menu or by a click
on the symbol. Then you see...
a series of symbols (icons) along the screen margins. These icons
make possible a quick and easy access to the corresponding
functions.
an activated dialog window to the probe selection; you find details
under "Probe Selection ".
When using an automatic probe tree changer system, some more items must be
taken into consideration. Cf. details of these items under Change Probe
Configuration .
3.2
The layout of the main window
You activate the measurement process from the main window. Mitutoyo offers a
series of menus, pull-down menus, and icons with functions, which make working
as simple as possible.
In the header of your screen, you see the title strip. Our example:
shows the title strip "GEOPAK CMM Learn Mode" with the version
number and the name of the part which you have enabled via the
parts list.
Below the title strip, you find the menu bar with the different menus
from "Element" to "Help". If you activate one of these, pull-down
menus appear. Most of the functions can be activated both ways,
either by the icon or by the pull-down menus. The way you select is
just a matter of personal preference.
The leftmost position of the menu bar is the "Preferences" menu. If
you click this menu, several general settings can be made for the
program. Here you can choose if the program runs in metric or inch
mode, whether an audio signal is made during measurement, or
how the printer layout is made and other settings.
Below the menu bar, you find, next to the "Quit" symbol a horizontal
toolbar with icons:
II-18
The left part contains the elements
from "Point" to "Angle". These elements are also listed in the

pull-down menu "Elements".
The right part contains (starting from right) the "trash"; this is
used to delete the previous command, and the symbols
v 2.4
14.09.04
for the modification of the part co-ordinate system.

On the left margin, you find the tools for the machine
movement beginning with the symbol for the probe change.
Through these tools, you decide about measurement and driving
strategy.
In the lower part of the screen, you find a toolbar with, among other
things, the different tolerances
Here, you can have a "Circularity Diagram".

The status bar at the bottom of the main window gives information
about the status of the program.
Here, you find e.g. information about the actually connected
devices, and the unit of measurement (mm or inches).
On the right margin, you find, among other things, the
symbol for the calculator (define and calculate variables) as well as
the toolbar with the programming tools. Via e.g. mouse click, you
define the start of a loop (loop start, see symbol above, right side).
Activate the "Programming Tools" bar via the pull-down menu
"Window".
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-19
3.3
Windows and Tools
In the "Window" pull-down menu, you can find a number of options that can be
activated/deactivated. In particular for the tools, by clicking with the mouse, you
have a shorter way to access these functions.
Field for results
In the field for results, you will find all information about your last operations, this
means from the change of probe to the evaluation. Each action you have
effected for the purpose of your task is represented in this field for results.
Normally, you will find here more information as necessary to print out later (e.g.
change of probe, etc.).
Position of Machine
On principle, the position of machine is represented in co-ordinates. If you
decided in the (menu bar "File / Settings / Input Characteristics") dialogue for
another as the Cartesian co-ordinate system, of course this will be considered in
the representation of the position of machine.
If you have a CMM with temperature compensation, also a
thermometer with the actual temperature will be shown.
If you dispose of the functions with a rotary table, also the rotary
table position will be indicated.
The remaining running time can also be indicated in the repeat
mode.
Display Axes
When you display the axes, you can see the machine co-ordinate system (grey)
and the co-ordinate system of the part (yellow).
Via the symbols (in the picture above in the upper line), you can select a view in
the different planes.
List of Elements
In the list of elements, you can see all geometric elements you have generated,
that means the measured elements e.g. also the connection and intersection
elements.
II-20
v 2.4
14.09.04

Element Graphics
For this subject, see details of Information of Element .
Tools for Machine
You will find these tools in your GEOPAK main window, vertically on the left side.
Each of the buttons corresponds to a menu item from the menu bar ("MMC" or
"Probe").
Tools for Evaluation
See details of Tolerances: Principles .
Program Tools
By clicking on the program tools - in the main window, vertically on the right
screen side -, you can e.g. call the dialogues of the variables or also determine
the loop start or the loop end.
3.4
Window Positions
You can select between two modes of window style, namely the
normal mode and the
"Split Screen" mode.
Hint:
In the default, the windows are displayed in normal mode. Only if you
activate in the pull-down menu the "Split Screen" function, all windows are
displayed in the "Split Screen" mode.
This function can be reached via the "Menu Bar / Window". The store, load and
default functions are valid for the normal mode as well as for the "Split Screen"
mode.
"Split Screen" mode.
By the "Split Screen" function, a displaying on your screen of e.g. windows of
GEOPAK and 3D-TOL or GEOPAK and CAT300 at the same time is possible.
This function can be reached via the menu bar "Window".
Saving
You can store the window positions that you have selected at last according to
your ideas. You will get this position again at each restart.
Default
Under "Default Window Positions", you will find a configuration that Mitutoyo
considered to be useful. Wherever your window positions may be, via this
function you return into a home position, with which you can, in each case,
continue your work.
Load
You will choose the "Load Window Position" function if for example someone
different worked on your computer, but you want to have your characteristic
window constellation again.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-21
3.5
Exit Single Measurement
This dialogue is shown when you have added commands in the part program. In
this case you have the following possibilities:
Store part program
The additionally learned commands are stored with the part
program and are available for the next execution of a part program.
Delete part program
Only the additionally learned part program commands are deleted.
Already existing part program commands are not deleted.
Store Data for Relearn
If you don't use the recorded data for relearn, you should deactivate
them by click on the option button. These data include all
information you have recorded in the learn mode. Since there is
considerable data, your fixed disk would be unnecessarily loaded.
3.6
Relearn from Repeat Mode
Beginning from Version 2.2, the relearn function can be started immediately from
the repeat mode (Menu bar / Repeat Mode / Start Relearn).
You can start this function also via this symbol.
The GEOPAK-Editor is called up using the part program processed last.
The "Start Relearn" function, however, is not possible unless there
is relearn data existing for the current part program.
The repeat mode is closed.
Relearn is automatically started without any dialogue at the
beginning of the learn mode.
II-22
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.7
3.7.1
Measurement Window / Measurement Time

Measurement Window
You can close the meas. point display according to Windows conventions via the
x-symbol. Then, the complete measurement process is deleted. This action
corresponds to the repeated clicking on the dustbin symbol.
You must close the following safety question at exit.
3.7.2
Measurement time
In the repeat mode, you can have displayed the remaining measurement time.
In the PartManager, click via the menu bar "Settings / Defaults for
Programs / CMM / GEOPAK" and come to the "Settings GEOPAK"
window.
In this window, click on the "Other" button and
in the following window, click on "Display Remaining Measurement
Time".
In the first program run is indicated, how many time the

measurement course has lasted till now.
After the first program run, the remaining measurement time of the
part program is indicated.
This remaining measurement time is updated with each run.
Since part programs can also contain commands as well as
branches, text on screen etc. only an approximate remaining
measurement time can be indicated.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-23
3.8
Input Characteristics
In the Input characteristics dialogue box we distinguish between

settings which will not be modified during the whole program
(millimetres/inch) and
settings, which are valid for one program line only (see GEOPAK
editor). These settings can be changed at any time. The type of coordinate system can even be changed in several follow-up dialogue
boxes (e.g. "CMM procedure", "Theoretical element circle" etc.).
The default settings made at this time determine which suggestions
are made in the dialogue boxes.
By means of these default settings you determine how e.g. angles, direction
vectors etc.
are entered in the dialogue boxes
are described in the result field.
Normally, direction vectors are standardised (length=1). Their components are
also called cosine because they include the cosine of the angle, which the vector
has with the corresponding principal axis.
If you have selected the input of cosines, it is not necessary to care that the
vectors have the length=1. It will do if the components accord in their proportion.
For example (1/1/0) for a probing below 45 degrees in the X/Y plane.
The changes made in the program lines are stored. These changes are
important for the repeat mode.
To open the Input characteristics dialogue box choose Settings / Input
characteristics from the menu bar.
3.9
Reset System
To reset means to delete all actions made so far in the program run.
To open the Reset system window choose "Settings / System / Reset system"
from the menu bar.
II-24
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.10 Printer Settings

It is possible to output graphic and text on different printers, e.g. if they do not fit
in one document for layout reasons. Another reason to choose different printers
may be the printer resolution or you simply wish to print graphic and text on
different printers.
To open the Print dialogue box choose "Settings / System / Printer Settings /
Graphic or Text" from the menu bar.
3.11 Reset Controller

Do not use this function unless problems with the machine control occur. To use
the function choose "Settings / System / Reset Controller" from the menu bar.
3.12 Sound Output

To open the Sound output dialogue box choose Settings / System / Sound from
the menu bar. Check the "Sound on" check box first and then check the following
check boxes:
Element begin
Count points
Element finished.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-25
3.13 Pallet Co-Ordinate System

With the pallet co-ordinate system you can
measure different parts
on one or several pallets
at different positions on the machine table
automatically or in CNC mode (see picture below).
3.13.1
Definitions
The table co-ordinate system (table position) determines in which position the
pallet is situated on the CMM table.
The pallet co-ordinate system determines, at which position the part is placed
on the pallet.
As different types of pallets are possible, you must assign numbers to the pallets.
The pallet co-ordinate systems are separately stored for each type of pallet. You
may assign the same pallet co-ordinate system numbers for different types of
pallets.
3.13.2
Connection to Manager Programs and Q-PAK
As for each single part exists a part program, the same way exists for each pallet
a manager program, which is calling the single part programs. This manager
program
includes information about which part program must be executed at
which pallet position and ...
gets the information from Q-PAK, on which table position the pallet
is situated.
Condition
First of all, you must have stored as table co-ordinate system the positions at
which the pallets must be situated (refer to "Store/Load Co-Ordinate System").
Procedure
II-26
v 2.4
14.09.04

For each position on the pallet, you define a co-ordinate system.
Store this co-ordinate system as a pallet co-ordinate system (menu
bar "Co-Ordinate System / Store Pallet Co-Ordinate System").
Window "Store Co-Ordinate System"
In this window, you enter the pallet co-ordinate system no. at the top.
This number is used for the pallet co-ordinate system in the manager
program.
In the middle field, you enter for which type of pallet this co-ordinate
system is valid.
Below, you enter at which table position the pallet was situated when
defining the co-ordinate system.
So, you have all information for using the pallet co-ordinate system in the
manager program.
The "Load Pallet Co-Ordinate System" command
is exclusively used for tests.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-27
Programming Help Contents
4
4.1

Programming help: Functions
There are some functions designed to make easier for you generating an
effective part program.
Automatic Measurement: If you need the automatic element
measurement, just click on this icon (for example Circle). Then the automatic
element measurement window appears, immediately after you confirm the
element. Thus, it is not necessary to activate this function explicitly. The button
remains pressed if you activate the element again.
Automatic element finished: As soon as the required number of
measurement points has been taken,
the element is considered to be ready and no more data points

are expected,
the element is calculated and stored.
This only makes sense if you know in advance how many points you
need. If you want to keep measuring until you have reached the limits of
your element, you should deactivate this function. In this case, you
should use the icon "Automatic element finished" to tell GEOPAK that
the measurement has been finished.
Measurement Graphic: After you have activated the function, the element
you measure is continuously presented in the window "Measurement display".
Acoustic action: If you want, a voice can tell you what to do next; this is
especially useful for manual machines, or during manual alignment.
Tolerate: this button activates the tolerance-input window immediately after
you have confirmed the element window. In this case, you do not have to activate
the function explicitly.
Loop counter: Within a loop, the element memory number can be
automatically incremented for each execution by pressing this button. If you want
to store the element into the same memory number, do not use this button.
No projection: If you do not want the element to be automatically projected
into the plane it is nearest to, you should press this button.
II-28
v 2.4
14.09.04
4.2
Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence
You have four options for activating the measurement graphic:

Click on both symbols:
The element and the number of the measured and of the expected
measurement points are displayed (see ill.).
Click on the graphics symbol only:

The element and the number of the measured measurement points
are displayed.
Click on none of the symbols:
The number of the measured measurement points is displayed.
Click only on the symbol "Aut. element finished":
The number of the measured and of the expected measurement
points are displayed.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-29
Variables and Calculations
In addition to the possibilities GEOPAK offers in connection with the geometrical

calculations, you can define according to requirements - your own variables
and perform calculations. You can use the variables wherever GEOPAK expects
a numerical value. GEOPAK makes your work easier offering a list of the
variables, which you have defined before.
Activate the "Define Variable and Calculate" dialogue window
via the symbol of the toolbar on the right of screen margin.
By mouse-click, open the list box beside "Names of Variable".
Click on "Your" Variable.
GEOPAK accepts this variable as input value.
Variables generally have three major advantages:
You can perform calculations, which are not programmed in
GEOPAK, e.g. the calculation of a the area of circle out of the
diameter, and ...
You can use variables (without other calculations) to edit flexible
part programs. This means that you only have to write a single part
program for similar parts that only differ in some measurements
For example, when calculating sealing rings having different
diameters: here, only one part program for different diameters is
sufficient if the diameter is defined as variable.
Variables can also be read in a file or output into a file. This way,
you can exchange data with other programs
II-30
v 2.4
14.09.04
5.1
Definition of Variables
In addition to the possibilities GEOPAK offers for the geometrical calculations,

you can define according to your requirements - your own variables and
perform calculations. You can use the variables wherever GEOPAK expects a
numerical value.
Call the function "Formula Calculation" via the symbol or the
menu "Calculate" and come to the "Define and Calculate Variables"
dialogue window.
Input the name you want for your variable (maximum 18 characters)
into the line with names of variables.
An expressive term makes easier finding the correct variable again
and increases the readability of your part program.
You should try to find a method which makes sense (also see topic
Save/Load Variable)
5.1.1
Decimal Places
As the next step, define in the dialogue window "Define Variable and Calculate"
how many decimal places you need for this variable. The calculation will be done
with the best possible accuracy, but for the
protocol,
tolerance and the
comparison queries
only the number of decimal places you have defined is taken into account.
You should know
When calculating with decimal fractions, there is always a small
truncation error. This truncation error makes it nearly impossible that a
real number "exactly" accepts a value desired.
If you perform a query of a calculated value for equation with a number,
the computer will always inform you that the values are different
because normally, to make an example, they differentiate around 10*E18. However, this difference is not important for a normal application.
The operator however, wants figures with such a small difference to be
treated as "Equal".
You can find details in the topic Table of Operators and Functions .
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-31
5.1.2
Variables: Input of Formula
In the next description field, you can input just a number or a complete formula.
In each case, GEOPAK immediately displays the result on the right
(besides the text field) of the formula.
If a calculation cannot be performed, the result is shown as "-".
See which operandi and operators are allowed in a formula in detail
under the topic Table of Operators and Functions.
Upper and lower case letters are of no importance.
5.1.3
Include Element Characteristics

If you want to include the characteristic of a measured element into
the calculation (e.g. the diameter of a measured circle), first click on
the list box "Elements" (at bottom left) with the elements already
defined
Then, click on the text field "Feature". Here, select the characteristic
of the element.
When clicking on the symbol, this element characteristic is
accepted in the input field for the formula.
If the calculation is making sense, the result is immediately
displayed.
Hint
In this dialogue window (top on the right), you find the symbol. You
can undo as many steps as you want.
II-32
v 2.4
14.09.04
5.2
Input of Variables
This function allows you to enter variables in the running part program by means
of a dialogue box.
To open the "Input variable" dialogue box click on this icon or choose
"Calculate / Input variable" from the menu bar.
In the "Input variable" dialogue box, proceed as follows:
Simple input: Click on this icon if you wish to enter one
variable only.
In the Text for dialogue text box enter the dialogue text. The
dialogue text describes the information to be entered in a part
program dialogue.
Make your entries in the Name of variable, Suggestion, Lower

limit, Upper limit and Decimals text boxes. Make sure to use a
significant name of variable.
From dialogue file: Click on this icon if you wish to enter

several variables in a dialogue box.
14.09.04
In the Filename text box type the file name or...
... click on this icon to choose from the displayed .udl files
that you have created before.
You will find more detailed information in the file "Specifications
for Layout Dialogue Boxes" (dia_lay_e.pdf) on the MCOSMOS
CD-ROM.
As it is possible to create several dialogues in one file enter the

name of the dialogue in the "Name of dialogue" text box.
v 2.4
II-33
5.3
Yes/No Variable
This function is the simple version of the "Input variable" dialogue box. E.g. if you
wish to determine before a measurement that the measuring results are to be
printed, choose "Calculate / Yes/No variable" from the menu bar.
Make your entries in the Text for dialogue and Name of variable text boxes.
To choose Yes or No click on the corresponding icon or use the
"Enter" or "ESC" key. If you choose "Yes" the value 1 will be written in the
variable, if you choose "No" it is the value 0. With this variable you can control
printing by means of the branch functionality.
5.4
5.4.1
Save / Load Variables

Save
If you need the contents of the variables beyond the actual program run you
should use the function "Save Variable" (menu bar "Calculation / Save
Variables"). In the following window, you enter the file for the variables, so all
defined variables at this moment are stored.
5.4.2
Load
You can reload all variables as you have saved them before. Only enter the
name of the file.
If you want to load only a single variable activate the symbol. Enter, for
example the name of only one variable. Only the one you have selected is
loaded (e.g. var1). Or you enter a wildcard (e.g. var*). In this case, all variables
beginning with var are loaded.
5.4.3
Definition
Before defining variables you should take care of giving names that make sense.
Here an example:
In a sub-program you want to load the jumping-off point via X, Y
and Z out of a file without overwriting other variables when loading.
If you have named these variables XCoor, YCoor and ZCoor, you
would have to write three loading instructions.
But if you have designated them CoorX, CoorY and CoorZ, you can
load them with one instruction, namely Coor*.
II-34
v 2.4
14.09.04
5.4.4
Calling Variable from File
You can wait for a variable file of another program.

Click this symbol to make sure that the next program run really waits for
this current information. The file is then deleted after reading.
Click this symbol, if you want to select a variables file only while the
program run takes place. Then during the execution of the part program the run
of the part program is stopped and you can select a variables file in the file
selection dialogue "Load Variables from File".
5.5
Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable
Click on the symbol or use the menu bar with the functions Calculate /
Actual Position in Variable".
In the following dialog window input the names of the variables into the text
boxes.
Furthermore, you can read in this position either in the actual part coordinate system (de-activated symbol) or in the machine co-ordinate system
(symbol activated).
Hint
When entering the name of the variable, you can use either a name
already existing, or a new one. If you use a new name, a new variable will
be created.
Be careful when entering the name. Any typing mistake you make
causes a new (wrong) variable to be created under this name and
possibly you then use this variable.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-35
5.6
Actual Temperature in Variable
To record the workpiece temperature it is possible to connect 1 - 8 temperature

sensors to the control system.
In order for you to record and, if necessary, document temperature variations in
the part program, these variations can be loaded into variables (refer also to the
subject Formula Input). Make the following entries in the "Current Temperature
into Variable" dialogue from the "Calculations" menu:
Name the variable and make your choice which temperature you want to take.
The calculation temperature is recorded at every part program start.
GEOPAK assumes that temperature remains unchanged while the
program is running.
The average value from all available sensors is shown in the
"Machine Position" window. This allows the part program to check
that the calculated temperature is still valid.
You can also make your decision for the average temperature of
selected sensors. In this case one button is active for each
connected sensor.
If you want to know the CMM's current temperature values at the three axes,
you will have to click, at your option, on one of the buttons in the lower section of
this dialogue. The CMM will use these temperatures automatically to
compensate for its own temperature dependence.
For information on this subject refer to Temperature Compensation and,
if a manual CMM is of interest to you, to the subject Temperature Compensation:
Manual CMM.
II-36
v 2.4
14.09.04
5.7
Settings for Temperature Compensation
Introduction
In cases where you wish to compensate for workpiece expansion or shrinkage,
you have to pay special attention to a reference point. Our picture below is an
example showing a workpiece held by a fixed stop (hatched). Expansions are
possible only in the direction of the arrow. The reference point is marked with X.
The workpiece can also be bolted (see picture below).
As a general rule, the reference point is always the point whose position remains
absolutely the same despite material expansion or shrinkage.
Make sure that the reference point of a rotary table that is required to be
turned coincides with the centre of the table..
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-37
5.8
Settings in the dialogue
To access the dialogue, go to the "Calculate" menu and the "Settings for
Temperature Compensation" functions. The dialogue is divided into for sections.
Temperature coefficient
You make your decision for or against a change. If your decision is positive,
enter the coefficient or choose the workpiece material.
Calculation temperature
You choose the average temperature of either all available sensors or selected
sensors (for details refer to the subject Current Temperature into Variable).
Reference point for compensation
To change the reference point, proceed as follows:
Enter the workpiece co-ordinates, or ...
Take the current CMM position by clicking on the symbol. Reediting is possible.
Where a rotary table is available, you can also choose the rotary
table position.
Apply temperature compensation to movements
If you should approach the same co-ordinates in spite of an expansion of the
workpiece, e.g., you will get to results which possibly do not agree with the
measurement job order (see picture below). To compensate for this fault, select
the option "Apply Temperature Compensation to Movements".
In this example a circle is measured in XY - plane.

Before the expansion the measuring height is about -4.999.
After the expansion the measuring height lies with -5.000
In order to be able to activate this option, you must have indicated the reference
point.
II-38
v 2.4
14.09.04
5.9
Definition of String Variables
This function allows you to change character strings or to "remember them for
reuse", e.g. you can make use of this function if you wish to determine a file
name.
To open the "Define string variable" dialogue box click on this
icon or choose "Calculate / Define string variable" from the menu
bar.
In the Name of string variable text box enter a name to define the
variable (18 characters max.).
A significant name makes it easy to find the correct string variable
and improves the legibility of your part program (see also chapter
Store variables to file/Load variables from file.
You will find further information in the file "UM_string_code_e.pdf". The file you
find in the MCOSMOS directory "Documentation \ files \ geopak".
5.10 Input of String Variables

This function allows you to enter string variables in the running part program by
means of a dialogue box.
To open the "Input string variable" dialogue box click on this icon or
choose "Calculate / Input string variable" from the menu bar.
In the "Input string variable" dialogue box, proceed as follows:
Simple input: Click on this icon if you wish to enter one variable only.
In the Text for dialogue text box enter the dialogue text. The
dialogue text describes the information to be entered in a part
program dialogue.
Make your entries in the Name of string variable, Input length and
Suggestion text boxes. Make sure to use a significant name of
string variable.
From dialogue file: Click on this icon if you wish to enter several string
variables in a dialogue box.
In the Filename text box type the file name or...
... click on this icon to choose from the displayed .udl files that
you have to create before.
For further information concerning the Specifications for Layout
Dialogoe Boxes, please refer to your MCOSMOS CD-ROM under
"Documents", folder "GEOPAK", file "dia_lay_e.pdf".
As it is possible to create several dialogues in one file enter the
name of the dialogue in the "Name of dialogue" text box.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-39
5.11 Store/Load String Variables

Store string variables
You make use of this function if you need the contents of string variables for
further purposes. To open the "Store string variables" dialogue box choose
"Calculate / Store string variables" from the menu bar and enter the file for the
string variables. All string variables defined at this time will be stored.
Load string variable

To open the stored string variables simply enter the name of the file. Note that
two different formats can be read:
Format with names of string variables
Format without names of string variables
The function of the Use load filter icon depends on the used format.
The file to be read already contains the name of the string variable.
Only the string variables, which correspond to the filter, are read.
The file to be read does not contain the name of the string variable.
In this case the filter represents the first part of the name to be
defined for the string variable.
If you do not preset a filter, "STR" will be used as default string variable. The
second part is an incremental counter (upwards) starting with zero.
Example for Use load filter with names of string variables

A file of string variables with the following contents exists:
Text1=First Text
Text2=Second Text
Info1=First Information
Info2=Second Information
The "Text*" filter will be set.
The following string variables are read:
Text1=First Text
Text2=Second Text
Example for Use load filter without names of string

variables
A file of string variables with the following contents exists:
First Text
Second Text
Third Text
Fourth Text
II-40
v 2.4
14.09.04

The "Text*" filter will be set.
The following string variables are read:
Text0= First Text
Text1= Second Text
Text2= Third Text
Text3= Fourth Text
5.12 Wait for file with string variable

Click on the Wait for file icon to wait for a file of string variables of another
program.
Click this symbol to make sure that the next program run really waits for
this current information. The file is then deleted after reading.
Click this symbol, if you want to select a variables file only while the
program run takes place. Then during the execution of the part program the run
of the part program is stopped and you can select a variables file in the file
selection dialogue "Load Variables from File".
5.13 System Variable in the Formula Calculation

You come to the dialog "Define Variable and Calculate" via the symbol or
the menu bar "Calculate / Formula Calculation".
In the text box "System Parameters" of the dialog you determine the
list selection for...
Results of Min/Max Calculation

Results for Best Fit
Probe Data
CNC Parameters
In the list box on the bottom right, you search for a corresponding
component.
For acceptance, click on the symbol.
The component you selected appears on top of the text box.
Over the symbol "Undo" you can make each action again
annulled. That is especially then helpful if you deleted mistakenly
formula entries.
Details about parameters can be taken from the topic "Table of Operators and
Functions"
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-41
Operators and Functions
6
6.1

Arithmetic Operators
Operator
Description
Addition
Subtraction
Multiplication
Division
Exponential
6.2
Relational operators
Operator
Description
<
Less than
<=
Less than or equal to
>
Greater than
>=
Greater than or equal to
Equal to
<>
Not equal to
Result of logical operations (comparison)

Operator
Relation between operand 1

and operand 2
Result
<
operand 1 is less than operand

2
operand 1 is greater than or

equal to operand 2
operand 1 is less than or equal

to operand 2
operand 1 is greater than

operand 2
<=
>=
II-42
operand 1 is equal to operand 2 1

operand 1 is not equal to
operand 2
operand 1 is greater than or

equal to operand 2
operand 1 is less than operand

2
v 2.4
14.09.04

>
<>
operand 1 is greater than

operand 2
operand 1 is less than or equal

to operand 2
operand 1 is not equal to

operand 2
operand 1 is equal to operand 2 0
6.3
Logical Operators
Operator
Description
AND
Logical AND
OR
Logical OR
NOT
Logical NOT
Result of logical operations (Boolean operators)

Operator
Operand 1
Operand 2
Result
AND
<>0
<>0
<>0
<>0
<>0
<>0
<>0
<>0
OR
NOT
6.4
Constants
Spelling
Description
PI
Pi (3,14159)
Eulers constant (2.71828...)
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-43
6.5
Trigonometrical Functions
The trigonometrical functions expect the angles to be specified in degrees as

parameters and produce them (inverse functions), in turn, in degrees.
Spelling
Description
SIN
Sine
COS
Cosine
TAN
Tangent
ASN
Inverse sine
ACS
Inverse cosine
ATN
Inverse tangent
6.6
Arithmetic Functions
Spelling
Description
LG
Logarithm (base 10)
LGN
Natural logarithm (base e)
SQR
Square
SQRT
Square root
SGN
Sign
ABS
Absolute value
INT
Truncation
FRC
Fraction
RND
Round
MIN
Minimum
MAX
Maximum
DEG
Conversion from radiant to

degree
RAD
Conversion from degree to

radiant
F2C
Conversion from F to C
C2F
Conversion from C to F
GAUSSRAND
Gaussian distributed random

value in range of argument
RAND
Gaussian distributed random

value in range of argument
II-44
v 2.4
14.09.04
6.7
Operator Precedence
Operator precedence from the highest to lowest

Unary -, NOT
EXPONENT
SGN, ABS, INT, FRC, RND, MIN, MAX, DEG, RAD,
SQR, SQRT, SIN, COS, TAN, ASN, ACS, ATN
*, /
+, AND
OR
<, <=, >, >=, =, <>
The operator precedence can be changed by ().
6.8
Basic Geometry Elements
Spelling
Description
PT
Point
CR
Circle
EL
Ellipse
CO
Cone
CY
Cylinder
LN
Line
PL
Plane
SP
Sphere
DI
Distance
ANG
Angle
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-45
6.9
Element components
The values of the element features depend on the unit (inch or mm).
Spelling
Description
X,Y,Z
Location
I,J,K
Direction (cosine format)
A,B,C
Direction ( , , )(angles in degrees)
RcylXY, RcylYZ,
RCylZX
Cylindrical co-ordinate system, radius
RSph
Spherical co-ordinate system, radius
PhiXY, PhiYZ,
PhiZX
Cylindrical & spherical co-ordinate system, angle
ThetaX, ThetaY,
ThetaZ
Spherical co-ordinate system, angle
Only cylinder, height
Length
Radius of circle, etc. and large radius of ellipse
Diameter (same as radius)
Di
Distance from origin (plane & line)
R2
Big radius of ellipse
D2
Big diameter of ellipse
CA
Cone angle (degree)
ChA
Half cone angle (degree)
Rng
Range (form of element)
Sig
Sigma
Ang
Only for angle, calculated angle
XY,YZ,ZX
Only for angle, projected angle
Di
Only for distance, calculated distance
MaxNo
Highest used element number
Example for element access:

Access the diameter of the circle with the memory number 3
CR[3].D
Access the X component (cosine angle) of the cylinder axis with the
memory number 8
CY[8].I
II-46
v 2.4
14.09.04
6.10 GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes

Elementtyp
Component
Size of the hole
SQ
Width of the square
RE
Width of the rectangle
RE
Length of the rectangle
SL
Width of the slot
SL
Length of the slot
DR
Width of the drop
DR
Length of the drop
DR
Large radius=W/2 of the drop
DR
R2
small Radius of the drop
TR
Length of the triangle
TR
Height of the triangle
TZ
Width of the trapezoid
TZ
Height of the trapezoid
HX
Width of a hexagon
HX
W2
Width 2 of a hexagon
Like for the Basic Geometry Elements you can also enter the following variable
for the hole shapes.
Position
Cartesian co-ordinates
Cylinder co-ordinates
Sphere co-ordinates
The same applies for the direction of the axis as an angle or in cosine format.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-47
6.11 GEOPAK Probes

Spelling
Description
PRB
Probe
Only the actual probe can be accessed

Probe components
Spelling
Description
X,Y,Z
Offsets
A,B
Angles of rotary probe
Radius of probe
Diameter of probe
Rng
Range (form)
Sig
Sigma
Tree
Number of probe tree
Num
Number of actual probe
MaxNum
Highest probe number used
NoOfDef
Number of defined probes
MBall.D
Master ball diameter
MBall.R
Master ball radius
MBall.X
Master ball X position
MBall.Y
Master ball Y position
MBall.Z
Master ball Z position
TreeOffs.X
Offset of actual tree in X to tree 1
TreeOffs.Y
Offset of actual tree in Y to tree 1
TreeOffs.Z
Offset of actual tree in Z to tree 1
Example for probe access:

Access the diameter of the actual probe
PRB.D
Access the X offset
PRB.X
II-48
v 2.4
14.09.04
6.12 GEOPAK Rotary Table Data

Syntax
Description
RT
Rotary Table
Syntax
Description
Ang
Current angle in degree
X, Y, Z
Alignment position in machine coordinates
A, B, C
Alignment direction in degree
I, J, K
Alignment direction (Cosine format)
6.13 Minimum Maximum

These values are not available unless the minimum-maximum calculation
function has been performed previously (Menu bar / Calculation / Minimum<>Maximum).
6.13.1
Minimum maximum calculation
Spelling
Description
MinMax
Result of the minimum maximum

calculation
6.13.2
Minimum maximum features
Spelling
Description
MinVal
Minimum
MaxVal
Maximum
Avg
Average (mean)
Rng
Sig
Sigma
MemMinElm
Element number of the element

with the minimum value
MemMaxElm
Element number of the element

with the maximum value
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-49
6.13.3
Minimum maximum components
Spelling
Description
X,Y,Z
Location
I,J,K
Direction (cosine format)
ElI, ElJ, ElK
Direction of ellipse axis (cosine format)
A,B,C
Direction ( , , )(angles in degrees)
ElA, ElB, ElC
Direction of ellipse axis ( , , )(angles in

degrees)
RCylXY, RCylYZ,
RCylZX
Cylindrical co-ordinate system, radius
RSph
Spherical co-ordinate system, radius
PhiXY, PhiYZ,
PhiZX
Cylindrical & spherical co-ordinate system,

angle
ThetaX, ThetaY,
ThetaZ
Spherical co-ordinate system, angle
Radius of circle, etc. and large radius of ellipse
Diameter (same as radius)
Di
Distance from origin (plane & line)
R2
Small radius of ellipse
D2
Small diameter of ellipse
CA
Cone angle (degree)
ChA
Half cone angle (degree)
Rng
Sig
Sigma
Ang
Only for angle, calculated angle
XY,YZ,ZX
Only for angle, projected angle
AngXY,AngYZ,AngZ Only for angle, projected angle, these terms

X
only exist for compatibility with the distance
terms
DiXYZ
Only for distance, calculated distance
DiX, DiY, DiZ
Components of the distance calculation
6.13.4
Example for minimum maximum access:

Access the range of the x co-ordinates
MinMax.Rng.X
$$ access the maximum value of the diameter
MinMax.MaxVal.D
II-50
v 2.4
14.09.04

$$ access the element number with the maximum vector component in
x direction
MinMax.MemMaxElm.I
6.14 Best Fit

These values are not available unless a best fit has been performed previously
(Menu bar / Co-Ordinate System / Best Fit)
Spelling
Description
BestFit
Result of best fit
6.14.1
Best Fit Components
Spelling
Description
X,Y,Z
Offsets (translation)
A,B,C
Angles (rotation) ( , , ) (angles in

degrees)
I,J,K
Angles (rotation) (cosine format)
6.14.2
Example for best fit access:

Access the x component of the translation vector
BestFit.X
Access the rotation angle
BestFit.B
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-51
6.15 Other GEOPAK Variables

Spelling
Description
SYS.UF
Unit factor, 1.00 in mm mode, 25.4 in inch

mode
SYS.RC
Repeat counter
SYS.LC
Loop counter
SYS.TC
Temperature coefficient
SYS.SF
Scale factor
CNC.SD
Safety distance of CMMC
CS.Num
Actual co-ordinate system number
Sys.IOBit[x]
Status (0/1) of IO-Bit no x

x from 0 to 99
6.16 Date and Time

Spelling
Description
Sys.Time.H
current hour
Sys.Time.M
current minutes
Sys.Time.S
current seconds
Sys.Time.MS
current milliseconds
Sys.Date.Y
year
Sys.Date.M
month
Sys.Date.D
day
Sys.Date.DoY
day of the year
6.17 Week-days
Spelling
Description
Sys.Date.DoW
Week-day as per ISO 8601
Sys.Date.DoWu
Week-day as per current user settings
Sys.Date.DoWs
Week-day as per system settings
6.18 Week numbers

Spelling
Description
Sys.Date.W
Week as per ISO 8601
Sys.Date.Wu
Week as per current user settings
Sys.Date.Ws
Week as per system settings
II-52
v 2.4
14.09.04
6.19 System Time

Spelling
Description
SYS.CT
Current 'C' time, seconds from 1.01.1970

UTC.
Based on the ISO norm ISO 8601:1988 / EN 28601:1992 / before DIN

1355.
In Europe, all three possibilities are identical but in the USA, we have to
do with the following conditions:
The first weekday is Sunday.
The first week is the week of the 01.01 (according to ISO: the first
weekday is: Monday; first week is: the week containing the 04.01).
Hint
Should you wish to register the time required to run your part program,
you are well advised to take the difference between two system time
readings (SYS.CT).
6.20 Examples
Calculate the polar angle from circle centre to x axis and assign the
variable "Pangle" to it
Pangll=ATN(CR[1].Y/CR[1].X)
Calculate the area of the circle with the memory number 4
FL=Pi/4*SQR(CR[4].D)
Assign a value to variable var2
var2=3.00
Calculate double the amount of var2
var3=var2 * 2
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-53
6.21 Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons

The Version 2.2 offers you a variety of new variables which allow you, for
instance, to obtain information on
the last nominal-to-actual comparison, or on
all nominal-to-actual comparisons of one measurement.
You can use the information about the last nominal-to-actual comparison as
basis for your decision as to how to proceed with the part program.
You access the dialogue "Define Variable and Calculate" through "Menu bar /
Calculate / Formula Calculation". This dialogue provides you the selection lists
under the heading "System Parameters (see fig. below).
You should differentiate between

a general statement as to whether or not the tolerance values have
been exceeded.
You obtain this general statement through
the Last Feature (System Variable "Tol") ,
the Last Element (System Variable "Tol.Cmd") or
all Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons (System Variable "Tol.All").
each single value of a feature (current position, diameter, etc.)

However, to get these individual values, you should refer to a single
nominal-to-actual comparison only. From the system variables, you
should choose the option "Tol".
Hint
When you use one of the tolerance variables for the "Formula
Calculation" without having performed a nominal-to-actual comparison,
the return value will always be = 0.
II-54
v 2.4
14.09.04
6.22 Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison

You can make use of all values calculated as a result of a nominal-to-actual
comparison, using for this purpose the following table with the system variable
"Tol".
Spelling
Description
Value type
Tol.Actual
Actual value
Numerical value
Tol.ActCrd1
Actual value of the first co-ordinate of

position tolerance or concentricity
depends on the projection plane
Numerical value
Tol.ActCrd2
Actual value of the second co-ordinate

of position tolerance or concentricity
Numerical value
Tol.ActCrd3
Actual value of the third co-ordinate of

position tolerance or concentricity
Numerical value
Tol.Deviation
Deviation
Numerical value
Tol.LowerTol
Lower tolerance limit
Numerical value
Tol.Nominal
Actual value
Numerical value
Tol.OutOfSpec
Value out of specification
Numerical value
Tol.PosNo
Position number
Numerical value
Tol.RefCrd1
Reference value of the first co-ordinate

Numerical value
Tol.RefCrd2
Reference value of the second coordinate of position tolerance or

concentricity depends on the projection
plane
Numerical value
Tol.RefCrd3
Reference value of the third co-ordinate

Numerical value
Tol.UpperTol
Upper tolerance limit
Numerical value
Tol.NomTol
Nominal tolerance
Numerical value
Tol.LowerSpec
Lower specification (nominal + lower tol) Numerical value
Tol.UpperSpec
Upper specification (nominal + upper tol) Numerical value
You obtain the general statement in the variables "Tol.TolState",

"Tol.TolUpperState" and "Tol.TolLowerState" as per the following table.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-55

Tolerance state
TolStat
TolUpperState
TolLowerState
Actual value beyond

upper tolerance
Actual value
between upper
tolerance and upper
intervention limit
Actual value
between upper and
lower intervention
limit
Actual value
between lower
intervention limit
and lower tolerance
Actual value below

lower tolerance
6.23 Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last Element

Should you want to obtain a general statement on all features of the last,
tolerance command you use for this purpose the system variable
"Tol.Cmd.TolStae". In doing this, the results will be presented in accordance with
the table "Tolerance state" (refer to Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison). In this
case, of all features of this element the worst result (highest number) will be
taken.
You have the following possibilities:
Spelling
Description
Value type
Tol.Cmd.TolState
Returns the state of the

tolerance command.
Tolerance state
Tol.Cmd.TolUpperState

tolerance command as
TolState , but only for the
upper tolerance. See also
table below.
Tolerance state
Tol.Cmd.TolLowerState

tolerance command as
TolState, but only for the
lower tolerance. See also
table below..
Tolerance state
II-56
v 2.4
14.09.04
6.24 Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons

You can use this variable at the end of a part program, if you want to know if all
dimensions of the part are within the tolerance or intervention limits (System
Variable "Tol.All."). In doing this, the results will be presented in accordance with
the table "Tolerance state" (refer to Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison). In this
case, of all features of this element the worst result (highest number) will be
taken.
In addition, you can request summary information in line with the following
table.
Spelling
Description
Value type
Tol.All.TolState
Returns the state of all

tolerance commands
Three-State
Tol.All.TolUpperState

tolerance commands as
upper tolerance. Cf. table
below.
Three-State
Tol.All.TolLowerState

tolerance commands as
lower tolerance. Cf. table
below.
Three-State
Tol.Count.NoOfTol
Number of tolerance
comparisons
Numerical value
Tol.Count.InTol
Number of the tolerance

comparisons within the
tolerance
Numerical value
Tol.Count.InCtrl

comparisons within the
intervention limits
Numerical value
Tol.Count.OOC

comparisons out of the
intervention limits (that is,
between intervention limit
and tolerance intervention
limit)
Numerical value
Tol.Count.OOT

tolerance limits
Numerical value
Tol.Count.OOCUpper

upper intervention limits
Numerical value
Tol.Count.OOCLower
Numerical value
comparisons out of the lower
intervention limits
Tol.Count.OOTUpper

14.09.04
v 2.4
Numerical value
II-57

upper tolerance limits
Tol.Count.OOTLower
Numerical value
comparisons out of the lower
tolerance limits
Remarks:
Tol.Count.InTol + Tol.Count.OOT = Tol.Count.NoOfTol
Tol.Count.InCtrl + Tol.Count.OOC + Tol.Count.OOT =
Tol.Count.NoOfTol
Tol.Count.InCtrl + Tol.Count.OOC = Tol.Count.InTol
Tol.Count.OOCUpper + Tol.Count.OOCLower = Tol.Count.OOC
Tol.Count.OOTUpper + Tol.Count.OOTLower = Tol.Count.OOT
Every tolerance comparison is counted, that is, a part program
command "Tolerance comparison" can include more than tolerance
comparisons.
II-58
v 2.4
14.09.04
Scale Factor
Scale Factor
If you know for example that a plastic part, after the injection moulding of
duroplastic material, shrinks by a certain percentage, you should enlarge the
form by this percentile. Use the "Scale Factor" function (menu bar "Calculate /
Scale Factor").
Example
When the part shrinks 5 per cent, enter 0.95.
Entering 1.00 means that the co-ordinates and dimensions remain
unchanged.
In most of the cases the scale factor is identical for all co-ordinates, for many
freeform surfaces, as well. Due to specific properties of workpieces produced
e.g. by an injection moulding process, it is quite possible that material shrinkage
or expansion is not identical in all directions.
In the following dialogue (with new functions being available as from Version 2.2)
you are offered a total of four options.
7.1
Scale all elements (including element point)
Clicking these option causes one scale factor to be entered for all three axes,
including the element point. This option can be used in most of the cases.
7.2
Scale only element point
Due to probe radius compensation, setting a different scale for each axis makes
sense only for the element point. Other elements (freeform surfaces) would be
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-59
Scale Factor
calculated using the scale factor 1.0. In these cases, there would not even be a
warning.
The option "Different scale factor for each axis" cannot be used in
calculating formulae.
The "Undo" command is not supported. In the case of an error occurring
in the learn mode you would have to set the scale factor once more.
7.3
Set scaling centre into origin
Clicking this option causes the scaling centre to be set into the origin of the
workpiece. This is not advisable for offset-defined co-ordinate systems (RPS
alignment, e.g. automotive parts).
In the present example showing any workpiece (2), the scaling centre (3) is not
located in the origin of the co-ordinate system (1).
7.4
Use scale factor for 3D-TOL
For the "Scale only element point" option the button is deactivated. The same is
true in case you have not installed the dongle option for 3D-TOL.
3D-TOL can assume the scale factor and the scaling centre only in
case it applies to all axes, i.e. when all elements are to be scaled.
For points measured with different scale factors for each axis and
required to be transferred to 3D-TOL, use Position Tolerance.
Please note that in this case it is your sole responsibility to define the
nominal values.
II-60
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
Sequence Control
8.1
8.1.1
Loops
Definition
The loops are used to repeat the same or similar procedures several times in
succession. It happens that your measurement task requires, e.g. to save
measured elements in different element storage areas. For this purpose, we
have installed a counter, which is increasing the number of the element storage
by one at each loop flow.
All dialogues showing the symbol "Loop Counter" (on the left) provide you
direct access to the function "Loops".
When you want to access the same element at each time the loop
is run, make sure that you de-activate the loop counter.
When you want to access an additional element at each time the
loop is run, make sure that you activate the loop counter
If this is the case, the counter will increment by one at any flow in
progress, beginning from the number entered from time to time.
8.1.2
Symbol or Special Character
Via the symbol, the loop indicator can be immediately used in the dialogues
e.g. for tolerance comparisons, in the element storage or for storage of contours.
It is also possible to realise free inputs via the special characters "@LC", e.g.
when
entering file names,
when entering formula calculation or even
when you input a text.
When using the special character "@LC", you must pay attention to use
capital characters without fail.
8.1.3
Procedure
You come to the loop functions via the symbols or the menu
bar "Program / Beginning of Loop (End of Loop)".
In the window "Beginning of Loop", you determine the "Number of
Executions".
This can also be realised through variables (see details of the topic
"Definition of Variables").
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-61
Sequence Control
8.2
Branches
If, in an existing part program, you want to carry out individual instructions only in
certain conditions, you can do that via install "Branches". The branches can only
be created in the GEOPAK Editor.
Cf. details of topic "Branches" in the GEOPAK Editor.
8.3
8.3.1
Subprograms
Definition and Types
There are two reasons to apply sub-programs:

You want to divide up (structure) a long part program into blocks
making sense and giving a clear overview.
You want to hold self-repeating program runs in a sub-program in
order to use it again. In these cases, especially variables are
offered, with which you adapt an existing sub-program to the actual
situation.
Example: Sub-program for bore pictures with rims having four or
five bores.
Sub-programs are separated into two program types.
Sub-programs, which are related to a parts
Sub-programs, which can be used from several parts (global)
The creation and administration of the global programs is realised in the subprogram management (see details in the PartManager under topic
"Administration of Sub-Program").
8.3.2
Create a Local Sub-Program
At the position where you want to create the sub-program activate the function
via
the menu bar "Program / Sub-Program" or via
the symbol of the toolbar in the main window of the GEOPAK
Editor.
In the "Sub-Program Start" dialog window, click the "Learn" option
and possibly enter a speaking name easy to recall.
Immediately, all instructions in this sub-program are stored.
Quit the sub-program via the symbol.
II-62
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.3.3
Using an already existing Sub-Program
Activate the symbol and inform the program via the radio buttons where
the sub-program is located (library etc.).
Hint
The variables that are defined in the main program are also available in
the sub-programs.
If you modify variables in the sub-programs you also modify them for the
main program.
Hint
To impede this, store the variables at the sub-program start. Before
terminating the sub-program, again load the variables.
8.4
Delete Last Step
With this function menu bar "Program (Delete Last Step"), you can remove the
last command of the part program and in most cases undo it. The last command
is displayed once again and you must confirm.
To undo also means:
You have changed the co-ordinate system.
You undo this change.
You will get the co-ordinate system again as before the change.
Exception
If you delete a probe change, it is not possible to directly undo this change.
Proceed as follows:
Make one more probe change for the probe you want and
delete this one again.
Then, you can continue measuring with the right probe
and the unnecessary probe change
will not appear in your part program.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-63
Sequence Control
8.5
Error While Executing Command
When this dialogue appears usually unexpectedly - there are four options
available:
Repeat command: If you select this option, the last used dialogue
opens. In this dialogue you can check again your last entries. The
measurements you have performed up to this stage are still valid.
Delete command: If you select this option, the command is neither
executed nor stored.
Store command: If you select this option, the command is stored
despite a faulty execution in the part program.
Repeat element measurement: If you select this option, e.g. in the
case of a collision, the last dialogue is displayed again.
However, the number of measurement points is completely reset to
0. Therefore, this option differs substantially from the option
"Repeat command" (see above).
This fourth option is particularly not recommendable for the
scanning of contours because this would mean the loss of all points
already measured.
8.6
Comment Line
If you want to add information to your part program, which do not concern the
measurement and will not appear in the test certificate, use the "Comment Line"
(menu bar "Program / Comment Line"). In the following "Comment in Part
Program" window, you can enter any text you want (80 characters max. per line).
II-64
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.7
Programmable Stop
With the "Programmable Stop" (menu bar "Program / Programmable Stop"), you
can stop the part program run at a position and give some information or
instructions to the user through
a text,
a picture or
an audio file
Proceed according to Windows conventions.
8.8
Show Picture
With this function (menu bar "Program / Show Picture"), you can have a picture
for your actual measurement course.
Search for the picture via the symbol according to Windows conventions
and confirm. The picture will appear in the "Measurement Display" window.
If, in the following, you call an element and confirm, the picture will be
overwritten as a default setting in the "Measurement Display" window.
You can avoid this in the element window by clicking on the
"Graphics of Meas." symbol.
8.9
Clear Picture
With this function (menu bar "Program / Clear picture"), you can clear a picture
that you have activated before (see details under "Show Picture"). By clicking on
the function, the picture in the "Measurement Display" window will disappear.
8.10 Play Sound

With this function (menu bar "Program / Play Sound"), you can play a sound
during the actual measurement course.
You determine the file by clicking on the symbol according to Windows
conventions.
Via the symbol above to the right ("Test") in the "Play Sound" window, you
can hear the file to the test.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-65
Sequence Control
8.11 Send E-Mail

With this function (menu bar "Program / Send E-Mail"), you can send an e-mail
directly out of GEOPAK. In addition, an e-mail program compatible with MAPI
(for example Outlook-Express) must be installed.
You make the usual entries where
for the address, the Cc details and the subject max. 80 signs are
allowed.
For the text, you can use 480 signs.
You can attach one file each time.
8.12 Send SMS

With this function (Menu Bar "Program / Send SMS"), you can directly send a
SMS out of GEOPAK. Yet, before starting GEOPAK, the necessary settings
must have been realised before in the PartManager. For details, see the
following topics
Configuration,
Log Communication and
Address Book
Hints
You only can select one receiver from the address book.
For the text, you can use 160 characters. It is possible that the different
providers accept not as much of characters.
II-66
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.13 Create Directory

With this function, you can create a new directory in a GEOPAK part program.
This is useful, if e.g. tasks are repeated in weekly periods. Certainly, you wish to
file the protocols of the results sorted by the week.
In this case, first of all define a string variable, which you complete
with the text and the "week" system variable (see example below).
Str1 = Woche_@week.
Use this variable when entering the directory name in this function.
Also use this variable in the "File Format Specification" function.
Hints
If this path does not yet exit, it will be created. Otherwise, nothing
happens.
With this command, you also can create sub-directories.
When selecting a name for the directories, you have all possibilities of the
string coding at your disposal.
For further information concerning this subject, please refer to your
MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GENERAL", file
"si_io_comm_g (e).pdf".
8.14 Input Head Data

Some functions automatically ask for head data, when this data has been
selected previously (e.g. "Beginning of File Format" or "Beginning of Print
Protocol"). Other functions don't automatically ask for the head data, even if this
information might be required (e.g. the "Flexible Protocol Output" or "Statistics
Output into File"). Therefore, beginning from Version 2.2, the function "Input
Head Data" will be available.
You call this function (Menu bar / Program / Input Head Data) at the
beginning of the part program and confirm in the following window.
In this way the part program executed the functions you have
entered in the dialog "HEAD Data Editor" earlier in the
PartManager.
If you proceed this way, no further action will be required later with a
function asking for head data (e.g. Beginning of File Format). The
head data dialogue will not appear again.
The head data required for input is the information defined in the PartManager
with the option "Input Head Data before Printing" (for details, refer to the topic
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-67
Sequence Control
"Head Data: Definition ", "Editor for Head Data: Overview" and Dialogue Window
"Editor for Head Data" ).
For Example a dialogue of the following type will appear:
If no head data is defined, no dialogue and no error message will show up.
If no head data with the option "Input Head Data before Printing"
is defined in the PartManager, no head data dialogue and no error dialogue will
show up.
II-68
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.15 Set Head Data Field

This part program allows you to set a head data field (for details, refer to the
topic "Editor for Head Data: Overview "). This is useful in case the head data is
required to be set through a part program functionality, e.g. through a text
variable.
To find out which head data field is to be set, the user has to enter the ID of the
head data field which he has set already previously in the PartManager (fig.
below; Menu bar / Settings / Head Data / New or Change).
You enter the ID and the new contents of the field.
You should know

If there is no ID, an error message will appear ("Head Data Field not
Existing").
In case the data is entered in the learn mode with variables, the
result will automatically be analysed and displayed under the input
line.
The existing ID's you have already set in the PartManager are
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-69
Sequence Control
suggestions for the ID list field.
This command does not verify the "input type". If a number is
defined as input type and a character string is set, no error will be
displayed.
Should the length of the input text be longer than the defined input
length, the character string will automatically be reduced to the input
length.
If the "input type" reads "Extend list", the contents of this list will not
be added (for details, refer to Extend List ).
The new contents of the head data field is stored in the part's head
data. This means: even if GEOPAK is finished, the new contents
will be valid until it is replaced in the PartManager or changed by
another command.
8.16 Sublot Input

It may be necessary to specify sublot data already at the beginning of part
programs (e.g. for the flexible protocol output or the statistics). Beginning from
the Version 2.2, you can access this function through the "Menu bar / Program /
Sublot Input" and confirm in the subsequent window.
Depending on the sublot already defined in the PartManager (for details, refer to
General information on Sublot and the topics to follow), there will appear a
dialogue where you input the sublot. When in the PartManager a "Structured
Sublot" has been defined, a corresponding dialogue will be displayed (fig. below).
Otherwise only the sublot input with an input field will be displayed.
The dialogue "Structured Sublot" performs a self-check of its input data. For the
standard input, there is only a check for maximum length. If you enter less than
40 characters, the field will automatically be filled with blanks.
An error message will appear only in case the user has interrupted the input
("Sublot input was interrupted"). In the learn mode, there is no error message.
The command is not learnt.
Refer also to "Set Sublot".
II-70
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.17 Set Sublot

This function (Menu bar / Program / Set Sublot) allows you to set the sublot as a
whole or only a sublot field of a structured sublot.
Using the symbol ("Set Structured Sublot") you decide in the dialogue "Set
Sublot" (see fig. below) as to whether you want to set the complete sublot or only
a sublot field.
If data is entered in the learn mode with variables, the result will automatically be
analysed and displayed under the input line. The remaining characters of every
sublot are filled with blanks.
You should also know
Structured sublot: In order to identify the sublot to be set, you
enter the number of the sublot field and the new contents of the
field. Should the sublot field to be set no exist, the screen shows an
error message ("Sublot not existing").
Set complete sublot: If the option "Set Structured Sublot" is
disabled the whole sublot will be set.
Default settings: If a structured sublot has been defined the default
setting of the option "Set Structured Sublot" is enabled. Otherwise
this function is disabled and can not be selected in learn mode.
Refer also to "Sublot Input".
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-71
Sequence Control
8.18 Program Call

Program Name
With this function (menu bar "Program / Program Call"), you can call any external
program, and this according to Windows conventions in the "Program Name" text
field. Then, these programs will run in parallel to your part program.
If you only click on the clock symbol, the part program stops and only the
external program is running. Only if you close the external program, your part
program will start again.
Working Directory
In this text box you enter the folders (directories) that are required for the running
external program. Pay attention to the spelling of the directories and the rules of
the way of writing of directories (e.g. \PROG\DATA).
Program Parameters
If the external program requires further parameters, these are input, separated
by empty signs, in this text field.
II-72
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.19 IO Condition (IO Communication)

Introduction
Frequently, the IO condition is also called IO communication (Input-Output). It
makes possible that MCOSMOS may work together with other control systems.
To do so, electronic signals are exchanged. The communication can take place
in one or two directions.
Typical examples are
Automatic process control,
Pallet feeding device,
Robot control.
IO Cards
IO cards, also called EA cards in German (Ein- oder Ausgangskarten), are Input
/ Output cards. In our case, we call them digital input or output cards. That
means, per signal, there are only two conditions, logical "HIGH" (for the most
part high tension) and logical "LOW" (for the most part low tension).
To minimise the expenses when selecting IO cards, we offer some standard IO
cards, e.g. the "ME-8100-A".
Requirement
The "IO_COND.INI" must be available in the "INI" directory of MCOSMOS. You
find the file for the default setting on the MCOSMOS installation CD
(\OPTIONS\IO_COND). In this file, you have to define the name of the control file
(default setting "IO_COND.DAT"), and the type of card that you wish to use.
Furthermore, you will have to write a control file. This must also be available in
the "INI" directory.
Without these files, MCOSMOS will not execute an IO communication.
For further information concerning this subject, please refer to your
MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GENERAL", file
"si_io_comm_g (e).pdf".
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-73
Sequence Control
8.20 Possibilities of Text Input/Data Name

It is also possible to enter defined variable information into all boxes in which you
normally make text inputs: Protocol headlines, commentary lines, text lines (e.g.
"Text to Printer"), as well as names of files, elements and variables.
Three important examples

If you want to output, for example the current time of day you can
do that over the output text by previously entering the text "Now it is
@time o clock". That leads for example to the output: "Now it is
13:45:48 o clock".
If you want to create your own ASCII-file with the results to each
program run, you can input in the learn mode with the "File Format
Beginning" function as file names for example "Result@RC.asc".
That leads after the first program run to "Result1.asc". Then to
"Result 2.asc" etc. RC stands for Repeat Counter and begins with
the number, that you input as an originally-protocol number namely
in the dialogue window directly after start of the repeat mode.
If you want to call variables within a loop via the loop indicator you
input as a variable name, e.g. var@LC. This leads in the first loop
flow to variable var1, in the second to var2 etc.
For further information about all possibilities of modifying the texts in the string
coding, please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", file
"UM_string_code_g(e).pdf".
Further possibilities of input:
Single Selection
Group Selection
II-74
v 2.4
14.09.04
Sequence Control
8.21 Single Selection

In order to get, for instance, to a connection element, you first have to select the
elements used to build the connection element. You can determine these
elements via the single or group selection facility. Provided the elements are of
one type of elements and arranged one behind each other in the memory, you
are recommended to use the - undoubtedly faster - Group Selection.
In case of single selection, you have to
proceed step by step, but it is up to you
determine the sequence and
to mix the types of elements.
There may, of course, occur situations where single selection is mandatory. This
is the case, for instance, when you use a line and have to pay attention to its
sense of direction.
Change selection
When you change from single to group selection - and vice versa - the following
two symbols are of utmost importance:
With mouse-click to group selection
With mouse-click to single selection
Our example
In our following example, the line is the connection element.
In the dialogue window "Connection Element Line", you are
presented, on the left-hand side, all elements build up to now.
Via the horizontal icon bar
("Available") you can decide by a mouse-click which types of
elements you want to watch and use or not.
You click the elements selected to the right-hand side and
confirm.
With the connection element calculated using this method, you proceed in
the same way as with any other element.
You should know
In case of a measured element automatic projection into one plane
is possible, due to the fact that the material side is known.
In case of a connection element the material side is not known;
hence automatic projection is not possible. So you have to define
the projection plane.
For this purpose you have at the left border of the respective dialogue windows
"Connection Element ..." the planes XY, YZ and ZX.
14.09.04
v 2.4
II-75
Sequence Control
8.22 Group Selection

In order to get, for instance, to a connection element, you first have to select the
elements used to build the connection element. You can determine these
elements via the single or group selection facility. Provided the elements are of
one type of elements and arranged one behind each other in the memory, you
are recommended to use the - undoubtedly faster - group selection.
In case of Single Selection you have to
Proceed step by step, but it is up to you
to determine the sequence or
to mix the types of elements.
There may, of course, occur situations where single selection is mandatory. This
is the case, for instance, when you use a line and have to pay attention to its
sense of direction.
Change Selection
To change from single to group selection - and vice versa - you use the following
two symbols:
With mouse-click to group selection
With mouse-click to single selection
Our example
In our following example, the line is the connection element.
In the icon bar ("Available") you select,
e.g., the element "Circle" and decide in the text box "Number" how many circles
you want to use to build the connection element "Line".
Bear in mind that with the sequence of the circles you define the line's
sense of direction.
With the connection element calculated using this method, you proceed in
the same way as with any other element
You should know
In case of a measured element automatic projection into one plane
is possible, due to the fact that the material side is known.
In case of a connection element the material side is not known;
hence automatic projection is not possible. So you have to define
the projection plane.
For this purpose you have at the left border of the respective dialogue windows
"Connection Element ..." the planes XY, YZ and ZX.
II-76
v 2.4
14.09.04
Probe Data Management
III Probe
Contents
1
Probe Data Management.................................................. 3

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Probe Data Management: Introduction...................................... 3

New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data ................................ 5
Save / Delete / Calibrate Probe Data .......................................... 6
Probe Selection............................................................................ 7
Confirm Probe Configuration ..................................................... 7
Change Probe Configuration ...................................................... 8
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
Warnings ............................................................................................. 8
Numbering, e.g. for two racks ............................................................. 9
Counting.............................................................................................. 9
Probe Calibration ........................................................... 10

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Probe Calibration: Options ....................................................... 10

PH9 Probe Clearance ................................................................ 11
Manual Calibration..................................................................... 12
Calibration of Scanning Probes ............................................... 12
Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems ......................................... 13
Define MPP/SP600 Factors ....................................................... 13
Define Master Ball .......................................................... 14

3.1
3.2
3.3
Define Master Ball: Example..................................................... 14

Z-Offset....................................................................................... 14
Maximum Difference.................................................................. 15
Archive Probes ............................................................... 16

4.1
4.2
4.3
Load Probe Data from Archive ................................................. 16

Single Probe Re-Calibration ..................................................... 17
Re-Calibrate from Memory........................................................ 17
4.3.1
4.4
Procedure.......................................................................................... 17
Calibrate Probe: Display ........................................................... 18
Several Masterballs ........................................................ 19

5.1
5.2
Several Masterballs: Introduction ............................................ 19

Define Masterball Position........................................................ 19
Cancel Probe Change .................................................... 21

6.1
6.2
6.3
Cancel Probe Change: Sequence............................................. 21

Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips .................................. 22
Rotary Table: Hints.................................................................... 22
Combination of Racks.................................................... 23
7.1
14.09.04
Combination of Racks / Introduction ....................................... 23

v 2.4
III-1

7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
III-2
Combination of Racks / Definitions ......................................... 23

Sub-Racks.................................................................................. 24
Manual and Virtual Changer ..................................................... 25
Manual Change.......................................................................... 25
Manual Change with Following Rack ...................................... 26
Definition of Sub-Racks............................................................ 26
Probe Extension Module "PEM" .............................................. 26
Rack Alignment ......................................................................... 27
Convert Rack Data .................................................................... 28
Set Advanced MPP100 Data ..................................................... 29
Calibrate ACR 3 ......................................................................... 30
Numbering Method of Probe Configurations.......................... 30
Rack Definition .......................................................................... 31
Options with the FCR25............................................................ 32
Configuration with the SCR200................................................ 33
Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times FCR25 ............ 35
Rack Specific Parameters and Positions ................................ 36
Port Settings .............................................................................. 37
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.1
Probe Data Management: Introduction
You want to perform a single measurement. Your co-ordinate measuring

machine is equipped with the probe suitable for your measuring job. You start
your measuring program through the PartManager (for details refer to Single
Measurement/Learn Mode). The GEOPAK main window opens and tells you that
no probe is defined yet. Upon confirmation you are presented the dialogue
window "Probe Data Management".
For information about "ProbeBuilder" or "Define Probe" first

click on the topic "ProbeBuilder".
Further subjects are described under the topics "New Input of
Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data" and "Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe
Data".
Hints
You can input as many probes as you currently need. Make sure that the
window is not unnecessarily overloaded. Keep in mind that probes can be
archived and recalled again from there.
It is always the probe identified with an asterisk behind the probe number
that is used for measurement.
About symbols:
The symbol (on the left) is activated, when you define a loop start prior to
changing the probe. For details refer to the topic "Loops".
Click on the probe from where you want the loop to start.
Click on the symbol for OK.
It is possible to Load Probe from Archive.

The Archive probe function is possible, too.
Click the function "Select All" in case you want to calibrate all probes in
succession.
As a rule, you print the current probe list. If a probe-tree changing system is
used, the tree number will be asked for previously. The current tree number is
suggested.
Provided you have manually set the angles of your probing system using
the Renishaw Head Control Unit (HCU), you just click on the symbol to accept
the angle values. The HCU is suitable for all rotary-type probing systems (PH9,
PH10).
About columns
The first column shows probe numbers.
The second column displays symbols.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-3

The probe symbol represents a theoretical probe. There is a general rule: A
changed or redefined probe is always given the symbol of a theoretical probe;
the pin symbolises an already calibrated probe.
Data regarding the Maximum Difference relative to the calculated calibration ball
diameter is indicated after the diameter column. It is necessary that you have
approached a minimum of 5 points for measurement. When the values are too
high, then, for instance, you have touched the ball from the side (sliding-type
probing).
Under "A" and "B" of the columns you find information on the probe angles (refer
also to New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data).
The probe offset relative to the reference probe is shown in the columns X,Y and
Z (refer also to New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data).
III-4
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.2
New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data
The dialogues "New Input of Probe", "Edit Probe Data" and "Copy Probe Data"
are prompted up by clicking over the menu bar / Probe Data Management and
the function required. The dialogues are almost identical.
New Input of Probe
The probes are consecutively numbered - necessarily starting from

1.
First enter a theoretical value for diameter, for example 2.000 (e.g.
in mm). Whether to enter linear measures in millimetres or inches, is
to be chosen in the following dialogue window via the menu bar /
Settings / Input Characteristics.
If you have, for instance, a part program with offset values already
defined for later recalibration (star-type probe) by another part
program, then enter rough offset values. Otherwise leave the values
set to 0.
In the lines for probe angles, use the arrow keys to select the
values, upwards and downwards in steps of 7.5 degrees.
Edit Probe Data

Click the respective line in the Probe Data Management window, click on Edit
and perform the changes in the subsequent window. Upon OK, all changes are
transferred to Probe Data Management.
In case data was saved previously and you have made changes, you will get a
safety query.
Copy Probe Data
Only the line "Copy to..." is active in the "Copy probe Data" dialogue. Click the
line of the probe to be copied. Ignoring the number suggested, you can enter an
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-5

already occupied probe number. This probe is then overwritten. Otherwise the
copied probe is placed to the end of the list.
Copying onto the reference probe is not possible.
In case data was saved previously and you have made changes, you will get a
safety query.
As a rule of principle, any changed or redefined probe is always given the symbol
of a theoretical probe.
Further topics:
Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data
1.3
Save / Delete / Calibrate Probe Data
Save
Saving causes all current data to be physically written on the hard disk.
In case data saving has been confirmed with OK and you want to change or
recopy probe data in a subsequent step, you are requested to answer a safety
query.
Hint
If, however, you use the Probe Data Management window
to save,
then to make changes or recopy data, and finally
to finish the window with Abort,
the "old", previously saved values will be displayed.
Delete
Deletion is possible for any probe. The #1 probe (reference probe), however, can
only be deleted if it is the last probe in the list, or if all subsequent probes are
deleted at the same time together with the reference probe. Otherwise a fault
message will show up.
Calibrate
You always calibrate the active probe (for details refer to Probe Calibration).
Further topics:
New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data
III-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.4
Probe Selection
If at least one probe is defined, you can see the window "change probe"
with the data of the defined probe(s). Select one and confirm; then this becomes
the actual probe used for measurement.
If there are no defined probes, you will see the window for probe management;
here you can define your probe(s). For details, cf. (Probe Data Management and
Probe Calibration ).
Even if there are probes defined, you can add new probes to the list. For this, you
use the function "Probe / probe data management" in the pull-down menu. You
can also access this function via the "probe" icon of the tool bar on the left margin
of the screen.
Further Information
The active probe is marked by an <*>; this one is used for

measurement.
The menu "probe" can access the windows for "select probe" and
"probe data management".
You can easily change probe data by simply clicking any probe of
the list twice. The window "change probe data" immediately
appears.
The new data are directly passed to the probe data management window (for
details, cf. Probe Data Management ).
After changing, the following question appears: "Data have been changed; store
changes"?
1.5
Confirm Probe Configuration
This only refers to machines that are equipped with a probe changer
system.
After starting learn or repeat mode, you get the window "Confirm Actual Probe
Configuration". This dialog is a safety question at exit. Meanwhile, the probe
configuration may have been manually changed. Therefore, you should examine
the "real" probe tree and then confirm. If the probe configuration has been
changed, you should enter the number of the configuration, which is active now.
If you do not enter the correct configuration, your measurement data will
be wrong. Furthermore, while executing a part program, there are collisions when
working with the wrong probe data. Last but not least, there will be problems as
soon as you change the probe configuration; GEOPAK would try to record the
probe configuration into an occupied port.
After confirmation, you get the "Change Probe" window. In the headline, you find
the number of the probe configuration. Now, you continue as you did in Probe
Selection .
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-7
1.6
Change Probe Configuration
The change of probe tree will be automatically realized. If you dispose of a

manual tool changer, you must respect a series of special steps. Also see
details of Manual Tool Changer .
The automatic change of probe tree will be realized from where the probe tree is
situated at the moment you want to change it. The probe tree takes the direct
way to the port. This direct way will only be selected if you have not indicated a
security position in the "Rack Definition" program. To avoid collisions, take care
that the access to the probe tree is free. Therefore, you should pay attention to
warning messages.
You call the probe tree change via the menu probe / change
configuration. Enter the number of the probe configuration and
confirm.
In single / learn mode, you get the message "Attention: Probe

Configuration has Changed". Now you have a chance to check
whether the rack can be reached without collision; otherwise, you
can correct the actual position by the joysticks. Do not forget to
define these positions for the repeat mode by pressing the "GOTO
button" of the joystick box.
In repeat mode, you get the message only if the CNC can be
manually moved, and you can use the joysticks to move the
machine.
After the configuration has been changed, you get the window for
the selection of the actual probe; the number of the configuration is
written in the headline. Then, proceed as in Probe Selection .
If you have worked, before, with a swivelling probe, you get an additional
message "Attention: Probe will move!". Make sure that the probe can be rotated
without collision (see above).
1.6.1
Warnings
If the probe configuration has not been calibrated yet, you get the error message
"Probe # 1 not Defined". After you confirm it, you get the window for "Probe Data
Management" (the number of the configuration appears in the headline).
As all the measurements can be made with different probe configurations,
nevertheless can be combined no matter which configuration an element has
been probed with, GEOPAK needs a common reference probe. This is probe #1
of configuration #1. This probe must be calibrated first; cf. also Probe Data
Management .
The probe configuration number is the number of the port in the rack.
III-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.6.2
Numbering, e.g. for two racks
If you have, for example two racks of the same type (see picture below with two
SCR200), you must give an exact name to the ports in the corresponding rack.
The numbering begins in your Rack with the number 01 and in the rack with the
number 11.
1.6.3
Counting
The following counting can still be used because of compatibility with GEOPAK 3
in connection with your part programs from this version:
If you use two SCR 200 with 6 ports, the numbering of the ports of the second
rack starts from 7 and goes to 12; in case of an ACR, usually 8 ports are
available, then counting for the second rack starts from 9. If, however, the
number of assessable ports in the ACR has been reduced (e.g. to 7), counting for
the second rack starts from 8.
If the rack position has not been determined yet, you get an error message.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-9
Probe Calibration
2
2.1
Probe Calibration
Probe Calibration: Options
Define Master Ball with Reference Probe

Before you calibrate one of the probes #2 to ..n, you must know the
position of the master ball. This is achieved by measuring it using the probe #1;
therefore, this probe is called the "reference probe". If you have not measured the
master ball using probe #1, you will get the error message "Position of master
ball not defined", if you try to calibrate some other probe. First, mount the master
ball to a fixed position. Make sure that all probes you want to calibrate can freely
access it.
Different methods
GEOPAK offers different methods to calibrate probes.
Select the manual mode by clicking the symbol. You guide the CMM
to the measuring points; you can decide which numbers of points must be
taken. After at least five points, you can finish the measurement at any
time.
Input the number of points for the calibration before measurement.
Then measure the master ball manually. As soon as the defined number
is reached, the program automatically calculates the probe data.
Only set the probe above the master ball; then select the "automatic
probe calibration". If you have a CNC machine, the rest of the probe
positions are automatically measured.
Procedure
III-10
Activate probe #1 in the window "Probe data management".

Now click "calibrate" to get the dialogue for calibration. Select the
manual calibration by a clicking the symbol.
Select the diameter of the master ball out of the list. If the actual
diameter is not in the list, you can enter any other diameter via the
text-input field.
Now specify the number of points you want to measure. At least five
points must be used. Otherwise, you get a warning message.
You confirm und get the window "Calibrate Probe". In this window
you get all information you need. You confirm.
Now probe the master ball with the probe you want to calibrate at
least five times, and then confirm.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Probe Calibration
Note
When using one of the other methods, continue accordingly.
If you want an automatic calibration of a probe configuration (activate
by a click on the icon), and you have a rotary probe head; additionally
input
With regard to the Swivel length you work with the ProbeBuilder
(since version 2.3). By this program you can configure your probe
system included the swivel length.
the safety distance (for more details, cf. Measurement Point). You
should use a large distance first; this makes a calibration possible in
spite of inaccurate probing of the pole.
the Z-Offset (for more details, see Z-Offset )
the number of calibration cycles; the subsequent measurements

start from the data acquired by the previous cycle, thus making the
calibration more accurate. Therefore, we recommend using at least
two.
Cf. topic Recalibrate from Memory .
2.2
PH9 Probe Clearance
With this command, you can move to a probe position, for which you must not
especially define a probe. This makes sense for example if the probe should be
moved alongside a part and has to be swivelled for this purpose.
After this function, you must again move to a defined probe if you want
to continue the measurement.
The offset is made by the reference probe, i.e. the machine moves as if the
reference probe would be active. The angle position is taken either from the
probe number or correspondingly from the angle you entered.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-11
Probe Calibration
2.3
Manual Calibration
To get to this function and the dialogue, use the menu bar and the Probe menu.
Prior to calibrating probes with numbers greater than 1, probe 1

needs to be calibrated.
When performing measurement on a ball, the "Element finished " is

possible beginning from the fifth measurement point.
For "Element finished", the probe diameter is calculated.
In a volume-compensated machine, every single point with the

probe offset is sent to the machine. As a reply, you get the volumecompensated points. These points are used to calculate the probe.
For further details refer to the topic Volume Compensation
For the following functions and the dialogue related to them, make sure that you
always enter the diameter of the masterball:
Manual calibration
Re-calibrate single probe
Re-calibrate from memory
In addition, beginning from Version 2.2, it is possible to also use an already

defined masterball. If don't choose to do so, the masterball you use will have the
number 1. The same applies also to an already existing part program.
Should you, however, choose to use this possibility, you will be able to enter the
number of the masterball, but not the diameter. The diameter text box is
deactivated, the diameter, however, is shown depending on the number of the
masterball defined previously.
You will get an error message if the masterball is not defined.
2.4
Calibration of Scanning Probes
When using one of the probing systems SP600, SP25 and SP80, special
calibration routines are automatically used. For this, click on the option
"Determine scale factors" in the window "Calibrate probe".
This option is only visible with an activated scanning probe system. When
working with a newly defined probe, the text of this option in this window is
greyed. However, the function itself is activated and can not be deactivated. That
means: You have to determine the scale factors.
As a result (ill. above) you receive two different probe diameters, one for touching
measurement and the other for scanning measurement. The values of the
scanning probe are always the lower ones. Always only the offset of the touching
measurement is used.
III-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
Probe Calibration
For the probe radius compensation of scanning commands (e.g. CNC scanning),
always the diameter of the scanning probe is used. This also applies to the case
that the measurement procedure was changed during the element measurement.
For more detailed information, refer to "Re-calibrate from Memory".
2.5
Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems
The probe systems MPP of Mitutoyo and SPxx of Renishaw are scanning probe
systems where scales are installed in the probe head. The position of these
scales relative to the CMM scales must be additionally defined for the calibration.
Another feature of all the scanning probe systems is that the effective ball
diameter is slightly different depending on whether the scanning probe systems
will be operated in touch trigger or scanning mode. This is why the ball diameter
must be determined twice.
Proceed as follows:
Measure the ball with the probe no. 1. From now on, the subsequent
steps will be automatically realized. This is valid for all probes to be
calibrated.
The ball will be measured in the touch trigger mode. This way, the
offset of the current probe to probe no. 1 will be defined.
By means of this information, the MPP/SPxx factors will be

determined by scanning the ball once again in a special mode.
Then, the ball will be measured once again in the touch trigger
mode by using these factors in order to get the exact probe data.
2.6
Define MPP/SP600 Factors
With measuring probes, for calibration purposes, you must define factors so that
the measurement accuracy is guaranteed. The definition of the factors is always
realized for the current probe. If you want to call this command in the part
program ("Menu Bar / Probe / Define MPP Factors"), the following conditions
must be fulfilled:
The probe must have been calibrated before.
In CNC operation, the probe must be moved over the masterball

with the program.
In the manual mode, a dialogue is displayed prompting the operator

to manually move the probe over the masterball.
This function is not applicable for a SP600 with star probe.
Note
For the scanning probe types (SP600, SP80 und SP25) the MPP factors
and the relevant probe diameter are established automatically.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-13
Define Master Ball
Define Master Ball
3.1
Define Master Ball: Example
Situation
You have started GEOPAK in single / learn mode and want to calibrate a new
probe in the probe data management window. When clicking the "calibrate"
button, you get the warning "Position of master ball not defined; continue?"
Reason
The reference probe has not been calibrated yet, and you try to calibrate a probe
with a number different from 1. This warning tries to prevent you from getting
wrong results. If the position of the master ball has been changed in the
meantime, or a different master ball is used. In these cases, the probe calibration
would result in wrong probe data, because the differences to probe #1 would be
wrong.
Solution
Calibrate probe #1 anew (cf. Probe Calibration ). However, if you are sure that
the master ball position has not been changed since you have calibrated probe
#1 the last time, you can opt for "continue" when you get the warning.
3.2
Z-Offset
Usually during probe calibration, the master ball is probed using a circle along the
equator, and a point on the pole. If you actually use a small tip, probing of
equator may not be possible (cf. drawing below). In such a case, you can input
an offset in Z; this means the height above the equator where the master ball is
touched.
III-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Define Master Ball
3.3
Maximum Difference
The maximum difference is an information about the quality of an element or - if

the element is close to perfect, e.g. as a master ball - the quality of the
measurement or probe system.
It is calculated after the element data have been obtained from the measurement
points. Then the distance of the individual points to the calculated surface is
computed; in case of a sphere (the master ball) the following two points
determine the value:
the point having the largest distance from the centre, and ...
the point that is nearest to the centre.
The difference between these two distances is the "maximum difference". The
idea is the same for all the other elements as well; the maximum distances on
one side and on the other give an indication about the measurement (cf. also
Probe Data Management ).

A = maximum distance
B = maximum distance
C = maximum difference
The value can only be obtained if an element is measured with more than the
minimum number of points required for that element. If an element has been
measured with only the minimum number of points, it is defined exactly through
the points; there are no distances from the element to the points. For a sphere,
you need at least 4+1=5 measurement points to get the value for the maximum
difference.
Now the program calculates the "maximum difference". From this value, you can
evaluate the quality of the measurement, the higher the value, the worse
measurement.
Even in CNC mode, you may get a high value for the "maximum difference". This
can be an indication that either your probe is defective, or has not been tightly
screwed.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-15
Archive Probes
Archive Probes
You can archive any probe set; however, the probe #1 must also be archived. If
you want to archive the complete list on the screen, click on probe #1 first, then
press the <Shift> key and move the mouse up to the last probe. Then the whole
block is marked and put in the archive.
Use the menu bar probes / archive or ...
Click in the "Probe Data Management" dialogue window on the

symbol.
Note
4.1
You can de-select single probes in a block by <Strg> and mouse

click.
A selected block is de-activated if you activate a single probe of this

block. In this case, only the single probe is activated, the rest is deactivated.
You can get a list of archived probe sets if you select "Probes/from
archive" from the menu bar, or click "Load from archive" in the probe
data management window.
Load Probe Data from Archive
You are in single / learn mode of GEOPAK and want to use a probe
configuration, which has been defined (calibrated) and archived.
Select "Probes / Data from Archive" from the menu bar, or ...
Click in the "Probe Data Management" dialogue window on

the symbol.
In either case you get the "Probe from Archive" window.
Select the probe set you need and confirm.
You can display the archived probe data before loading them.
This means, in the "Probe from Archive" window, either

with a click on the symbol ("View" bubble) or
with a double click on the archive name.
Then you find the loaded probe set in the probe data management
window. Next, activate the probe you need for the next
measurement and click on "Change to" (cf. also Probe Data
Management), and confirm.
Note
As this implies a change of the actual probe, the new number and tip
diameter indicate this change in the result field.
III-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
Archive Probes
4.2
Single Probe Re-Calibration
Proceed as described in chapter "Re-calibrate from memory". A difference is that

for single probe re-calibration only one probe will be determined. Gaps in the
probe list are possible.
If you wish to calibrate a probe of any number of the list, the probe with
the number 1 must be calibrated first (you will find more detailed information in
chapter "Three possibilities for measurement").
4.3
Re-Calibrate from Memory
To get to this function and the dialogue, use the menu bar and the Probe menu.
This function gives you the possibility to re-calibrate probes via measured
spheres.
The main advantage of this function is that even complex probe configurations
can be calibrated using a CNC part program. This means that it can be done
automatically.
However, a first set of probe data must already exist, e.g. as a set of theoretical
values, or the previously defined probes.
4.3.1
Procedure
You fix the master ball on the table of the machine at a position
where it can be accessed by all probes you want to calibrate.
You start with probe #1 and measure the ball as element "sphere"
by all probes.
The spheres must be stored into subsequent memory numbers.

However, the first number can be freely selected.
If you have measured the ball with all the probes, you select the pull
down menu "probes / re-calibrate from memory".
In the following window you input the number of probes that have to
be calibrated. In addition, you enter the memory number of the
sphere which you have measured first with probe #1.
You confirm by "OK".
The probe data are calculated anew. These new data are stored to the disc
immediately, if no error has occurred. The correlation between the probes and
measured spheres must be exact.
The sequence number only does the correlation of the measured
spheres and the probes. This means that the sequence numbers of the
probes must not have interruptions, as otherwise a wrong correlation is
done, and wrong probe data are stored.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-17
Archive Probes
For the following functions and the dialogue related to them, make sure that you
always enter the diameter of the masterball:
Manual calibration
Re-calibrate single probe
Re-calibrate from memory
In addition it is possible to also use an already defined masterball. If don't choose

to do so, the masterball you use will have the number 1. The same applies also
to an already existing part program.
Should you, however, choose to use this possibility, you will be able to enter the
number of the masterball, but not the diameter. The diameter text box is
deactivated, the diameter, however, is shown depending on the number of the
masterball defined previously.
You will get an error message if the masterball is not defined.
For calibrating single probes and re-calibrating from memory it is possible to
define the type of calibration (touching or scanning).
For the probe types SP600, SP80 and SP25, the scanning is already defined by
determining the MPP Factors.
4.4
Calibrate Probe: Display
In the display window for "Calibrate probe", you find all status information
concerning the probe calibration. You find the current data in the upper field with
the black background. The information there depend on the installed hardware.
Via the symbols (left) the functions "Delete" and "Element ready" can
be selected.
In the centre of the window you find instructions as to which action is currently
being performed (see example below).
In the lower table part of this window you see ...
...the results of former calibrations in case that you have calibrated more than just
one probe,
the current probe calibration and
the calibrations still to be worked off.
Note
To set the font type and size according to Windows conventions, click on
the right mouse key separately in both window parts.
III-18
v 2.4
14.09.04
Several Masterballs
Several Masterballs
5.1
Several Masterballs: Introduction
This function enables you to calibrate the probes with one or more masterballs in
different positions. The use of this function may be advisable where, e.g., it is
impossible to calibrate all probes with one masterball only. Such a situation may
occur, if it is impossible for all defined probes to approach the masterball. Another
need for this function could arise also, when the probe tip used is so small that
there is a potential risk of the probing action being performed with the shank of
the probe. In all these cases you would get wrong measurement results.
Calibration of number 1 probe defines automatically the position of the first
masterball.
In our example the probe designated X is the probe that cannot reach the first
masterball. Probe Y is the probe that reached both masterballs. The sequence is
performed in the following steps:
Calibrate probe 1 and define the position of the first master ball..
Calibrate probe Y against the first masterball.
Define the position of the second masterball using probe Y.
Calibrate probe X against the second masterball.
This method cannot be applied but for learnable part program commands used
for calibration (for details refer to Define Masterball Position).
5.2
Define Masterball Position
Recommendation
For some fundamental information on the topic Several Masterballs we
recommend you first refer to the chapter Introduction
Procedure
Use the Menu bar / Probe / Define Masterball Position to get to the dialogue.
Here the following inputs are possible:
Diameter of masterball (is stored)
Number of masterball
14.09.04
Use this symbol to activate the loop counter.

List to select the ball (position only is stored).
v 2.4
III-19
Several Masterballs
Further hints
The maximum number allowed for the master ball is 100.
Gaps are permitted among these numbers.
Where the position of the reference masterball is not defined, the definition of
other masterballs will not be possible. In this case you will get an error message.
A part program defining several masterball positions has to be written

with the temperature coefficient 0.0. If this is not the case, the difference
between the masterballs will be temperature-compensated. This should
be avoided.
For details refer also to the topics
Re-Calibrate from Memory
Re-Calibrate Single Probe
Manual Calibration
III-20
v 2.4
14.09.04
Cancel Probe Change
Cancel Probe Change
6.1
Cancel Probe Change: Sequence
If, for instance, an error occurs when a probe is being changed, you may need to
cancel probe change. In this case it is ensured, beginning from version 2.2, that
the subsequent measurements can be performed using the previous probe.
In cases where you have connected a swivel-type probing system, you
first get a safety query.
Regarding the general sequence (cancel probe changes, probe
tree changes, and rotate table)
You work with a probe (probe tree or rotary table) in the CNC mode
and intend to make a probe change. Then you realise, however, that
you do not want this change to happen.
Click on the "Delete Last Step" symbol in the learn mode.
Click on the "Step Back" symbol in the repeat mode.

Should you already have performed the change and the
measurement as well, you need to delete the measurement
results you have got by mistake, and then click on this
symbol.
The CMM changes automatically to manual mode.
A warning comes up: e.g.: "Attention! Probe is being changed". This

warning cannot be deleted.
In order to avoid collisions, move the CMM into a safe position and
then click OK. The CMM will immediately resume the CNC
operation.
The CMM changes to the previously used probe (probe tree; rotary
table).
For further details refer to the topics

Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips
Rotary Table: Hints.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-21
Cancel Probe Change
6.2
Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips
For cancelling probes (cancelling probe tree) you should know that cancelling in
a loop first deletes all repeats. Only then probe change is cancelled.
Tip:
In the repeat mode, we recommend the use of the "Program Jump" function in
cases where you want to skip more than one program line.
Cancelling a probe change, namely directly prior to changing a probe
tree, causes the probe to lose its definition.
Output
Going back in the part program causes ...
the data in the result box to be deleted.
Depending on the new settings, the CMM position is updated.
The status line is updated with the current, correct probe number
(probe tree number).
Performance limits
When you have deleted an intermediate position, the CMM is not moved back
into the previous position.
6.3
Rotary Table: Hints
In case the CMM has not been moved into a safe position, you will get the error
message "CMM not in safe position relative to rotary table".
The "Cancel Table Rotation" command reverts the sense of rotation and turns the
co-ordinate system back (if used).
Indexing rotary table
Furthermore, this command reloads the previously used co-ordinate system,
provided the table is of the indexing type. Indexing-type rotary tables are tables
which rotate only by fixed degree increments (e.g. 90-degree increments). For
each of the indexing table position, a fixed table co-ordinate system is loaded.
III-22
v 2.4
14.09.04
Combination of Racks
7.1
Combination of Racks / Introduction
GEOPAK allows the combination of different racks. This serves to realise an

automated and quick change of components as well as automated measurement
tasks that have to be performed with different probes.
For more information, also refer to the topic "Change Probe Tree".
Combinations of probe change systems are configured via the definition program
Rack definition and are subsequently measured in GEOPAK. MCOSMOS
supports the following types of probe change systems:
FCR25
MCR20
SCR200
SCR600
SCR6
SCR80
Manual changer
Virtual changer
ACR3
ACR (with GPIB- or RS232-interface)
7.2
Combination of Racks / Definitions
Master Rack
These racks pick up components with the interface PAA, including:
ACR (RS232C)
ACR (IEEE)
ACR3
Manual changer
Virtual changer
Hint
Master Racks always pick up complete probe trees.
Examples of probe trees with which the master rack can be fitted:
14.09.04
TP20 with probe

SP25M with SM25-1 and SH25-1
SP25M with TM25-20 and TP20-probe
v 2.4
III-23
Ports for parking
Because the master racks always pick up complete probe trees, components
must first be deposited in alternating cycles before new components can be
picked up. Define the "Ports for parking" as places of deposit for ports. Leave
those "Ports for parking" empty.
These allocations are required for each type of component.
Therefore, you need
Hint
One port each for parking for TP20-probes.

One port each for parking for TP200-probes.
One joint port each for SM25-1, SM25-2, SM25-3 and TM25-20.
One joint port each for SH25-1, SH25-2 and SH25-3.
The TP20-probe can be deposited both in the MCR20 and in the FCR 25.
7.3
Sub-Racks
The racks MCR20, SCR200, SCR600 can also be defined and used as so-called
"sub-racks" of either the ACR, the manual or the virtual changer.
On the other hand it is possible that two ports of the ACR access the same subrack. E.g. one ACR port may be equipped with a TP200 without extension and
another ACR port with a TP200 with extension (e.g. PE1). Both TP200 exchange
the styli in the same SCR200.
Hint
A probe extension module (PEM), which can be accessed before any other probe
tree is supported in the ACR (but not in the ACR3).
Further topics:
"Definition of Sub-Racks"
"Probe Extension Module "PEM"".
III-24
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.4
Manual and Virtual Changer
A manual changer can be used if you wish to exchange the probe system and
there is no ACR available.
Two examples:
TP200 and SP600
TP2 and QVP
A virtual changer is used if the probe system is to be changed but a physical
exchange is not necessary, e.g. with the RMV camera system and the PH10,
used at the same time.
The virtual changer is also used for the offline creation of part programs.
7.5
Manual Change
We must distinguish between an
exclusively manual change and a
tool changer with a following rack (e.g. SCR 200; see details of
Manual Tool Changer with Following Rack).
Manual Change
Via the Probe/Change of Probe menu item, you call the change of
probe. Enter the number of the probe tree you want and confirm.
You get a window with the information to the change of probe tree
and the probe tree no.
Now, you must switch off the probe signal on the joystick box and
change the tree.
After that, confirm in the "Manual Change of Probe Tree" window.
By confirming this, the machine control of the CMM registers the

new probe system.
After the change of probe tree, you get the "Change Probe" window
(probe tree no. in the title bar). Now, proceed as for the selection of
probe.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-25
7.6
Manual Change with Following Rack
The sequence of operations for this configuration is described in an example.

Initially you have a "Master rack" (manual changer) and the following racks 1
(SCR 200) and 2 (SCR 600). The active tree is tree TP 200 with the probe tip of
port 4 (following rack 1).
Its number is 14. The port for parking is port 1. The probe tree with its component
has the number 11. You wish to change with the probe tip from port 3 (following
rack 2) to the SP 600. The number of the new probe tree is 23. Also the SP 600
has set up the port for parking. The same applies to port 1. The probe tree with
the component that will be deposited here has the number 21.
Proceed according to the following three steps:
7.7
In following rack 1 (SCR 200), the probe is automatically deposited in

port 4 and the parked probe from port 1 is changed in.
Now you have to perform the probe tree change from number 11 to
number 21 manually (for detailed information, refer to the topic
"Manual Change".
In the following rack 2 (SCR 600), the probe is automatically

deposited in the port for parking and the probe of port 3 is picked up
(probe tree change from 21 to 23).
Definition of Sub-Racks
If an ACR, a manual or a virtual changer is used, additional sub-racks to change

the styli can be defined.
Double-click on the port number to open the dialogue box "Port Settings".
If you select a TP200, TP20 or SP600 you can define the

corresponding sub-rack.
Move the mouse to the port number and click the right mouse button.
The "Insert" dialogue box will be opened.
The rack is added by a simple click on the icon.
To change the rack-specific parameters, see Rack Definition.
7.8
Probe Extension Module "PEM"
If an ACR, a manual or a virtual changer is used, you can also use the
automatically changeable extension "PEM".
In the "Port Settings" select "PEM".

Make sure to enter the offset by which the probe system is extended
in X, Y and Z direction.
The figure in brackets indicates the number by which you can address
the probe including the extension.
III-26
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.9
Rack Alignment
ACR
The alignment (measurement) of the ACR is achieved in the single/learn mode
via the pull-down menu "Probe / ACR alignment". The operator is guided through
the measurement by pictures independent of the language. The operator must
have the user right to execute "Rack alignment" in GEOPAK.
The command "ACR alignment" is not learnable.
MCR20, SCR200, SCR600

The rack types MCR20, SCR200, SCR600 are measured by part programs. After
the measurement the positions are converted by the learnable command
"Convert rack data".
The part programs for the alignment of the racks and for the conversion of the
data are available on the MCOSMOS CD under "AlignRacks". We recommend
studying the Readme file in this directory carefully. The delivered part programs
already contain the command "Convert rack data". Therefore no additional action
is necessary after the execution of the part programs.
To execute the command "Convert rack data" in the learn or edit mode the
operator must have the user right to execute "Rack alignment" in GEOPAK. In
the repeat mode this command will be executed even if the operator does not
have this right.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-27
7.10 Convert Rack Data

In order to automatically change the probe tip, GEOPAK must know the position
of the probe change system. You determine this position by calibrating the probe
change system by means of an example of a part program, which you will find on
the MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks".
Through the "Convert Rack Data" command, the position data will be converted
in a format meeting the requirements of the CMM.
"Convert Rack Data" Dialogue Window
Via the "Menu Bar / Probe", you come to the "Convert Rack Data" dialogue
window.
"Convert Rack Data" List Box
In the "Convert Rack Data" dialogue window, you select in the "Rack Data File"
list box the ASCII file, in which the rack position has been stored.
The format of this ASCII file and the order of the necessary positions in this ASCII
file can be taken out of the examples of part programs you find on the
MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks".
"Length of Probe" List Box
Enter the length of the stylus (l) in the "Length of Probe" list box.
You determine the length (l) out of the tables of stylus and stylus extensions.
You can find more information to this subject under "Calibrate Probe Change
System".
III-28
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.11 Set Advanced MPP100 Data

Starting-situation: You use the MPP100 together with the probe change system
SCR6.
After having changed the probe combination, the origin must be re-determined.
This is necessary because different probe combinations have a different weight
and thus the origin is different.
Set origin
Continue as follows:
Measure the reference sphere with probe no. 1 of the current probe
tree.
After that, set the origin in the "Set Advanced MPP100 Data"
dialogue window.
For this, click on the "Set Origin after Probe Change" radio button.
Select the corresponding "Sphere" reference element in the list box
and confirm.
Determine Reference Position

Requirement:
You only can set the origin after the probe change if the system knows the
reference position.
To be able to determine the reference position, proceed as follows:
Measure the masterball with the reference probe (probe no. 1,

probe tree no. 1).
For this, click on the "Determine Reference Position (Masterball)"

radio button.
After that, select the corresponding "Sphere" reference element in

the list box and confirm. By this, the reference position will be
automatically stored.
Hint
This determination of the reference position must always be repeated after the
following cases:
If the rack has been re-aligned or
the rack position has been changed or
if the reference probe has been changed.
Mitutoyo provides examples of part programs you can find on the MCOSMOS-CD
under "AlignRacks". After the change of probe tree, you can call these part
programs to automatically measure the masterball and to set the origin.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-29
7.12 Calibrate ACR 3

You only can use the ACR 3 from version 2.1.
On principle, you proceed as already described in the topic Calibrate the Change
Probe System . Certainly, there is an essential improvement with the ACR 3:
To calculate the position where the probe is situated we had to determine till now
the distance of the stylus for the recording of the probe (PAA) at a "Masterball" on
the rack. For the ACR 3, this distance will be entered at installation in the
"Change Direction" window by the service-engineer. You dont need any longer a
controller incl. the expensive cabling.
Beginning from the Version 2.2 you can use two ACR-3 modules in order for you
to have more than four different probing systems at your disposal. To this end
you are required to make a change in the dialogue window designated "Position".
You access this dialogue window through the "PartManager / Menu bar / Tools /
Rack Definition / Movement Parameters". Enter the number 8 into the column
"Number of Available Ports" and confirm.
7.13 Numbering Method of Probe Configurations

The numbering method described below is applicable up to MCOSMOS
version 2.3, as starting with version 2.4, you always must define the probe tree
numbers. It is, however, basically possible that each customer continues with the
numbering method he has grown used to also when working with version 2.4 or
upwards. In this case he only needs to perform the definition himself but is free to
select (also refer to the topic "Configuration with the SCR200 ").
The new numbering method of probe configurations (using the rack definition
program) is carried out in steps of 10, i.e. the numbers are fixed for each rack,
independent of the previous rack. The former numbering method was sequential
without gaps.
Example (ACR, SCR200, SCR600):
New method
1..8, 11..16, 21..24 .
Former method
1..8, 9..14, 15..18 .
If the former numbering method is requested even when using the rack definition
program, the following entry must be made in the MctrlWin.Ini:
[ToolChgMain]
AskGeo3=1
Afterwards the former GEOPAK-3 numbering method can be selected in the rack
definition program (File / GEO-3).
This selection is only possible if no configuration has been defined
before.
When using a probe extension (PEM), the figure 100 is added to the
configuration number, i.e. 11 becomes 111, 23 becomes 123.
For more information, see Change Probe Tree.
III-30
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.14 Rack Definition

Start the definition program for the probe change system (Rack Definition) from
the PartManager via the menu "Settings / Rack Definition". For this, the user
must have already been assigned the user right "Tools" in the PartManager.
Define the combination in the definition program.
The measurement takes place in GEOPAK. Also read the topic

"Calibrate Measurement Probe".
Before starting the probe change system, you have to define the
configuration in the definition program.
Hint:
The rack definition program is installed together with GEOPAK.
Procedure
Select all racks you intend to use from the program "Rack Definition"
via the menu bar / "Changer" / "Add / Delete".
Then you can define the components of master racks or FCR 25 with
a double click on the desired component. You get to the dialogue
"Port settings".
If the component is from the master rack or the FCR 25, also define
the "Port for parking" for the probe.
Before you can confirm the dialogue "Rack definition", you need to define the
probe trees. Proceed as follows:
Highlight a component in the master rack.
You get to the dialogue window "Define probe tree".
Define the probe tree number at the top right in the dialogue.
Combine the probe tree using the buttons "Add" and "Delete".
Use the right mouse key to select the option "Define probe tree" from
the context menu.
Hint
If you want to change a probe tree configuration that has already been defined,
click in the dialogue "Rack definition" on the required line at the bottom of the
table".
Characteristic features of the FCR25
If no master rack has been defined, start the probe tree definition with one of
these components: SM25-1, SM25-2, SM25-3 and TM25-20.
If a master rack has been defined, you have the option to change the
components SM25-1, SM25-2, SM25-3 and TM25-20. In this case you need to
define the "Port for parking".
Basically, also the probe tip can be changed. In this case, you have to define a
"Port for parking" also for the probe tips.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-31
7.15 Options with the FCR25

Starting with MCOSMOS version 2.4, the programme offers a range of additional
options to structure the probe trees. You can, for example
select the probe tree numbers freely and
assign individual names to the components for recognition.
Particularly, the flexible fitting of the FCR25 is supported. Probe tips,

modules and probe systems can be changed in this rack.
If you wish to perform a probe tree change in GEOPAK, you need no longer care
about where the individual components have been parked (parking ports) after
the learn mode or where from to get the individual components.
To guarantee a smooth operation, you only need to consider some factors when
defining the probe trees:
To be at all able to perform a probe change, the relevant probe trees must have
previously been defined with a probe tree number.
For defining your probe trees you must always start with the basic
components from the masterrack (e.g. SP25M). As regards the window "Define
probe tree", you should know that only those components are offered in this
window that can actually be used.
III-32
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.16 Configuration with the SCR200

To clarify the processes, we use two examples: first, an example with a rack
(SCR200) and second, an exemplary rack combination (ACR3 + two times
FCR25). For information regarding the second example, go to the topic
"Configuration with the ACR and Two Times FCR25 ".
Example 1 (SCR200):
Proceed as follows:
In the window 'Rack definition', click in the menu "Changer" (Racks)

on "Add/Delete".
In the following window "Add/Delete", click in the list "Available

components" on the SCR200, then send it via the function "Add" to
the page "Selected components" and confirm.
Back in the window "Rack definition" you see that the SCR200 has been defined
as Rack1. The list underneath defines six ports that are each equipped with the
probe TP200. With a click on the line "Rack1:SCR200", the right hand part of the
window displays complete rack specific parameters, i.e. from rack direction to
approach speed (see ill. below).
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-33
When clicking on one of the ports, the right hand part of the window displays
information about
the change speed in the port and

the probe tree component.
Rack Parameter
A click with the right mouse key on the rack line, and three options appear with
which you can change the parameters:
Rack direction
PH10 angle
Movement parameters (for detailed information, refer to the topic
"Rack Specific Parameters and Positions "
Probe Tree Number / Port Settings
A click with the right mouse key on a port, and two options appear:
Define probe tree number
Starting with version 2.4, the probe tree numbers must

always be defined. Please note that in future you always have the
free choice of these numbers.
The probe tree numbers and the components are shown in a list in
the window "Rack definition " (see ill. above).
Port Settings(for further information, click on the topic)
III-34
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.17 Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times

FCR25
To perform this configuration, always proceed as described for example 1 in the
topic "Configuration with the SCR200", with the exception that in this case three
racks are selected. For how to fit the racks, refer to the topic "Definition of Probe
Change Systems (Rack Definition)".
In our example, the racks are fitted as shown in the illustration below.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-35
7.18 Rack Specific Parameters and Positions

The definition of your new change system configuration requires that you enter,
among other things, several rack specific parameters.
To select a changer choose "File / New Configuration".

To change the parameters double-click on the corresponding icon
(e.g. rack direction or safety position).
Rack direction: Defines the position of the rack on the CMM.

PH9/10 Angles: Defines the angle the probe head moves to before
changing (accessing the rack).
Movement parameters:
Safety position: Defines the position (in CMM coordinates),

which is accessed before and after the change cycle.
Distance to rack: Defines the distance of the CMM to the rack
during the change cycle. The value is given relative to the rack.
Distance to sensor: The distance to the sensor of the SCR200
can be corrected.
Number of accessible ports: If not all ports are equipped with a
probe or a stylus, pay attention not to change to an empty port.
Approach speed: Defines the speed of the CMM when approaching
the rack.
Port01, speed during change cycle: Defines the speed of the CMM
when entering a port. Sometimes this speed must be reduced (e.g. for
long styli) to avoid a false triggering when opening a lid.
III-36
v 2.4
14.09.04
7.19 Port Settings

In a first step you must perform some settings for the port. In the following
window (see ill. below), it is important that you activate both options, i.e.
module is subject to change and

stylus is subject to change.
If appropriate, you must change the number of the rack with
parking port or the number of the parking port.
Confirm.
With a further click (right mouse key) on Port01, you define in the following
window the probe trees no. 1 and no. 2 (see also the topic "Definition of Probe
Change Systems (Rack Definition)") and confirm.
14.09.04
v 2.4
III-37
Workpiece Alignment
IV Workpiece Alignment
Contents
1
Workpiece Alignment....................................................... 2
1.1
Define Co-Ordinate System ........................................................ 2
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Three Methods .................................................................................... 2

New co-ordinate system...................................................................... 3
Store/Load Co-Ordinate System................................................. 4

Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System ...................................... 5
Patterns for Alignment ................................................................ 6
Alignment by Single Steps ......................................................... 7
Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit ............................ 8
Alignment in Space .......................................................... 9

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Three steps .................................................................................. 9

Measurement strategy................................................................. 9
Procedure ................................................................................... 10
Alignment in Space by Plane.................................................... 12
Alignment in Space by Cylinder or Cone ................................ 12
Alignment in Space by Line ...................................................... 13
Align Axis ........................................................................ 15

3.1
3.2
Align Axis Parallel to Axis ........................................................ 15

Align Axis through Point........................................................... 16
Create Origin................................................................... 17
Workpiece alignment: Further options......................... 18

5.1
5.2
Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System ..................................... 18

Origin in Element ....................................................................... 18
RPS Alignment ............................................................... 20

6.1
6.2
6.3
RPS Alignment: Background.................................................... 20

General Rule .............................................................................. 20
Operation.................................................................................... 20
Workpiece Alignment: Further Options ....................... 22

7.1
7.2
Direction of a Plane ................................................................... 22

List of Elements ......................................................................... 22
Types of Co-ordinate Systems...................................... 23

8.1
14.09.04
Polar Co-Ordinates: Change Planes ........................................ 25
v 2.4
IV-1
Workpiece Alignment
Workpiece Alignment
1.1
Define Co-Ordinate System

Before you start to measure the elements for alignment, you should
make sure that the part is fixed to the machine in such a way that it
cannot move.
You have selected the necessary probe and get the dialogue window
"Define co-ordinate system".
1.1.1
Three Methods
The upper part gives an option of three methods:

Alignment Patterns
Machine co-ordinate system
Co-ordinate system from archive
If you do not need exact alignment, or you have to use a more complex way of
alignment not covered by the patterns, start with the machine co-ordinate system.
Then, just click here and confirm.
If you need a co-ordinate system from the archive, just click the symbol shown
above. Now you can either input the number directly, or get a list of all stored coordinate systems by a click on the arrow symbol of the input field. Then you can
select from the list, too.
The third possibility is to use one of the alignment patterns to construct a coordinate system.
IV-2
v 2.4
14.09.04
Workpiece Alignment
1.1.2
New co-ordinate system
In the dialogue window "define co-ordinate system", you find eight patterns
frequently used for the initial alignment of a part. In the upper line, a plane
determines the axis in space; in the lower line, axes in space (cylinder or cone)
are used to create the direction in space.
If none of these patterns applies to your case, first measure single elements, and
then align your part using them by the co-ordinate system functions of the menu
bar (for more details, see Alignment by Single Steps).
Before you opt for the pattern, you should inform yourself about details of the
possibilities regarding Patterns for Alignment .
Plane, Line, Line
Plane, Circle, Circle
Plane, Circle, Line (origin in centre of circle)
Plane, Circle, Line (origin on line)
Cylinder, Point, Point
Cylinder, Circle, Point
Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on axis of cylinder)
Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on line)

Circle or cylinder can be replaced by ellipse or cone. This is done
in the window appearing after you have made the first decision on
the pattern; this next window allows you to select (or change) the
elements you are going to measure for alignment.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-3
Workpiece Alignment
In this window, GEOPAK suggests the elements and a way of measuring. The
suggestion for the number of measurement points is always the minimum number
required for the element plus one; this gives you an indication about the quality of
the alignment. You can either accept the suggestions, or input your own data
for...
the name of the element,
the memory number of the element,
the number of measurement points and...
the memory number of the co-ordinate system.
The co-ordinate system which is constructed this way can be immediately stored.
Just click the symbol, input the selected number, and confirm.
If you do not store at this point, you can do so later via the menu bar "Co-ordinate
system / Store co-ordinate system".
The results, i.e. the measured elements, are listed in the result window.
They can be used later for all types of further evaluation.
If you want to measure parts on one or more pallets, refer to details of "Pallet CoOrdinate-System" and the following subjects.
1.2
Store/Load Co-Ordinate System
When storing co-ordinate systems, we distinguish temporary and permanent coordinate systems.
Temporary co-ordinate systems are those created during the part

program run, which are erased each time you start a new run.
Permanent (archive) co-ordinate systems correspond to fixed

positions on the CMM table. Normally, they are used to enable a
CNC run without manual alignment.
At "Load Co-Ordinate System", you proceed the same way.

For details to store or load a pallet co-ordinate system, see details of "Pallet CoOrdinate System".
Beginning from Version 2.2, there will be separate functions with their
own dialogues provided for the options "Save/Load Table Co-Ordinate
System".
IV-4
v 2.4
14.09.04
Workpiece Alignment
1.3
Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System
Already in the default settings made in the PartManager you decide which
options you take regarding the table co-ordinate system (menu bar / settings /
default settings / programs / KMG / GEOPAK / settings GEOPAK / menu
functions). Click the table co-ordinate system in this list.
A table co-ordinate system relates to the origin of the CMM. Thus it determines a
position on the CMM table, which, for instance, may be provided with stops.
Great importance is attached particularly to the table co-ordinate systems with
the manager programs, e.g. where several workpieces are clamped at different
positions on the CMM. In these cases, already in the manager program the
workpieces can be related to a table co-ordinate system from the archive.
In a pallet-based operation, the table co-ordinate system determines the position
of the pallet. The pallet co-ordinate system, in turn, determines the position of the
(different) workpieces on the pallet. For further details see "Pallet Co-Ordinate
System".
In GEOPAK, you access these functions through the "Menu bar / Co-Ordinate
System/ Save / Load Table Co-Ordinate System".
Regarding this topic, refer also to Save/Load Co-Ordinate System .
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-5
Workpiece Alignment
1.4
Patterns for Alignment
In practical applications, most of the initial alignments are made using one of the
following eight methods (patterns). Using these patterns makes easier and
simpler set up of a co-ordinate system (cf. also Define Co-ordinate System ).
The pattern "Plane, Line, Line" defines the axis in space by the
measured plane. The first line gives the direction of the x-axis; the origin is the
intersection of the two lines.
The pattern "Plane, Circle, Circle" defines the axis in space by the
measured plane. The line gives the direction of the x-axis from the first circle
centre to the second; the origin is the centre of the first circle.
The pattern "Plane, Circle, Line (origin in circle)" defines the axis in
space by the measured plane. The line gives the direction of the x-axis; the origin
is the centre of the circle.
The pattern "Plane, Circle, Line (origin on line)" defines the axis in
space by the measured plane. The line gives the direction of the x-axis; the origin
is on the line; it is the centre of the circle projected to the line.
The pattern "Cylinder, Point, Point" defines the axis in space by the
measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder; the first single point
determines the Z-height of the origin. The direction of the x-axis is from the origin
through the second measured point. If you use two probing points for the second
point, and you probe on the right and left flank, you can use this to align a gear.
The pattern "Cylinder, Circle, Point" defines the axis in space by the
measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder; the single point
determines the Z-height of the origin. The direction of the x-axis is from the origin
through the centre of the circle.
The pattern "Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on the cylinder axis)" defines
the axis in space by the measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the
cylinder; the single point determines the Z-height of the origin. The measured line
gives the direction of the x-axis.
IV-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
Workpiece Alignment
The pattern "Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on the line)" defines the axis
in space by the measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder; the
single point determines the Z-height of the origin. The measured line gives the
direction of the x-axis. The origin is projected to the line.
Circle or Cylinder can be replaced by ellipse or cone. You can switch
between the element types by the icons of the following dialogue
window.
Then, measure the elements; the measurements are recorded in the result
window (cf. also Define Co-Ordinate System ).
1.5
Alignment by Single Steps
In order to perform a complete alignment, the axis in space (in other words, the
base plane), one axis within this plane, and the origin must be determined. This is
done by the alignment patterns by using a single command. However, if your part
does not suit for the use of one of these patterns, you must do it systematically.
The following example shows these steps:
Select e.g. the machine co-ordinate system to start with.

Measure the F1 plane for the plane alignment.
To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align plane" from the menu bar. In the "Align
Plane" dialogue box choose OK to confirm.
Measure the F2 plane.

Create the intersection line between F1 and F2 for "Axis Alignment".
To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align axis parallel to axis" from the menu bar.
14.09.04
Measure the F3 plane.

v 2.4
IV-7
Workpiece Alignment
Create the intersection point between F3 and the intersection line

for the zero point determination.
To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Create origin" from the menu bar.
1.6
Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit
If you want to create a co-ordinate system via best fit, proceed as described
under "Best fit with a fixed number of points " or "Best fit with a variable number
of points ". However, in the first window "Best fit" you activate the check box "coordinate system".
If you want to store the co-ordinate system, you activate the symbol. Then
you can input the number of the co-ordinate system in the field next to the
symbol.
IV-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Alignment in Space
Alignment in Space
For the most ordinary cases, GEOPAK proposes the Patterns for
Alignment . However, there are cases that cannot be matched with one of these
patterns; therefore GEOPAK has also the possibility to align by other means.
2.1
Three steps
Basically, you proceed in three steps.
Alignment in space; you create the axis in space, or in other words a

reference plane (usually XY plane).
Axis alignment; you need to determine an axis in the reference

plane (mostly the x-axis).
Origin; you take a point in space and declare this the origin.
The determination of the origin can be independent of the two other steps, and
made before these steps. In many cases, however, you use elements, which
determine as well the rotation in space as one or two components of the origin.
2.2
Measurement strategy
Now you can decide your procedure according to the actual measurement task
(drawing, position of the part on the machine, etc.). Here you must define your
measurement strategy.
For the alignment in space, you can use following elements:
Alignment in Space by Plane
Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone
Alignment in Space by Line
You should also know:

The elements are stored in the Element List with a symbol, memory number, and
the number of points each.
The simplest way is to use one of the Patterns for Alignment . However, if this is
not sufficient, you can measure the elements for alignment manually, and then
afterwards align your co-ordinate system by these.
You should start with the element necessary for the alignment in space, and then
activate "alignment".
If the window for space alignment is displayed, and you measure the element
then, the list of elements in the selection box is not yet updated. You must close
the window and open it again.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-9
Alignment in Space
2.3
Procedure
You come to the window for space alignment by the menu bar/coordinate system and the function alignment in space.
You also can click on the symbol.
By the arrow key of the dialogue window, you open a list of

elements. This is not the complete list as it only contains elements,
which can be used for alignment in space, not e.g. circles or
spheres.
Select the element (plane, cylinder, cone, or line).
In most cases, you also select "Origin in Element" by clicking

the symbol.
Then you decide your co-ordinate plane (XY-, YZ-, or XZ-plane).
Z=0
P = new origin (Z = minus)
IV-10
v 2.4
14.09.04
Alignment in Space
Example 1
The plane (cf. drawing above) determines the axis in space, here the XY plane.
Then "Origin in Element" means that Z is set to zero for all points of the plane. If
you do not want this, just click "Origin to Element" off; then the origin stays where
it has been before.
After this, the origins in x and y direction are still unchanged; they must be
determined by some other elements.
Example 2
The cylinder axis (cf. drawing above) is used for the axis in space, here the xy
plane. In this case "Origin in Element" means that the origin in x and y is set to
the cylinder axis; the z height of the origin is still open and has to be determined
by some other element afterwards. Normally, the example for the cylinder axis is
also valid for the axis of a cone. This is also true for the Patterns for Alignment.
The direction of a cylinder is determined by the sequence of probing; the positive
direction runs from the first to the last measurement point. The positive direction
of a cone always runs from the apex into the cone.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-11
Alignment in Space
2.4
Alignment in Space by Plane
The Alignment in Space can be achieved by means of a plane, a cylinder, or

cone. A line can only be used if it is a line in space, in other words a "Connection
Element" (cf. also Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone and Alignment in Space
by Line .
You measure - e.g. via the symbol - the plane; the result of the
measurement is stored in the element list. Then you activate the alignment in
space. In the dialogue window, select the measured plane. After you confirm, this
plane is made the base plane of your co-ordinate system.
After the Alignment in Space by a plane, the axis in space always points out of
the material; different from the alignment by a cylinder or a line, the sequence of
measurement does not affect the result.
2.5
Alignment in Space by Cylinder or Cone
The Alignment in Space can be achieved by a plane or the axis of a cylinder or

cone (cf. also Alignment in Space by Plane and Alignment in Space by Line ).
By clicking the symbol or via the menu bar (elements / cylinder), you define
the element as usual (measure or construct). The resulting element is stored in
the element list.
IV-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
Alignment in Space
Then, click and select the cylinder as the axis in space. When applying the
Alignment in Space, the axis of the cylinder becomes the z-axis of the co-ordinate
system. The positive direction is determined by the probing sequence of the
cylinder: from the first to the last measured point.
If a cone defines the axis, proceed accordingly. When applying the Alignment in
Space for a cone, the positive direction is always the direction from the apex into
the cone.
2.6
Alignment in Space by Line
The Alignment in Space can be achieved by a plane, the axis of a cylinder or

cone, or by a line (cf. also Alignment in Space by Plane and Alignment in Space
by cylinder/cone).
By "Alignment in Space by Line" you will get a not projected line (Symbol
).
Take care that the elements, you need for creating the line will be measured not
projected.
Activate the element line by the icon. Then you get the element definition window.
For the alignment in space, you can only use a line in space. Therefore you
cannot use a measured line; a measured line is always projected.
Using the icon or the menu bar, you activate the element line. In the
subsequent window, you can select
the connection element,
the intersection element, or
the symmetry element.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-13
Alignment in Space
You can use intersection lines of two planes (cf. example below); symmetry lines
of lines in space, and lines connected from points in space, e.g. the centre points
of two circles or ellipses.
1 = plane 1
2 = plane 2
3 = intersection line
IV-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Align Axis
Align Axis
3.1
Align Axis Parallel to Axis
The function "Align axis parallel to axis" is used if the co-ordinate system should
be positioned horizontally to a certain axis. Before you execute this function carry
out the plane alignment. The axis alignment determines one of the two axes to be
positioned horizontally to the plane. In this example the Z axis is the plane axis.
First determine the alignment element, ellipse, line, cylinder or cone

(measurement, theoretical etc.).
To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align axis parallel to axis" from the menu bar.
You can choose between four alignment elements each of which

with a defined axis.
To choose an element click on the corresponding icon.
The selected element will be projected into the X/Y plane.
The co-ordinate system will be rotated around the Z axis until the X
axis or Y axis is positioned parallel to the element.
In the "Co-or.-Plane-Axis" group box determine the axis (X or Y) you

wish to align with the element at a click on the corresponding icon.
Origin on axis
Click on this icon if the axis should not only be aligned parallel with the
element but should be positioned exactly on the element. In this case the coordinate system is rotated and afterwards moved until the origin is positioned on
the element.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-15
Align Axis
3.2
Align Axis through Point
The function "Align axis through point" is used if a co-ordinate axis should pass a
certain point. Before you execute this function carry out the plane alignment. The
axis alignment determines one of the two axes to be positioned horizontally to the
plane. In this example the Z axis is the plane axis.
First determine the alignment element, ellipse, line, cylinder or cone

(measurement, theoretical etc.).
To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Coordinate system / Align axis through point" from the menu bar.
You can choose between four alignment elements each of which

with a defined point.
To choose an element click on the corresponding icon.
The selected element will be projected into the X/Y plane.
The co-ordinate system will be rotated around the Z axis until the X
axis or Y axis passes this point.
In the "Co-or.-Plane-Axis" group box determine the axis (X or Y)

which should pass the point of the element at a click on the
corresponding icon.
Offset alignment
Click on this icon and enter a value if the axis should not pass the point but
should be positioned in a certain distance to the point.
The co-ordinate system will be rotated so that the point is positioned with the
determined distance to the axis.
IV-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
Create Origin
Create Origin
If your drawing has been measured from a certain origin, you can choose the
"Create origin" function to align the co-ordinate system with the element, which
contains this point.
Measure the element, which determines this origin first.
Click on this icon or choose "Co-ordinate system / Create

origin" from the menu bar.
In the dialogue box choose the type of alignment element.
The text box indicates the element measured last.
If you wish to choose another element click on the arrow of the list
box and make your selection from the elements listed.
With these icons you determine in which axis the element coordinate is set to zero. This can be done for each axis individually. For some
elements (circle), however, two axes are available only.
GEOPAK sets all selected axes to zero. It may occur that the position of
the origin may be changed accidentally.
Example: You have selected all three axes and have determined the
X/Y plane by a measured plane. The origin is positioned in this plane. If
you measure a circle below this plane (Z=-3) the program would position
this co-ordinate on the measuring height, i.e. Z=-3.
In this case the Z axis should not have been selected.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-17
Workpiece alignment: Further options
5
5.1

Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System
If you wish to move and rotate the co-ordinate system, proceed as follows:
Click on the icon shown above or choose "Co-ordinate system /

Move and rotate co-ordinate system" from the menu bar.
In the dialogue box enter the values in the X, Y and Z text boxes.
In the text box enter the angle and click on the icon
of the axis (axes) you wish to rotate.
If you wish to move and to rotate and you have entered the requested
values in the dialogue box the co-ordinate system will always be moved
first and then rotated.
If you wish to rotate first and then move, proceed as follows:
5.2
Rotate first and confirm.
The values differ from the ones obtained before.
Open the dialogue box again, move and confirm.
Origin in Element
When you measure an element to determine the axis in space, the orientation
properties (direction in space) are evaluated. However, depending on the
element, one or more co-ordinates of the origin can also be determined by this
element.
This is achieved by clicking the icon. This means that the element is not only
parallel to the axes of the co-ordinate system, but goes passes through the origin.
Z=0
P = new origin (z = minus...)
Example 1: The plane (cf. above) determines the axis in space. If you select
"Origin to Element", the z-value of the co-ordinate system is also set to zero on
IV-18
v 2.4
14.09.04

the plane. In other words, the origin is shifted into the plane. The other coordinates (x and y) must be determined differently, e.g. by a circle.
Example 2: The axis of the cylinder (cf. above) determines the z-axis in space, in
other words the xy plane. In this case, "origin to element" means that the x and y
co-ordinates of the origin are set to the axis of the cylinder. The z-value of the
origin must be defined distinctly.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-19
RPS Alignment
6
6.1
RPS Alignment
RPS Alignment: Background
The RPS (Reference Point System) alignment is mainly used for sheet metal
parts in a car, the origin of the co-ordinate system being in the centre of the front
axle. The sheet metal parts do not have any features, which can be used for a
conventional alignment. Therefore the designer usually designates specific
points; these points have certain co-ordinates given. The RPS alignment consists
of constructing the transformation in such a way that the actually measured
points have these pre-defined co-ordinate values.
The values can be realised in different ways; two extreme are:
each point only determines one value; this means that 6 points are
necessary, or...
one point (e.g. centre of a circle thanks to a created plane)

determines 3 values, another 2, and the third determines one coordinate value. This means that only 3 elements are necessary.
GEOPAK can handle as well the two extreme cases as all the others in between.
However, this makes the operation somewhat complicated.
6.2
General Rule
For a proper alignment, the 6 degrees of freedom have to be removed; this

means that normally 6 values must be given. The distribution is such that one coordinate has 3 known values, the second only 2, and the last only one value. As
this can be any of the x, y, or z, this has to be transmitted to GEOPAK by buttons.
6.3
Operation
In a practical application, you have to distinguish two cases:

Case 1: Drawing and known RPS Points
Usually, the points are designated on the drawing, and the co-ordinates written in
the lower right corner.
Furthermore, the drawing specifies which co-ordinate the point, e.g. Fxy for a
point defining x and y, fixes. In addition, the tolerance for this co-ordinate is given
as 0.0.
In this case, proceed as follows:
IV-20
Measure the points on the part using the GEOPAK functions

(compensated point, circle, intersection, etc.).
Select "Co-ordinate System"/"RPS Alignment" in the menu bar.
Press the button(s) for those co-ordinates, which have to be exactly

determined (the drawing states "Tolerance = 0.0"; usually, the label
is something like 'Fz' for a z-value, etc.).
Select the first reference point, and enter the three nominal coordinates from the drawing.
v 2.4
14.09.04
RPS Alignment
Enter the other values as well, even if they are not relevant for the
alignment, because they are needed internally.
Repeat the last 3 steps for the other references. For each reference,
you must activate the input by the button on the upper part of the
input field.
After all references have been input, check the input: the number of
pressed co-ordinate keys must be exactly 6; 3 for one of x, y, or z; 2
for the next, and 1 for the last. Then press 'OK'.
Case 2: Only Data Set Given

In this case - which happens frequently during demonstrations for customers - it
is necessary to first determine the nominal co-ordinates.
For this, proceed as follows:
Load the drawing in 3D-TOL.
Now measure close to your designated points in GEOPAK.
Use the function "Search Border Points" to find the nominal coordinates. Send these points to GEOPAK by pressing the
corresponding button in the window.
Then proceed as in the case of given RPS points (cf. above).
For the input of the co-ordinates, you can either take these values into variables
(by the "formula calculation") or write them down and key them in.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-21
Workpiece Alignment: Further Options
7
7.1
Workpiece Alignment: Further Options

Direction of a Plane
A vector perpendicular to the surface determines the direction of a plane. For a

measured plane, this always points out the material, independent on the probing
sequence (cf. also "Alignment in Space").
7.2
List of Elements
The list of elements contains all measured or calculated elements. It consists of

four columns with the following contents
IV-22
the graphical symbol of the element (circle, point etc.)
a graphical symbol of the type of construction (measured,

connection element, etc.). Here you can also find the number of
points used to calculate the element (probing points for measured
elements, or points of other elements for connection elements).
the name of the element.
the memory number of the element. The elements are separately

stored for each type. The program automatically assigns the
numbers 1 to...X, but you can also input the memory numbers you
want in the dialogue window for the elements.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Types of Co-ordinate Systems
GEOPAK offers three types of co-ordinate system

Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
You can always switch between these types.
For OUTPUT, select "Settings / Co-ordinate system mode" from the

menu bar, and select the type in the following window.
For INPUT, switching is possible by clicking on the corresponding

symbol in the input window. If you key-in an element, it is displayed
using the co-ordinates you have input.
If you want to see the element in a different co-ordinate system

type, switch the output (cf. above) to the required system type, then
re-calculate the element from memory.
After program start, the Cartesian co-ordinate system is active.
Cartesian co-ordinates
Here, the values of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes define the position of a point in space.
1 = X-co-ordinate
2 = Y-co-ordinate
3 = Z-co-ordinate
Cylindrical co-ordinates
In this system a point in space is defined by
the projected distance from the origin,
the angle Phi with the first (x-) axis, and
the value of the z-axis.
If you have used an axis different from Z to make the alignment in space, the
definitions are slightly different. The X-axis corresponds to the first axis of the
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-23

selected plane. This means for the Y/Z-plane the Y-axis, for the Z/X-plane the Zaxis.
1 = angle Phi
2 = radius to origin
3 = Z-co-ordinate
Spherical co-ordinates
In this system a point in space is defined by
the distance from the origin in space,
the angle Phi with the first axis, and
the angle Theta. In GEOPAK, the angle Theta is the angle between
the z-axis and the vector to the point.
1 = angle Phi
2 = angle Theta
3 = (angle Theta)
4 = radius to origin
In literature, some take also the view that the angle Theta is the angle between
the base plane and the vector.
IV-24
v 2.4
14.09.04
8.1
Polar Co-Ordinates: Change Planes
In the dialogue windows where you can select one out of the three co-ordinate
system types, we offer you another option.
As a rule, you select your polar co-ordinate system with a click on the
middle or lower symbol (cylindrical or spherical, see picture below, left
column).
With a further click on one of these two polar co-ordinate systems you
can additionally change the working plane. The changes are displayed to
you.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IV-25
Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation
V Geometric Elements: Basics

Contents
1
Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation........... 3
Elements ........................................................................... 4
2.1
2.2
Elements: Overview..................................................................... 4
Point.............................................................................................. 5
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
Symmetry-Element Point .................................................................... 6

Connection Element Point................................................................... 6
Intersection Element Point .................................................................. 6
Three Possibilities of Measurement .................................................... 6
Sphere .......................................................................................... 7
Circle............................................................................................. 7
Constructed Circles: Overview................................................... 9
Inclined Circle .............................................................................. 9
Ellipse ......................................................................................... 10
Cone............................................................................................ 11
Cylinder ...................................................................................... 12
Pre-Define Cylinder Direction ................................................... 14
Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone............................................... 15
Line ............................................................................................. 16
Constructed Lines ..................................................................... 17
Plane ........................................................................................... 18
Step Cylinder.............................................................................. 19
Contour....................................................................................... 19
Selection of Points Contour ..................................................... 20
Surfaces ..................................................................................... 21
Angle Calculation ...................................................................... 23
Furthermore, you can select between ................................. 23

2.20 Calculation of Distance ............................................................. 24
2.21 Distance along Probe Direction................................................ 26
Elements: Further Options ............................................ 27

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Type of Construction................................................................. 27
Type of Calculation.................................................................... 28
Enveloping or Fitting-in Element.............................................. 30
Positive Direction by Vector ..................................................... 31
Re-calculate Elements............................................................... 34
Free Element Input .................................................................... 34
Calculation ...................................................................... 35
4.1
14.09.04
Calculation according to Gauss ............................................... 35

v 2.4
V-1

4.2
4.3
4.4
V-2
Minimum Zone Element ............................................................ 35

Enveloping Element .................................................................. 36
Fitting-in Element ...................................................................... 36
Spread / Standard Deviation ......................................... 37
v 2.4
14.09.04
Measurement and Probe Radius

Compensation
If you probe the part with a ball, you only know the co-ordinates of the ball centre.
From these, we calculate the element. Then, it is compensated by the probe
radius. GEOPAK must know on which side the material is situated so that the
direction of the probe radius compensation is correct (inside or outside). This
information comes from the probing direction. This is determined as follows:
CNC-CMM
In manual mode, the control communicates the probing

direction, which has been driven with the joystick.
In the CNC mode, the probing direction is fixed with the driving
command.
Manual CMM
By probing from the first measurement point, the current

position is continuously read so that the probing direction is
determined. When you go beyond a determined distance
(dummy distance), the position is taken over and will be
converted in the probing direction together with the
measurement point.
At CMMs with a fixed probe, you have to take into account that after the
first measured point of an element you drive in the opposite direction of
the material because otherwise the probing direction will not be correctly
recognized and an incorrect compensation is realized.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-3
Elements
Elements
2.1
Elements: Overview
For your tasks you dispose of, among other things, the following elements:
PointLine
Circle
Inclined Circle
Ellipse
Plane
Cone
Sphere
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
ContourCalculation of Angles
Calculation of Distance
Activate one of these elements either by a click on the icon or the pull down
menu, and come to the corresponding dialog window.
Skipping of "Element Dialog"

To carry out measurement the most quickly, you can skip the "Element Dialog".
To do this, click on "Settings / Properties for Selection Dialog" in the menu. In the
following window, click on the option "Skip Element Dialogue". Then, when calling
up the element via the symbol, you immediately come to measurement.
When you call up your element using the menu bar and the function, you come to
a dialogue window whose basic structure is identical for all elements (see
example shown below "Element Circle").
The dialogue window consists of five areas.
V-4
Below the title bar, you find, horizontally arranged, the symbols for
the Type of Construction.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
The first four types of construction (from left) are identical for all
elements.
Measurement,
Connection element,
Re-calculate from memory, and
Theoretical element.
Note
Regarding the Constructed Elements like Fit in Element

or Intersection Element, find information via the Table of
Contents for this topic catalogue.
On the left side, you find the icons for Type of Calculation (Gauss,
minimum zone element etc.)
On the right hand side, you can see the icons for the Programming
Help (automatic measurement, tolerance etc.)
In the central area, you can input information about
2.2
the name of the element; Mitutoyo makes a suggestion, e.g.

circle, but you can input any name describing the actual
element. If you click the arrow at the end of the input field, you
will get a list of all names of this element type you have entered
so far.
the memory number: The program automatically stores and
uses subsequent numbers. If it is necessary for you to store the
element in a different memory number, you can overwrite the
suggestion.
the number of points: If you wish to have a statement about
the form of the element, it is necessary to enter the minimum
number of points.
the bottom area contains the usual buttons (Ok, cancel, etc.).
Point
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Point".
You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element /
Point").
In the subsequent dialogue window "Element Point", there are

summarised all the types of construction of points allowed by
GEOPAK (for further details, please also refer to Elements:
Overview).
For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer
to Type of Construction.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-5
Elements
2.2.1
Symmetry-Element Point
Symmetry-Element: Using this symbol you can calculate the symmetry

point from two elements. You confirm and get to the selection window
Symmetrie-Element Punkt.
2.2.2
Connection Element Point

You can create the Connection Element Point using the
position co-ordinates of known elements or
the measurement points of these elements.
For detailed information refer also to the topics
2.2.3
Connection Elements General
Connection Element "From Meaured Points""
Intersection Element Point
Intersection Element: Using and confirming this symbol you can have the
intersection of two elements calculated. For detailed informaton about this topic,
refer to "Intersection Element Point".
2.2.4
Three Possibilities of Measurement
For the measurement of points, you have three options:

Point (uncompensated): Here, you see the co-ordinates of the probe
centre. Later on, e.g. during the distance calculation, GEOPAK will
automatically perform the probe-radius compensation.
Compensated Point: When this option is selected, compensation is
performed as follows:
Manual mode: Compensation is performed along one of the coordinate system axes.
CNC-mode: Compensation is along the probe direction.

CNC mode means that the CNC ON command was
carried out. This means that also with a CNC CMM in joystick
mode, the compensation is realized along the co-ordinate axis
(as in manual mode) if the command has not yet been carried
out.
Point Direction: With this option, only the co-ordinate in probe

direction is indicated. This is the direction where probe radius
compensation is performed, as well.
In the polar co-ordinate system, probe radius compensation is carried out
radially.
For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand
side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help.
V-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
Option Contour
If you want to carry out calculations with individual points of a contour, you
can use the function (see symbol). Subsequently the dialogue "Min. max.of
Contour" opens. To this regard, please refer extensively to Minimum and
Maximum Point .
2.3
Sphere
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Sphere". A
sphere can be calculated only from a minimum of four measured points which
must not all be located on a plane.
Sphere").
In the subsequent dialogue window "Element Sphere", there are

summarised all the types of construction of spheres allowed by (for
further details, please also refer to Elements: Overview).
If the sphere is calculated from measured points, several
methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details,
please refer to Type of Calculation).
For more information refer also to the topic "Fit in Element Sphere
2.4
Circle
Using this function you create a new element of the type "Circle". A circle
can be calculated only from a minimum of three measured points that must not
be located on a line.
Circle").
In the dialogue window "Element Circle" there are summarised all

the types of construction of circles allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details, please refer to Elements: Overview).
If the circle is calculated from measured points, several
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-7
Elements
Normal case
As a rule, the program calculates a plane from the measured points
followed by checking, which base plane this plane comes

closest to.
This is the plane where the points are projected (Automatic
projection).
The circle is calculated.
Problem cases
If the circle with its measured points is located diagonally in space,
automatic projection could be carried out in the wrong plane.

In this case, you can predetermine the projection plane.
Regardless of the location of the measured points, projection
will then take place in this plane.
No projection
XY-Plane
YZ-Plane
ZX-Plane
Automatic projection plane
Set measuring level to zero: You activate this symbol in cases
where you intend to measure the circles at different levels, without
wanting to have any spatial components, e.g. for distance measurement.
Hint
If you don't activate this symbol, the measuring level is maintained. Thus
you can connect several circles to form an axis in space.
We recommend automatic projection. Caution is advisable in performing
"forced projection" into a plane. When changing the plane, make sure
that the changeover of the plane is made by this symbol. It is possible
that you get the message that the circle cannot be calculated.
V-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
2.5
Constructed Circles: Overview
In the dialogue "Element circle" you have various possibilities to construct circles.
You can determine a "Connection Element Circle". We recommend,
however, to consult also the topics Connection Elements General and
Connection Element Point .
The function Fit in Element Circle you use when working with a circle with a
pre-defined diameter or when you want to fit in this circle between two lines or a
contour.
To create an Intersection Element Circle, there are three
options available. If you want, for example, to measure a circle in a measured
plane, you will apply the function via the cylinder symbol. If, instead, you want to
know which diameter a cone or a sphere has at a certain position, you will click
on one of these symbols.
2.6
Inclined Circle
Usually the circles are projected to one of the basic coordinate planes. If
problems occur due to the position of the circle (e.g. inclined position of a bore fit)
it is possible to measure an "Inclined circle".
The element "inclined circle" consists of a plane and a circle. First you have to
define the plane on which the circle is positioned. Proceed as follows:
measure the plane or
call a plane already measured from the memory.

You will choose this alternative if more than one circle is to be
measured in this plane.
To open the "Element Inclined circle" dialogue box choose
Element / Inclined circle from the menu bar or
click on the corresponding icon.
In this dialogue box make the requested settings.

You can only use the automatic circle measurement if the measurement
plane has been defined in the co-ordinate system before.
Default setting of the icon
If this icon is not available in the toolbar, proceed as follows:
Make a default setting in the PartManager by choosing "Settings /

Defaults for programs / CMM / GEOPAK" from the menu bar.
In the Settings for GEOPAK dialogue box choose the "Menus"

button.
In the Menu-Functions dialogue box choose the "Inclined circle"

radio button.
The icon appears in the GEOPAK window.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-9
Elements
The inclined circle icon will replace the ellipse icon.
2.7
Ellipse
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Ellipse". An ellipse
can be calculated only from a minimum of five measured points. You can also
have the ellipse calculated as intersection of a plane with a cone or a cylinder.
Ellipse").
It is possible that you do not see the symbol in the icon bar.
You can again reactivate the symbol function via the
"PartManager" program and the menu functions "Settings /
Presetting Programs / CMM / GEOPAK".
In the dialogue window "Element Ellipse" there are summarised all
the types of construction of ellipses allowed by GEOPAK (for further
Inform yourself in detail under the topic Intersection Element Ellipse .

V-10
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
2.8
Cone
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Cone". A cone can
only be calculated from a minimum of six measured points which must not all be
located in one plane.
Cone").
In the dialogue window "Element Cone" there are summarised all

the types of construction of cones allowed by GEOPAK (for further
If the cone is calculated from measured points, several
Hint
There is no automatic cone measurement. Using the CNC measurement
you can, however, generate the cone with several automatic circle
measurements.
If you need also the radius or the diameter of the cone for the protocol of your
elements (cones), proceed as follows:
Use the symbol to the left to call up the dialogue "Define and
calculate variable.
Under "Variable name", enter in the text field opposite:
For the radius:

For the diameter:
CO [x].R
CO [x].D
To have these values also in the protocol, click in the dialogue "Print Format
Specification" on the option "formula calculation", if applicable also in "File
Format Specification".
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-11
Elements
2.9
Cylinder
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Cylinder". A

cylinder can only be calculated from a minimum of five measured points which
must not all be located in one plane.
Cylinder").
In the dialogue window "Element Cylinder" there are summarised all

the types of construction of cylinders allowed by GEOPAK (for
further details, please refer to Elements: Overview).
If the cylinder is calculated from measured points, several
Hint
Automatic measurement is possible. The strategy is, however, limited. Should
this be not enough for you, we recommend that you carry out single automatic
element measurements.
Error message
The occurrence of the error message "Cylinder not calculable" or the calculation
of the cylinder in the wrong position can be caused by the algorithm not having
the starting value for the calculation. This situation can be remedied by the
function "Pre-Define Cylinder Direction".
Directional sense
The directional sense for the cylinder is defined by the probing strategy in such a
way that the direction of the axis runs from the first measurement point to the last
one.
Should you want to define the directional sense independently of the probing
strategy, GEOPAK enables you to do that using in the "Element Cylinder"
dialogue the
- symbol (see also picture below).
V-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
If you do not see the symbol in this dialogue ...
Click in the PartManager menu bar on "Settings / Default Settings

Programs / CMM / GEOPAK".
In the subsequent window "Settings for GEOPAK", click on

"Dialogues" ...
and then click the option "Dialogue Cylinder - Pre-define direction"

in the "Dialogues" window.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-13
Elements
2.10 Pre-Define Cylinder Direction

Using the symbol (picture on the left) in the "Element Cylinder" dialogue you
can predefine the direction for cylinders (for details refer to "Cylinder ").
Click the symbol to get to the window designated "Pre-define direction". This
window offers you two possibilities.
Input direction: The option used most frequently is the predefinition

pf the direction by angles.
Use direction from element: Of course, you can define the

cylinder direction also from measured elements which, e.g., are
located parallel to each other or have a similar direction. All
elements having a defined spatial axis are accepted.
An example to illustrate this would be a plane with several bores.

First you have to establish the axes of the bores and use them for
defining the cylinder's direction.
Upon confirmation you return to the "Element Cylinder" dialogue.
The symbol is depressed as a proof that you have predefined a direction.
V-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
2.11 Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone

The cylinder algorithm operates iteratively (recurring step by step). It starts with a
first approximation and tries to improve it in a way to achieve the minimum. If this
works out correctly, the improvements will continuously grow smaller very shortly.
As soon as they are less than 10^-9 (i.e. numerically zero), the cylinder (cone) is
calculated. In this case one would say that the itineration is converging.
Depending on the data, the number of steps is different; in most of the
cases it is ranging between 6 and 15.
Maximum Number of Steps
It happens that the first approximation does not come close enough to the final
result. The improvements will then vary instead of continuously growing smaller,
and they will never reach zero. The itineration does not converge. In order to
avoid endless calculations in these cases, we have defined a maximum number
of steps after which itineration will stops without result.
Circular Plane
Hence it is the first approximation that is the critical issue in terms of iteration.
The direction is essential. In a "normal case" we recommend to place the first
three points on a circle which is approximately perpendicular to the cylinder.
GEOPAK then assumes the direction of the first circular plane as the first
approximation for the cylinder axis direction. As a result, itineration will start.
Surface of 2nd Order
If iteration fails to converge, then GEOPAK tries another assumption for the first
approximation, the calculation of a 2nd order surface. In this case the values are
determined from the surface parameters. There is, however, a minimum of 9
points (an increased number is even better) required.
The calculation is the better the more irregularly the points are
distributed on the surface. For that reason you should not position the
points on two circles or along single surface lines.
So if you want to make use of the "2nd Order Surface" option, you should capture
as many meas. points as possible and distribute them evenly over the whole
cylinder surface.
Should both attempts come to no result, GEOPAK will try a third time. assuming,
this time, that the two first points are located along a surface line. Should this
attempt equally fail, the message "..not calculable" will be output.
Predefine Direction
The fact that as from Version v2.3 the user is able to predefine the cylinder
direction can be regarded as a further remedy to overcome the problems
mentioned above. It is expected that this will distinctly increase reliability of the
calculations. For details refer to the topic Pre-Define Cylinder Direction .
Hint
Up to Version v2.2, the order for the 2nd and 3rd attempt was inverted.
Starting from v2.3 it will conform to the present description.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-15
Elements
2.12 Line
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Line". A line can be
calculated only from a minimum of two measured points.
Line").
In the dialogue window "Element Line " there are summarised all the
types of construction of lines allowed by GEOPAK (for further details
please refer also to Elements: Overview).
If the line is calculated from measured points, several methods
of calculation come into consideration (for further details refer also
to Type of Calculation).
Recognising the projection plane

As a rule, the program calculates a plane from the measured points and the
probe directions.
It is then checked which base plane this plane comes closest to.
This is the plane where the points are projected (Automatic
projection).
The line is calculated.
Problem cases
If the line with its measured points is diagonal to space,
automatic projection could take place in the wrong plane.

In this case you can predetermine the projection plane.
Regardless of the location of the measured points, projection
will then be realized in this plane.
No projection
XY-plane
YZ-plane
ZX-plane
Automatic projection plane
Hint
We recommend automatic projection. Caution is advisable in performing
"forced projection" into a plane. When changing the plane, make sure
that the changeover of the plane is made by this symbol. It is possible
that you get the message that the line cannot be calculated.
V-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
2.13 Constructed Lines

You have five different options to construct a line. You can find detailed
information by clicking onto the relevant options.
Symmetry Element Line. The dialogue offers you for the 1st and 2nd element
the elements line, cylinder and cone respectively.
Tangent. First, select the circle at which the tangent is to be placed. Then
decide if the tangent is to be placed to the circle from a point or if you want the
line to be a common tangent of two circles.
Shift-Element Line: Using this option, you create a line that runs parallel to
the selected line and through the selected point.
Intersection Element Line: An intersection line can only be determined by
two planes. The direction of the lines is defined by the direction vectors of the two
planes using the "Right-hand rule".
Connection Element Line For additional information about the Connection
Elements you should also consult the topic Connection Elements General .
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-17
Elements
2.14 Plane
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Plane". A plane
can be calculated only from a minimum of three measured points or defined as a
symmetry plane.
Plane").
In the "Element Plane" dialogue window are summarised all the

types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details refer also to Elements: Overview).
For details regarding the first four types of construction, see the
topic Type of Construction.
Several methods of calculation are available in cases where
the plane is calculated from measured points (for details see topic
Type of Calculation).
Changing the type of calculation

You can have the element calculated in a way different from the originally set
method.
Proceed as follows
Click on the symbol,

select the type of calculation,
confirm, and ...
select the original plane in the following window (e.g. "Plane,
Recalculate / Copy from Memory").
Defining the direction vector

In a measured plane, the direction vector always points out of the material.
When you have the plane calculated as a connection element, the information of
the material side is not available. In this case, the direction vector always points
from the origin

to the plane.
Hint
For a connection plane located close to the origin, you are well advised to
shift the origin prior to the calculation and reset it upon completion of the
calculation, to make sure that you always get the same direction.
For details describing methods of creating the "Symmetry Element Plane", cf.
Two Ways for Symmetry Element .
V-18
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
2.15 Step Cylinder

With this function, you create two elements of the type "Cylinder", which
have a common axis but different diameters. A step cylinder can be e.g. a
graduated spindle.
In the same way you entered for all the other elements a name and a storage no.,
you can do that for each one of the two cylinders. If you confirm the "Element
Step Cylinder", you will directly come to the measurement of the first step of the
cylinder. You can also manually measure the first step of the cylinder or with the
automatic elements you know.
If all points for the first step are recorded, click on the "Element Finished"
icon. You come to the measure mode for the second step of the cylinder (see first
step). Click again on the "Element Finished" icon and arrive at the calculation of
the step cylinder.
The axes of the two cylinders are identical.
2.16 Contour
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Contour". A
contour comprises a number of points in an ordered array. The GEOPAK
program can use the contour points for calculating an element (for details see the
example shown under Selection of Points Contour).
You either click on the symbol (see above) or use the menu bar
"Element / Contour".
In the dialogue window "Element Contour" there are summarised all

the types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details please refer also to Elements: Overview).
For details concerning the first two types of construction see Type of
Construction.
For further details see under

Contour Connection Element
Type of Construction
Load Contour.
Middle Contour .
Load Contour from External Systems .
For details regarding the topic "Calculation of an Element on a Contour"
see topic Selection of Point Contour
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-19
Elements
2.17 Selection of Points Contour

You have loaded a contour and want to calculate an element on this contour (or
part of this contour). For this purpose you need, as a rule, only a part of the
contour points. This is why you have to make a selection. For the selection of the
points, you use the graphics. Make sure that this is activated.
Example for the calculation of a circle
Click on the element symbol,
in the following window and on the "Recalculate from

Memory" symbol and confirm.
In the "Circle - Recalculate / Copy from Memory" window, you

click on the symbol (contour).
Select a contour
either from the list or ...
With the left-hand mouse button depressed, you select in the

contour graphics all the areas you want to use for calculating, e.g. a
circle. You can click single points, or you summarise points to form
blocks (keep mouse button depressed). The areas selected are
shown in colour (in "red" as shown in the picture below").
In the window "Selection of Points Contour", the co-ordinates of the

points or blocks are shown. You decide in which co-ordinate system
you want to have them displayed.
Below the line "Selected Blocks" you decide via the symbols which
blocks you want to use for the calculation.
V-20
by mouse-click (the mouse changes to a reticle) in a

contour graphic on your screen. You confirm.
The "Selection of Point Contour" window appears. At the same time,
the mouse pointer again changes to a reticle.
Using this symbol you call up all contour points required for the
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
calculation of the element in question.
You delete all points (blocks).
2.18 Surfaces
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Freeform
Surface". This function generates the connection between GEOPAK and 3DTOL.
Surface").
You come to the dialogue window "Element Surface".
In the text boxes, you enter your element name or the memory
number in the usual manner.
In addition, using the symbols you can cause a sound output and a
graphical assistance to be activated.
There are two ways to create a new element, i.e. by means of a
measurement or
by using a connection element.
If you opt for the measurement, click on the symbol and confirm with OK.
Important
A "Connection element freeform surface" consists of measurement points of
other elements whose measurement points have actually been measured before.
So if you want to create a connection element, you can only use measured
elements. Furthermore, the material side of the measured element must be
known.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-21
Elements
The material side is not known of points that have not been measured
compensated and of elements that have been calculated only from
contour points without probe direction (see example ill. below).
3D-TOL is automatically started, that is either ...
with an already existing model, or ...

with the "Load Model" dialogue window, in case no model is
available. As soon as a model has been loaded into 3D-TOL
the program will automatically return to GEOPAK, in order that
you can enter measure mode and tolerances.
While the measurement is running you can freely change, according to the
specific requirements of your measuring task, from 3D-TOL to GEOPAK
and vice versa using for this purpose the status line.
V-22
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
2.19 Angle Calculation

By means of the function "Angle", you may calculate the angle between two
elements. Activate the function (dialogue window) via the menu bar "Elements"
and the function "Angle", or choose a shorter way by clicking on the
in the toolbar.
symbol
GEOPAK calculates the angle in the plane and its 3 projections.

You Can Input The Following Addendum Conditions:
Calculation of the angle by probing the material sides
Calculation of the angles via the direction vector
This input only influences:
Measured planes
Measured straight lines. That is possible only if the straight lines

were measured in the same driving plane. Otherwise, calculating is
realised through the direction vectors.
Furthermore, you can select between
the calculated angle
its complementary angle of 180 ("Explementary Angle")
its complementary angle of 360
Again, the result is a geometrical element of the type "Angle". Directly after this,
you can make a nominal-actual comparison of values.
Pay Attention: The angle projections depend on the co-ordinate system.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-23
Elements
2.20 Calculation of Distance

With the function "distance", you can calculate the distance between two
elements. Activate the function (dialogue window) via the menu bar "Elements"
and the function "Distance". You may also choose the shorter way via the symbol
displayed in the icon bar.
On principle, the result is a spatial distance.
GEOPAK Win calculates the distance as sum and as vector.
The distance is always positive.

The distance vector is directed from the first towards the second
output element. Its vector components are signed.
You Can Input The Following Addendum Conditions:
Calculation of the radius of the output elements concerned. This

input produces an effect not only on circles, cylinders and spheres
involved, but also on not compensated measuring points. Here the
respective probe radius is added or subtracted.
Projection plane, in which the calculated distance ought to be

situated. This input is ineffective on planes concerned, i.e. are in no
case projected.
A projection is practical, e.g. if you calculate the distance

between a circle and a straight line, which are situated in the
same plane of drawing, but probed in another measurement
position.
The result is a geometrical element of the type "distance". Directly after this, you
can make a comparison of nominal and actual values.
Attention: The vectorial distance depends on the co-ordinate system.
V-24
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements
Distance comprising calculation of radii
For circles, GEOPAK calculates the geometric distance between the circle
centres and includes the radii in the calculation of this geographic distance. The
resulting distance is decomposed into its components in a way that a2=
ax2+ay2+az2.
Thus, the distance components (see sketch below) are defined by the points of
intersection of the straight line through the circle centres with the circles. In the
example of the sketch below, these are the components 1 and 2.
You do not get the component 1a. For the Y-value, this statement applies in
exactly the same way.
1 = X-component
2 = Y-component
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-25
Elements
2.21 Distance along Probe Direction

Basically, the function is used in cases where points from a CAD system are to
be compared.
Example
Nominal points exist, e.g. of a freeform surface from a CAD system. The
normal line directions in the surface points directions are given, as well.
However, only the deviations arising perpendicular to the surface are to
be determined.
Proceed as follows
You can activate the function via the menu "Element/Distance along
Probing Direction" and come to the corresponding dialogue window.
You form a theoretical point and measure the corresponding point at

the workpiece.
You enter the two points in the dialogue window.
The result is automatically displayed after the "Distance".
The distance along probing direction can be negative, as well. Material is

lacking in such a case.
V-26
v 2.4
14.09.04
Elements: Further Options
3.1
Type of Construction
In the GEOPAK way of thinking, select the element you want to get first, then
select how this element must be built. Therefore, the dialogue windows for the
elements contain icons describing the different construction methods (cf. also
Elements). Some of these icons differ from one element type to the next;
however, the first four icons are the same for all types.
Determine the element by measurement.
Calculate an element from the positions (locations) of other elements, e.g.
the pitch circle diameter out of the centres of several circles.
"Re-calculate from memory" means:
The position of the element has been previously stored in a different

co-ordinate system.
Now the element is recalled from memory and its position is

calculated in the actual co-ordinate system.
You can also change the way of calculation: press e.g. the button
for "minimum zone element", if the element originally has been
calculated as a Gauss element.
You can also define any element as a "theoretical element"; this means that
you input the nominal values by keyboard.
For different elements, further types of construction are possible; these are
shown by different icons and separately explained for each element type.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-27
3.2
Type of Calculation
For some types of elements you can select between four different methods of
calculating the resulting element parameters, if more than the minimum number
of points has been taken. Usually, these different ways of calculation are giving
different results.
Gauss: The program calculates an "average" element; this element is
situated within the points in such a way that the distances of the single points to
both sides are roughly the same (or, more accurately: the sum of the squared
distances is minimised).
Minimum Circumscribed Circle: the program calculates the smallest circle

that contains all the points. This circle is always defined and unique; it is either a
circle through two points, if these two points are opposite to each other, or a
circle determined by three points. These three points form an acicular angle
triangle.
Maximum Inscribed Element: the program calculates the largest circle

that can be situated within the points. This is not always unique (e.g. in the case
of an elliptical hole) which means that there may be more than one solution.
Three points forming an acicular angle triangle always determine it.
Minimum Zone Element: the program calculates an element that is situated

in the middle of two ideal elements. These two ideal elements contain all points in
between them, and they are calculated in such a way that this zone is the
smallest possible. The circle may have the same centre as the maximum
V-28
v 2.4
14.09.04

inscribed or the minimum circumscribed circle, or may even be different from
both. In this latter case, two points determine the inner, and two other points the
outer circle. The radius or diameter output by GEOPAK is the average value of
the two circles.
It depends on your measurement requirements which calculation to select. The

most common calculation is according to Gauss criterion. When using this, all
points have the same influence on the result, whereas for the other cases, only
the outermost or innermost points determine the result.
Hint
As to opt for which type of calculation, find detailed information in the topic
Enveloping or Fitting-in Element.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-29
3.3
Enveloping or Fitting-in Element
As regards lines and planes, a frequently asked question is which type of

calculation is the most suitable.
From the illustration above you can see that for lines and planes, always the
enveloping element is useful. With this method you receive the line (plane)
represented by the blue line. If you opted for the fitting-in element, you would
receive the line (plane) (red line) that lies in the material.
Hint
This also applies to the case of two parallel edges forming a groove. Also
in case that a feather key is to be fitted in this groove, you should use the
enveloping element to limit the material free space (see ill. below).
V-30
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.4
Positive Direction by Vector
Background
In GEOPAK, all properties of the elements are automatically calculated. These
properties are usually location, direction, and other features specific to the
element. For the elements line, plane, cylinder, and cone the direction in space
plays a significant role. Since calculation of angles between elements takes the
so-called "positive direction" into account, and as alignment procedure also uses
this positive direction to determine the axis in space or within a plane, this
positive direction must be defined in such a way that reproducibility from one
execution of the part program to the next is possible. Therefore, GEOPAK uses
the following definitions of the positive direction for the elements.
Definition for the Elements

For a measured line, the positive direction is the direction from the first to the last
point. In the example below, the points have been taken as 1, 2, and 3; therefore,
the positive direction is from 1 to 3.
If this line is used for an axis alignment of the x-axis, the axis gets the same
direction as the line.
With the circle and the ellipse, the "Positive Direction" always is parallel to the
direction vector of the projection plane. In our example below, the X/Y plane is
the projection plane. The "Positive Direction" is indicated by Z+'.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-31
In case of a cylinder, the "positive direction" goes from the first to the last
measured point, along the axis of the cylinder.
In the case of a cone, the "positive direction" runs from the apex into the opening
of the cone (cf. picture below).
V-32
v 2.4
14.09.04

In case of a plane, the vector pointing out of the plane gives the "positive
direction". The vector of a measure plane always points away from the material;
the order / sequence of measured points does not affect the direction (cf. picture
below).
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-33
3.5
Re-calculate Elements
For the form tolerances straightness, flatness, and circularity you can blank
measurement points and re-calculate the form tolerance after opening the
graphic.
You proceed in the following way

You activate the form tolerance required (see, e.g., under
Straightness). It is not necessary to activate the graphic symbol in
the respective dialogue windows.
You confirm and get the graphics displayed.
You click on the symbol and come to the window "Recalculate without Selected Points".
Using the symbol you mark in each case the point with the
biggest distance towards the inside (Min.) or towards the outside
(Max.).
The marked points appear on the graphics in red.
In case you have clicked one point or several points in excess,

you can cancel the markings by this symbol.
When you delete the marked points with "OK", the element will be recalculated. The results will be displayed to you immediately.
This command is not to learn.
3.6
Free Element Input
When you want to open an element in the GEOPAK dialogues, you would open,
as a rule, a list with all the elements available. Even in the part program editor,
such a list is shown to you as dependant on context.
There are, however, cases where this is not sufficient. For example, when you
are creating a subprogram. The elements of the main program to be called are
then unknown.
V-34
In this case you can enter, via the function "Free Element Input",
type, name and number of the element that you want to use.
This input is possible whenever you see this sign [..] in an element
list. With a double click on this line, you open the "Free Element
Input" window.
This window is self-explanatory.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Calculation
Calculation
4.1
Calculation according to Gauss
In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, you optionally have four methods
for the execution of your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of
Calculation ). The only method that is always clearly defined is the Gauss
method. If no other method is specified, (the Chebychev, for example, is meant
for the definitions of geometrical errors according to the ISO 1101) you select the
Gauss method.
Gauss: The program is calculating an average element. The differences
are largely cancelled out (compensation element).
In the graphics, you also get a value that is called standard deviation or spread.
4.2
Minimum Zone Element
In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, you have four methods to
execute your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of Calculation ). One
of it is the "Minimum Zone Element".
Minimum Zone Element: The program is calculating an average element,
among a few features, which is geometrically perfect. This couple of features
keeps the distance to a minimum but includes all measured points (Chebychev).
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-35
Calculation
4.3
Enveloping Element
In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, there exist four methods to
of it is the "Enveloping Element Zone Element".
Enveloping Element: The program encloses the measured points by a
smallest geometrically perfect feature (contact element at outside measurement).
4.4
Fitting-in Element
In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, you have four methods to
of it is the "Fitting-In Element".
Fitting-in element: The program triggers the measured points by a biggest
perfect feature (contact element at internal dimension).
V-36
v 2.4
14.09.04
Spread / Standard Deviation
Spread / Standard Deviation
Introduction
In the circularity, straightness and flatness graphics, GEOPAK displays a value
(standard deviation), which is designated by Std. Dev. * 4. The same value can
be displayed in the graphics of elements as 4s.
Degrees of Freedom:
The degrees of freedom are important for the calculation of the standard
deviation. This depends on the min. number of the necessary measurement
points, i.e. from the type of element:
Type of element
Degrees of freedom
Line
Min. number of
points
2
Circle
Number of points - 3
Plane
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Calculation of standard deviation step-by-step:

Sum up the square deviations: Measured point calculated element
for all measured points.
Divide the Sum of all deviation squares through the degrees of

freedom and
calculate out of it the square root.
The result is the standard deviation.
The graphics mentioned above display the quadruple value of it.
14.09.04
v 2.4
V-37
Constructed Elements: Connection Elements
VI Elements: Further Options

Contents
1
Constructed Elements: Connection Elements .............. 3

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
Connection Elements, General................................................... 3

Connection Elements "From Measured Points" ....................... 5
Connection Element Point .......................................................... 7
Connection Element Line............................................................ 7
Connection Element Circle ......................................................... 8
Connection Element Ellipse ....................................................... 8
Connection Element Sphere ....................................................... 8
Connection Element Cylinder..................................................... 9
Connection Element Cone .......................................................... 9
Connection Element Plane ....................................................... 10
Connection Element Freeform Surface ................................... 10
Intersection Elements .................................................... 12

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
Intersection Element Line ......................................................... 12

Intersection Element Point ....................................................... 14
Intersection: Extras ................................................................... 16
Intersection Element Circle ...................................................... 18
Intersection Element Ellipse ..................................................... 19
Symmetry Elements ....................................................... 20

3.1
3.2
3.3
Symmetry Element Line ............................................................ 20

Symmetry Element Plane: Two Ways ...................................... 21
Symmetry Element Point .......................................................... 23
Fit in Elements ................................................................ 24

4.1
4.2
Fit in Element Sphere ................................................................ 24

Fit in Element Circle .................................................................. 24
Further Constructed Elements...................................... 25

5.1
5.2
Shift-Element Line ..................................................................... 25

Tangent....................................................................................... 25
Automatic Element Recognition ................................... 26

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
15.09.04
Introduction................................................................................ 26
Further Options.......................................................................... 26
Activating the Function............................................................. 27
The Dialogue: Symbol and Information Boxes ....................... 27
The Dialogue: Important Functions ......................................... 28
Settings ...................................................................................... 29
Special Cases / Limitations ...................................................... 31
v 2.4
VI-1

6.7.1
6.7.2
Special Cases with the Joystick........................................................ 31

Limitations......................................................................................... 31
Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes........................... 32

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Hole Shapes: Introduction........................................................ 32

Differences: Hole Shape Inclined Circle............................... 33
Hole Shape: Symmetry Axis and Width .................................. 36
Hole Shape: How to Work......................................................... 37
Hole Shapes: Tolerance Comparison / Position..................... 38
Carbody Measurement: Introduction ........................... 40

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
VI-2
Settings ...................................................................................... 41
Monitoring: Data Transfer ........................................................ 42
Start Part Program .................................................................... 42
Synchronisation of Part Program ............................................ 42
Synchronisation is nessecary.................................................. 43
Both Part Programs should be Finished................................. 43
Retrieve Element Data .............................................................. 44
Element Container..................................................................... 45
Joint Co-ordinate System......................................................... 45
Transfer Co-ordinate System ................................................... 46
v 2.4
15.09.04
Constructed Elements: Connection

Elements
1.1
Connection Elements, General
You use the Connection Elements option in cases where, e.g.,
you intend to create a hole pattern from centres of circles.
You can also draw a line through adjacent circles.
Or you wish to determine the straightness of a cylinder axis by

measuring several superimposed circles.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-3

Special importance is attached to the option which allows you choose
between single and group selection (for further details refer to "Single Selection"
and "Group Selection".
The connection element is determined in the ...
current co-ordinate system and in
the selected projection plane.
Procedure
To access the dialogue window of the connection element that you want to form,
click ...
the corresponding symbol

in the icon bar (see picture).
In the "Element Circle, etc." window, click on the symbol (see

picture).
Or adopt a different method using the "Menu bar / Element / Circle,

etc.".
In any case, for the present example you have to confirm "Element
Circle" in the window.
Hint
To see how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Connection Element
Circle (Single and Group selection)", refer also to the subjects "Single
Selection" and "Group Selection".
For details regarding the topic "From Measured Points" (left symbol) refer
to Connection Element "From Measured Points"
VI-4
v 2.4
15.09.04
1.2
Connection Elements "From Measured Points"
In the dialogue window "Connection Element Circle, etc.", you can use the
symbol (left, above) for your decision to form the connection element from
measured points. You can calculate a connection element also from the local coordinates, which have been established for the elements used. For the elements
such as Circle, Sphere, and Ellipse, this is, in each case, the centre of the circle.
Hint
These options are applicable to both Single selection and Group
selection.
Option not active
The topic "Connection Elements, General" shows examples where you do not
activate the option "From measured points". The connection elements concerned
pass through the centres of circles. A further example, used for the geometrical
inspection of rotary tables, would be a "Connection Element Circle" through the
centre of several spheres.
Option active
You activate this option in cases where you wish to determine the connection
element from measured points instead of using centres.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-5

Example: On a cylinder, you have measured several circles at different heights
(see picture below). Using these measurement points you can calculate a
cylinder.
A connection element formed this way includes all features of a measured

element (measurement points and material side).
Probe radius compensation
The measured points are probe centres. From these, the new element is
calculated against which in the second step the probe radius is
compensated.
For this, GEOPAK uses the probe radius with which the first element was
measured. The result is only valuable when the relevant elements where
measured with the same probe radius.
In the learning mode you are therefore warned when two
relevant probe radii differ by more than 0.01 mm.
VI-6
v 2.4
15.09.04
1.3
Connection Element Point
You can form the Connection Element Point from the

local co-ordinates of known elements, or
from the measurement points of these elements.
For further details, refer also to the topics

Connection Element "From Measured Points"
1.4
Connection Element Line
You can form the Connection Element Line from the...
local co-ordinates of known elements.

Should you have to define, e.g., a line by the centres disposed
adjacent or above each other, you form the Connection Element
Line.
For this purpose, you are not allowed to activate the symbol
"From Measured Points".
Measurement points of these elements.

If you want to connect two lines with each other (picture below,
red Line), you will have to activate the symbol.

15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-7
1.5
Connection Element Circle

In the "Element Circle" dialogue you can decide for one out of four
calculating methods ("Type of Calculation").
You can form the Connection Element Circle from the...
local co-ordinates of known elements.

An application frequently used for the Connection Element Circle
is a hole pattern.
In this case you are not allowed to activate the symbol "From
Measured Points".
Measurement points of known elements.

1.6
Connection Element Ellipse
You can form the Connection Element Ellipse from the
1.7
Connection Element Sphere
You can form the Connection Element Sphere from the
VI-8
v 2.4
15.09.04
1.8
Connection Element Cylinder
You can form the Connection Element Cylinder from the

You can form a cylinder using, e.g., the measurement points of
several superimposed circles.
1.9
Connection Element Cone
You can form the Connection Element Cone from the

You can form a cone using, e.g., the measurement points of several
superimposed circles.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-9
1.10 Connection Element Plane

You can form the Connection Element Plane from the
from the measurement of these elements.

You can form a plane using, e.g., the measurement points of two
lines. This, however, is based on the understanding that the lines
have been measured in one plane. (Picture below).
1 = Line in ZX plane
2 = Line in YZ plane
1.11 Connection Element Freeform Surface

The Connection Element Freeform surface is always formed from the
measurement points of known elements.
Example: You can form an Element Freeform Surface from the measurement
points of two lines.
Prerequisites
GEOPAK and 3D-TOL
If you want to form the Connection Element Freeform Surface, you must use
GEOPAK and 3D-TOL.
GEOPAK provides 3D-TOL with the required measurement points.
3D-TOL performs the actual evaluation.
Measurement points
The elements used to form the new Connection Element Freeform Surface may
only contain actually measured points.
By "actually measured points" we understand in this case: points determined by a
probing of the work piece.
VI-10
v 2.4
15.09.04

Do not use the following elements to form a Connection Element Freeform
Surface:
Theoretical elements
Intersection elements (elements point, line, circle, ellipse)
Symmetry elements (elements point, line, surface)
Tangent
Move element (element line)
Fit in element circle or sphere
Minimum or maximum point of a contour (element point)
Connection elements not calculated from measurement points.
Do not use the following measurement points to form a Connection Element

Freeform Surface:
Measurement points from the Element Point that was not measured as a
"compensated point".
For a Connection Element calculated from measurement points,
observe the following: The probe directions are defined from the
calculated element.
Contours
If you want to use contours for the Connection Element Freeform Surface, these
may not be compensated contours, as the compensation is taken on from 3DTOL.
For more details, refer to the topics
Connection Elements General
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-11
Intersection Elements
2
2.1
Intersection Element Line
To crate an intersection line from two planes, use the menu "Element" and
click on "Line" and in the subsequent dialogue onto the symbol (see above).
Alternatively, you can use the tool bar.
In the dialogue "Intersection Element Line"
select one plane each in the First and in the Second Element and click on Ok.
VI-12
v 2.4
15.09.04
The sense of direction of the determined line follows the "Right-hand rule" (see ill.
below).
The right-hand rule as per the example above

1
Plane 1
Plane 2
NV1
Normal vector 1 (thumb)
NV2
Normal vector 2 (index finger)
1S
Sense of direction of line after intersection of plane 1 with

plane 2 (middle finger)
2S
Sense of direction of line after intersection of plane 2 with

plane 1 (the planes intersect in reverse sequence, therefore
also the sense of direction of the intersection line is
reversed).
If you click on the empty line (in the ill. above underlaid in blue), you get to the
dialogue "Free Element Input ".
For information about the topic "Loops " click on the term.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-13
2.2
Intersection Element Point
To be able to construct an intersection element point, use the menu bar

and click on "Elements / Point" and in the subsequent dialogue onto the symbol
(see above).
Alternatively, you can use the tool bar.
The dialogue "Intersection Element Point" is basically similar to the other
intersection elements. However, the Intersection Element Point offers
substantially more options (see ill. below) than, for example, the line (only two
planes).
If you click onto the empty line (...) you get to the dialogue "Free Element Input".
For information about the topic "Loops" click onto the term.
VI-14
v 2.4
15.09.04
Several intersection options at a glance

Plane
Line
Circle
Cone
Cylinder
Ellipse
Plane
Error
SoL
S mA
S mA
Line
S/L
S mA
S mA
S/M
Circle
SoL
S/L
S/M
Cone
S mA
S mA
S mA
S mA
Cylinder
S mA
S mA
S mA
S mA
Ellipse
S/M
Error
= Intersection
= Perpendicular
S/L
= Intersection or perpendicular, if there is no intersection (ill. below)
The line does not intersect with the circle. The perpendicular is calculated.
SoL
= Intersection or perpendicular can be selected
SmA
= Intersection with axis
S/M
= Intersection or middle, when there is no intersection (ill. below)
The circles do not intersect. The middle is calculated.

For more information refer to
Intersection: Extras (Contour; Point-Sphere; Circle-Plane).
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-15
2.3
Intersection: Extras
For the general statements you should first consult the topic Intersection
Element Point.
Extra: Contour
If an intersection element is a contour, the contour must be defined as the first
element using the symbol.
Select your contour from the first list via the arrow symbol.
Select the second element from the second list.
You can only intersect contours with lines, circles or points.
When projecting a point onto a contour, inform yourself
thoroughly under the topic Intersection: Contour with Circle,
Line, Point
In all other cases you will receive an error message. Via the
min./max.-symbols (ill. below), you select the intersection
points.
Hint
In case of more than one intersection point (e.g. also in case of
intersections of circle/line; circle/circle; circle/plane), you can select your
desired point of intersection via the symbols (ill. above). You can decide
on one point each with the biggest or smallest X-, Y- or Z-co-ordinate.
Extra: Point / Sphere
Intersections are not possible for these elements. However, the perpendicular is
offered as results.
VI-16
v 2.4
15.09.04
Extra: Intersection Circle / Plane
Up to version 2.2, the centre of the circle was automatically projected onto the
plane. As from v.2.3 you have the possibility to have the piercing points of the
circle circumference line through the plane calculated as intersections (see ill.
below).
For this, click on the symbol.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-17
2.4
Intersection Element Circle
You use the function "Intersection Element" via the cylinder symbol
whenever you want to calculate a circle in a measured plane. The diameter of the
circle is identical with the cylinder diameter (see picture below).
The information as to whether it is a bore or a shaft is taken over by the cylinder.

This is of importance for the application of MMC.
Use the "Intersection Element" function via the cone symbol when you
want to know
at which level the cone has a determined diameter
which diameter a cone has at a determined place.
Via the following symbols...
Given diameter
Distance from the apex of the cone
Distance from the XY-plane
Distance from the YZ-plane
Distance from ZX-plane
You use the function "Intersection Element" via the sphere symbol when
you want to know
VI-18
at which level the sphere has a determined diameter, or ...
which diameter a sphere has at a determined place.
Given diameter
Distance from the pole of the sphere
Distance from the base plane

v 2.4
15.09.04
2.5
Distance from the XY-plane
Distance from the YZ-plane
Distance from the ZX-plane
Intersection Element Ellipse
For an ellipse, the cylinder or the cone serves as an intersection element (2nd
element). Click onto the symbol and confirm.
In the result field and in the protocol you find, apart from the data about the
centre, the big and the small diameter, also the angles that include the big semi
axis with the co-ordinate axes (see ill. below).
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-19
Symmetry Elements
3
3.1
Symmetry Elements
Symmetry Element Line
The symmetry line of two lines is their median line. The smaller angle is
bisected.
Often, the symmetry line is found between two parallel edges.

You can also use the axes of cones or cylinders as 1st or 2nd element.
VI-20
v 2.4
15.09.04
Symmetry Elements
3.2
Symmetry Element Plane: Two Ways
You have possibilities to create symmetry elements in the "Element Plane"

dialogue window.
Symmetry Element of two Planes
In the "Element Plane" dialogue window, click on the symbol and come to
the corresponding "Symmetry Element Plane" dialogue window. Enter the planes
under "First or Second Element" and confirm.
Hint
The symmetry plane is in the joint material or the joint gap between the
starting planes respectively.
In the above illustration, the symmetry planes are in the joint material.
In the above illustration, the symmetry plane is in the joint gap of the
starting planes.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-21
Symmetry Elements
In the above illustration, the symmetry plane is in the opening angle

between the starting planes.
In the above illustration, the symmetry plane is in the joint material of the
starting planes.
Exception
The above illustration shows the symmetry plane in the gap of the joint
material or in the joint material.
Possibly, both starting planes have been probed almost in parallel and
from the same direction. In this case you should call up one of the starting
planes from the memory and go the dialogue Recalculate from memory
and click on the option
"Change direction (symbol left). This is how you will get again two
planes with a joint mass or a joint gap respectively.
VI-22
v 2.4
15.09.04
Symmetry Elements
Symmetry Element of two Points
In the "Element Plane" dialogue window, click on the symbol and the
corresponding "Symmetry Element Plane" dialogue window appears. Enter the
points under "First or Second Element" and confirm.
Remember that a mouse-click on the area [..] allows you to change to "Free
Element Input".
Hint
The vector direction of the plane is defined by the direction from the first to
the second point.
3.3
Symmetry Element Point
The symmetry point between two points is the mid-point between the two
points.
You can also use the elements circle, ellipse and sphere as 1st and 2nd element.
For the calculation of the symmetry point, GEOPAK uses the element mid-points.
The diameter of the elements has no influence on the result.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-23
Fit in Elements
4
4.1
Fit in Elements
Fit in Element Sphere
Fit in Element: As an additional element, we suggest you to fit in a cone a

sphere with a given diameter.
4.2
By clicking on this symbol and confirming, you get to the "Fit in

Element Sphere" window.
Here, you enter the diameter of the sphere and select the cone
where the sphere must be fitted in.
The result is an element sphere with the location of this sphere

being in the cone.
Fit in Element Circle

Use the "Fit in Element" function in case...
you have a circle with a specified diameter, or ...

you intend to fit this circle in between two lines or a contour.
In the case of two lines, there are four possibilities (see picture
below)
The four sectors are defined by the positive directions (+) of the
lines. This explains the symbols (picture below) in the "Fit in
Element-Circle" window.
In case of a contour, you must select the range in which you

intend to fit in the circle (for details refer to "Selection of Points
Contour").
VI-24
v 2.4
15.09.04
Further Constructed Elements
Further Constructed Elements
5.1
Shift-Element Line
With this option you create a line that runs parallel to the selected line (1st
element) and through the selected point (2nd element).
5.2
Tangent
Via the icon, you come to the Tangent window. First, select the circle
where the tangent must be placed. Then you decide
whether the tangent must be placed at the circle from a point or

whether
the line must be a common tangent of two circles (see

four icons on the left).
Since in the two cases, more tangents are possible, you have to
select one via the icons (above). You can also imagine the small
circle of the two circles as a point.
The designation of the tangents results of the contact point with the second circle
out of direction of the first circle (see our example above):
1 Tangent inside right
2 Tangent outside left
3 Tangent outside right
4 Tangent inside left
If you want the invert the direction of the tangent, you have to invert the order of
the circles. You have to take into account that
... tangent 2 becomes the tangent right outside and
... tangent 3 becomes the tangent left outside.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-25
Automatic Element Recognition
6
6.1

Introduction
With this function it is for some of the elements no longer necessary to select an
element to measure a workpiece. You measure a number of points and the
element is automatically determined. The CMM records the individual
measurement points with the probing direction. When the element has been
found, it is graphically represented in the dialogue "Automatic element
recognition" (in the ill. below, see the line after two measured points).
Furthermore you get an acoustical message and a further representation in the
window Element Graphic.
In case that a point has been measured that is positioned too far outside the
element being measured, the element that has been previously detected in the
part program is stored and this last point is disregarded (see ill. below) this is
done in the manual mode as a manual command and accordingly in the CNCmode. You can either use this last point as your first point for the new element
search or you can stop the measurement.
6.2
Further Options
You can use the three elements first detected to initiate an automatic alignment
(also refer to the topic Settings).
You can also automatically learn the clearance height, i.e. according to the
surface alignment (see also the topic Settings).
You can also automatically call up the tolerance comparison for all stored
elements (see also the topic Settings).
VI-26
v 2.4
15.09.04
6.3
Activating the Function
After you have activated the function in Settings and the CMM is idle, you can
just start to measure in the manual mode. The function with all options and the
dialogue gets active.
Alternatively you can use the menu "Elements / Automatic element recognition".
6.4
The Dialogue: Symbol and Information Boxes
Toolbar
In the toolbar of this dialogue (ill. below), you can opt for the default automatic
element recognition (symbol left). Alternatively, you can pre-define an element
which would mean a manual execution of all measurement processes up to the
"Element finished", in order to be able to store an element (part program).
To switch off the automatic element recognition, you must do this in the
PartManager in Settings.
In this toolbar, the symbols are activated or hidden. The symbols are operative
when an element can be calculated from measurement points.
Information box
An information box (ill. below) informs you what has happened or what needs to
be done respectively.
Fields for results

In other fields for results you find the latest relevant results of the element
recognition (length, diameter, angle etc.).
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-27
6.5
The Dialogue: Important Functions
With the automatic element recognition we provide you with a range of functions
for a user-friendly control of the measurement process according to your
individual requirements.
A click on this symbol deletes the last measurement
point. This function also applies for the last element that
has been automatically learnt/stored.
With a click on this symbol you accept and store the
recognised element with all measurement points in the
part program.
With a click on this symbol you store the recognised
element with all points excluding the last one. The last
point is used for the next element. With the automatic
element recognition activated, this is also executed
automatically.
A click on this button and the dialogue disappears. If
there are already measurement points in the memory, a
safety inquiry appears.
After recognition of the first three elements, you can
initiate an automatic alignment using this symbol (for
detailed information, refer to Patterns for Alignment ).
Following the surface alignment, a clearance height can
be automatically set. This is always the Z-axis. The
height can be put manually in the text box next to the
symbol. You can also define the clearance height
already in the Settings.
The automatic call-up of the tolerance comparison you
can either determine in this dialogue or already in the
Settings.
The symbols from left to right:
VI-28
No tolerance comparison
Tolerance comparison directly after

recognition of an element
Tolerance comparison of all elements after

ending the functionality
v 2.4
15.09.04
6.6
Settings
The special options of the Automatic Element Recognition include

the automatic alignment
the automatic setting of a clearance height and
the automatic call-up of the tolerance comparison.
You can use all three options via the settings. To get to the respective dialogue,
use the PartManager via Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / GEOPAK
configuration / Automatic element recognition (see ill. below).
Activate or finish the function in the dialogue top left.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-29

Capture Range
You use the capture range to determine the accuracy range within which points
of an element shall be recognised. Points outside the range (red arrow in ill.
below), initiate a new process for element recognition (for this, already refer to
Automatic Element Recognition ).
Angular Range
You use the angular range to determine the accuracy range of the probing
direction. The probing direction of each measurement point is very important for
determining an element. This is why points for which the probing direction is not
within the defined angle (red arrow in ill. outside angle "") are no longer used for
determining the element. (see also already in Automatic Element Recognition ).
These points initiate a new process for element recognition.
Use the options for the tolerance comparison to decide for either
VI-30
no or
a direct tolerance comparison (after storing an element) or
the tolerance comparison of all elements after finishing the
functionality.
v 2.4
15.09.04
6.7
Special Cases / Limitations
6.7.1
Special Cases with the Joystick
With the joystick you have the possibility to perform two of the functions directly
without the necessity to use the dialogue. The advantage of this is that you need
not switch between joystick and keyboard.
Keyboard (dialogue)
Joystick
CANCEL
START
Hint
When the display in the dialogue shows 0 and you push the START
button, the dialogue is closed and the functionality is finished.
This action corresponds to activating the symbol left.
You can use the GOTO-button to additionally learn interim positions that
are also stored. You can activate this function only via the joystick.
6.7.2
Limitations
The element point cannot be automatically learnt (if only one measurement point
has been measured, this may always belong to another element). This applies in
the same way for a line with only two measured points (with a third point, always
a circle could be recognised).
The elements ellipse, inclined circle, sphere and step cylinder

cannot be recognised with this function.
Cone and cylinder must be measured in circles.
All elements are only calculated acc. to Gauss.
The element names are given by GEOPAK.
During an automatic element recognition, no probe change is

possible.
Hint
For the SpinArm, certain driver settings are required (AutoDummy=1 und
MouseModeAvailable=0)
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-31
Carbody Measurement: Hole Shapes
7
7.1

Hole Shapes: Introduction
For the measurement of vehicle bodies particularly in the automotive industry

a range of further elements is required in MCOSMOS. For these hole shapes,
you find the following elements apart from the "Inclined circle":
Square
Rectangle
Slot
Triangle
Trapezoid
Hexagon
Drop
These elements are particularly used for measuring punched holes. First of all,
the position and axis direction are important when working with these elements.
Length values are not separately tolerated due to the high precision of the
punching processes. However, they are also output in the protocols.
As for the inclined circle, you first have to measure the surface (see example
illustration below of measurement point display) and second, the element. You
can also call up an already known surface from the memory.
For hole shapes you also have the option to measure the surface with any
number of points. When measuring the actual element, however, you can only
measure a defined number of points (for detailed information, refer to the topic
Differences to Inclined Circle).
Further topics
Symmetry Axis and Width
How to Work
Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance
VI-32
v 2.4
15.09.04
7.2
Differences: Hole Shape Inclined Circle
To get to the dialogues, either use the symbol bar and click on the relevant
symbol or use the menu "Elements / Hole shapes" and then on the Element.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-33
For measuring the hole shapes (example dialogue, right), the system only uses
the minimum required number of points
VI-34
v 2.4
15.09.04

The elements and their respective number of measurement points:
Foursquare
Rectangle
Long hole
Triangle
Trapezium
Hexagon
Drop form
The elements are automatically finished after measuring these points. You
cannot measure more points. Therefore, no form deviations are possible and no
different modes of calculation.
There is no button "Autom. element finished".
There are no buttons for the calculation mode.
It is also not possible to enter a "Number of points".
Further topics
How to Work
Tolerance Comparison / Tolerance Position
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-35
7.3
Hole Shape: Symmetry Axis and Width
The hole shapes all have at least one symmetry axis and one width perpendicular
to the symmetry axis (see example illustrations below; from top left: trapezium,
drop form and hexagon).
W 1, 2 or 3 = are each the widths or heights

Symmetry axis: The direction is defined as follows:
Triangle
From the ground line to the opposite corner.
Trapezium
Perpendicular to the parallel sides in direction

from the bigger to the smaller side.
Drop form
From the big to the small circle.
Other punched hole

shapes
The sequence of the first two measurement

points determines the direction of the symmetry
axis.
Centre point:
The centre point is positioned on the symmetry axis in the two hole ends.
VI-36
v 2.4
15.09.04

Further topics
Differences to Inclined Circle
How to Work
Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance
7.4
Hole Shape: How to Work
When working with hole shapes, you measure the points in a certain sequence
and at given positions (see ill. below): The forms are composite forms. We have
either to deal with angles, or lines changing into circle arcs. According to the
requirements of the task, the angles are not included in the protocol.
When measuring long holes and drop forms, be careful not to interfere
with the circle arcs when measuring the line with the measurement
points as this would lead to wrong results. The same applies vice versa,
i.e. do not get into the lines when measuring circle arcs.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-37

In the learn mode, the representation in the display shows you where to probe
(see example ill. below).
Further topics
Tolerance Comparison / Tolerance Position
7.5
Hole Shapes: Tolerance Comparison / Position
Tolerance Comparison Element

With any one of the hole shapes you can execute a "Tolerance comparison
element" (ill. below; for detailed information also refer to the topic Dialogue
Tolerance Comparison Elements).
You can only tolerate the position of the centre and the direction of the axis. To
tolerate the measurement of a hole shape, you can use a variable (for detailed
information, also refer to the topic GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes ).
Position Tolerance
You can execute a position tolerance with any one of the hole shapes (ill. below;
for detailed information, also refer to the topic Position).
VI-38
v 2.4
15.09.04
To apply the Maximum Material Condition (MMC), select a label in the text box
next to the symbol.
Further topics
How to Work
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-39
Carbody Measurement: Introduction
For a carbody measurement, two identical systems measure the workpiece (ill.
below).
Identical in this context means:
Two CMMs are working with our software MCOSMOS,

each CMM has an own PC, and
the PCs are connected via a network.
The fact that the measurement is performed by two CMMs means a considerable
saving of time for the body measurement.
The part programs can be learnt from either the Master CMM or from the Slave
CMM. Analogous, one of the PCs is declared the Master PC and the second
computer the "Slave PC". The programmes can be started either from the Master
PC or from a third PC using the RemoteManager.
The measurement results are like known from MCOSMOS measured. If you
wish to use the measurement results of both CMMs to create a joint protocol, the
data can be transferred between the PCs (for detailed information, refer to
Retrieve Element Data ). The protocol is output on the Master PC.
The part programs can be synchronised. The Synchronisation is partly
automatic. The two machine controllers that are linked with each other via
hardware components perform the collision control between the overlapping
measurement ranges of the two CMMs.
But also the software contains features to exclude the occurence of a collision.
After you have defined your probe system, a virtual cuboid is positioned around
the probe to prevent collisions. Only after a probe has left an overlapping section,
the second probe can move into this section.
Starting with version 2.4, we have furthermore established an "Element
Container". In this container you can gather measurement points (applies
VI-40
v 2.4
15.09.04

principally for GEOPAK). As required, these measurement points can e.g. for
the carbody measurement be transferred between the two PCs.
Further Topics
Setup Parameters
Monitoring: Data Transfer
Start Part Program
Synchronisation of Part Program
Retrieve Element Data
Element Container
Joint Co-ordinate System
Transfer Co-ordinate System
8.1
Settings
Server or Client
To be able to work with a DualArm system, you must first adjust some defaults
(PartManager / Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / DualArm).
After a new installation, the DualArm functionality is not available. To activate this
functionality, use the option buttons of the dialogue and click on either "Server"
for the Master PC or on "Client" for the Slave PC.
When clicking on "Server", a preset port is displayed. The port

number must be the same on both PCs.
When clicking on "Client", you must additionally enter the network

address of the other computer (Master PC).
Confirm and the "Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)" is initialised. This
TCP enables the data transfer between Master and Slave PC.
Always start the Master PC first and then the Slave PC.
Hint
In the dialogue "PartManager Configuration" make sure that you click on
the GEOPAK repeat mode in the section "Autostart". In this case, the
repeat mode is automatically started after starting the PartManager. No
selected workpiece is required for this.
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-41
8.2
Monitoring: Data Transfer
After completion of the "Settings" GEOPAK offers the possibility to check the
TCP with its functions (e.g. "Send"). In the learn mode, this function is always
available, in the repeat mode only when the part program has not yet been
started.
Start GEOPAK on the Master PC and click in the menu bar on Settings / DualArm
Socket Monitor. A dialogue of the same name appears.
Then start the Slave PC,
start GEOPAK
If in the Socket Monitor of the Slave PC the button "Send" is

activated like on the Master PC, you have performed the settings
correctly.
and click in the menu bar on Settings / DualArm Socket Monitor.
Now you can carry out a test by sending measurement results from one PC to the
other. The function "Element Container" is operative also without TCP.
8.3
Start Part Program
Start the part program for the carbody measurement via the menu bar/Program
and click on the function. Use this function on your Master PC to start a part
program on the Slave PC. You can also use the function to check if the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is active or not (for the topic "TCP", also
refer to the topic "Carbody Measurement: Introduction"). The part program on the
Slave PC is then started without a further dialogue. The "Joint Co-ordinate
System" is automatically loaded on both PCs.
What you need to know
A part can have several part programs, i.e. separate for the two PCs. If
there is only one part program, the part name is also the name of the part
program.
To the end of a part program, a message with the content
"Synchronisation" is sent to the other PC. If, for example, a part program
on a Slave PC is finished, a confirmation of the end of the synchronisation
is sent to the Master PC and vice versa.
In the text box "Timeout" which you can activate by clicking on this
symbol, you can enter a timeout limit for the part program until
synchronisation in seconds.
8.4
Synchronisation of Part Program
The part programs on both PCs (Master and Slave PC) must be synchronised.
This is achieved using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). To get to the
function "Synchronisation of part program", go to the GEOPAK learn mode and
use the menu bar / Program.
VI-42
v 2.4
15.09.04
8.5
Synchronisation is nessecary
The synchronisation is mandatory. If, for example, in a certain section both

CMMs measure only from different sides, useful results are only possible when
using the synchronisation.
A synchronisation is also possible during an active part program. In this case,
both PCs use the same synchronisation command in the active part program. To
recognise the exact synchronisation point, a label must be set in the part
program. In the dialogue "Synchronisation of part program" you enter a
meaningful text (e.g. "Position XYZ reached"). This label must be used by the
part program on both PCs.
8.6
Both Part Programs should be Finished
The situation may occur that the part program on the Slave PC finishes earlier
than on the Master PC. Therefore, an automatic synchronisation takes place at
the end of each part program. This simply means that the part programs on the
two PCs are not finished until also the final synchronisation is finished on both
PCs.
Hints
While a PC is waiting for a synchronisation, a window appears "Waiting
for synchronisation". Additionally, the name of the label is displayed.
With a click on the button "Cancel" you can stop the synchronisation. A
corresponding window appears for confirmation. A cancellation could, for
example, be required when another part program is executed or the
communication has been interrupted.
If you receive no feedback during the timeout limit, you receive the
message "Command cancelled after timeout ".
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-43
8.7
Retrieve Element Data
The function "Retrieve element data" is used for transferring data between
Master and Slave PC using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). The data
refer to the "Joint Co-ordinate System". If this has not been defined, the
workpiece co-ordinate system is used.
The Master PC retrieves the data, the Slave PC sends the data, if available. The
Master PC waits until the data are available. In case of an error, the PC that has
retrieved the data receives a message. Also the Slave PC can retrieve data.
Hints
Use the text box for "Number of elements" to retrieve measurement
results of more than one element. You would just need to enter a number
bigger than 1.
The dialogue furthermore provides for defining a timeout in seconds.
If you receive no feedback from the second PC during this timeout period,
an error message appears.
VI-44
v 2.4
15.09.04
8.8
Element Container
The element "Container" is only used to gather measurement points. It depends

on the respective part program, for which calculation of an element the
measurement points are needed at a later time. Apart from the carbody
measurement, the element "Container" can also be used in the GEOPAK basic
geometry.
Regarding the carbody measurement, find an example in the table below: The
measurement points of an element have been determined on two CMMs, but
have been gathered and calculated on one PC.
Master PC
Slave PC
Element container 1
Element container 5
Meas. 5 points
Meas. 5 points
Element finished
Element finished
Request element (Container 5 as 2)
No action
Send element (Container 5)
Connection element cylinder (container

1+2)
8.9
Joint Co-ordinate System
The current co-ordinate system can be stored as a joint co-ordinate system not
dependent on how the co-ordinate system has been defined. You must simply
ensure that the alignment is the same on both CMMs.
Example
Three spheres have been measured. The centres of the three spheres are
used for this alignment as follows:
A plane through the three centres is used for the spatial alignment.
A line from the centre of the first sphere to the centre of the second
sphere is used for the alignment of the X-axis.
The origin of the first sphere is the centre of the joint co-ordinate
system.
Hints
It is, however, a prerequisite that the spheres have been measured on
both CMMs in the same way and at the same positions. Otherwise, the
co-ordinate system would not be a "joint" co-ordinate system.
The co-ordinate system is stored in the GEOPAK learn mode, i.e. in the
corresponding menu to which you get via the menu bar / co-ordinate
system and with a click on the function "Send actual co-ord. system".
15.09.04
v 2.4
VI-45
8.10 Transfer Co-ordinate System

You can transfer a co-ordinate system from one CMM to the other. A new
alignment on the second CMM is not required.
For transferring the current co-ordinate system, there are two functions available
together with the corresponding dialogues:
Send ... or
Retrieve co-ordinate system.
If there is no "Joint Co-ordinate System", you get an error message. To get to the
dialogues, go in the GEOPAK learn mode to the menu bar / Program and click on
the relevant function. The retrieved co-ordinate system is stored as the current
co-ordinate system. The part program is not continued until this has been
completed.
VI-46
v 2.4
15.09.04
Graphics of Elements
VII Geometric Elements: Graphical

Presentation
Contents
1
Graphics of Elements....................................................... 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
Graphics of Elements - Task ...................................................... 2

The "Graphics" Pull-Down Menu................................................ 2
Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window ....................... 2
Element Graphics Options.......................................................... 3
Further Components of the Graphics of Elements Window .... 3
Graphic Limits.............................................................................. 3
Changing the representation of the graphics of elements ...... 4
Select Element ............................................................................. 4
Element Information .................................................................... 5
Rotate ........................................................................................... 6
Contour View................................................................................ 6
Display Sub Elements of a Contour ........................................... 7
Circles as Partial Circle Display ................................................. 8
Contour Point Selection by Keyboard ..................................... 10
Multi-Colour Contour Display ................................................... 11
Contour Display as Lines and / or Points................................ 12
Learnable Graphic Settings ...................................................... 12
Display of Graphic Windows .................................................... 13
Options of the "Graphics of Elements" ................................... 14
Recalculate Straightness, Flatness and Circularity................ 15
1.20.1 Toolbar in the "Straightness" Window ............................................... 15

1.20.2 Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate ................................... 16
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
14.09.04
Print Graphics during Learn and Repeat Mode....................... 17

Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode.................... 18
Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with "Autoscale" ......... 18
Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with a "Scale Factor" .. 19
Define Scaling ............................................................................ 19
Print Graphic in Repeat Mode................................................... 20
Define Label Layout................................................................... 20
Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points...................... 21
Compare Points ......................................................................... 22
Parallelism Graphics ................................................................. 24
v 2.4
VII-1
1
1.1
Graphics of Elements - Task
The graphics of elements is used as a graphic support for your measurement

tasks with GEOPAK. The window is available in the single and learn mode as
well as in the repeat mode.
The components of the graphics of elements window are:
1.2
a toolbar
the range of the graphic representation in the window
the "Graphics" pull-down menu with its functions in the menu bar
The "Graphics" Pull-Down Menu
You find the "Graphics" pull-down menu in the menu bar. In this menu, you can
only activate functions if the graphics of elements window is also activated. In this
case, all the other menus are deactivated.
1.3
Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window
In the toolbar, you find the following buttons for functions you frequently use in
the "Graphics" pull-down menu.
Zoom: Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Moving: Move graphics clip
Graphical element or point selection(this function is only in the single or
learn mode available)
Element information Display element information
Rotate: Rotate the graphic
Display Option
Top view
(XY-plane, line of sight towards the Z-axis)
Side face
(YZ-plane, line of sight towards the X-axis)
Front view
(ZX-plane, line of sight towards the Y-axis)
3D- view
VII-2
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.4
Element Graphics Options
With this function, you can change the representation of the graphics of
elements through further options. (See "Element Graphics Options Window")
Learnable graphic commands: If you click this symbol, you can store in
another window of the part program commands such as "Current View Settings",
"Print Window" and "Close Window". However, the commands in the learn mode
must not be imperatively carried out. This function is only in the single or learn
mode available.
Print graphics: If you click this symbol, a printout of the current window
contents with the usual log data is created.
Hint
The "Reset Zoom" function is only possible if youve activated the auto
scale (see " Element Graphic Options").
1.5
Further Components of the Graphics of Elements

Window
Further components of the graphics of elements window are:
Further graphics status line in the lower window margin
Co-ordinate system view (in the window below, left side)
Origin of co-ordinate system
Auto grid with measures
You can activate/deactivate the display of these components in the "Element

Graphic Options" window.
1.6
Graphic Limits
If you want to input the "Pan" and/or "Zoom" command numerically, use
this function (menu bar "Graphics / Graphic Limits"). Contrariwise, you can read
in this window, which changes you have made via the "Pan" and/or "Zoom"
functions.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-3
1.7
Changing the representation of the graphics of

elements
Zoom
If you click on this symbol, you can select and zoom a clip of the graphics of
elements through simple click.
Press the left mouse button.
Dragging the mouse you determine the increased area (red

rectangle)
Reset Zoom
to reduce the element graphic to the original size back...
you click on the symbol or

with a double click into the graphics of elements.
Moving
When pressing the left mouse button, you can move the displayed graphics
clip in the window.
1.8
Select Element
If you want to select geometric elements, the graphics of elements is in the

selection mode.
That means, the mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair and you can click
on the elements.
The function "select element" is only active, if you are in a function,
which expected an element as input (e.g. recalculate from memory,
intersection element, connection element, etc.).
Procedure
In the graphics, click on one element or more.
The selected elements are displayed in red in the graphics.
As soon as youve selected and confirmed, the "Select Element"

mode of the graphics of elements is automatically reset.
If you select two elements, you must note the following:
VII-4
With the right mouse button, you determine whether the next
element to select should be the first or the second element.
The current option number (1 or 2) is indicated in the mouse pointer.
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.9
Element Information
With this function, you get an information display for the elements.
Proceed as follows:
Click on the "Element-Information" icon to change to the

"Element-Information" mode.
The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair indicating the

letter "i".
Click on the element you want to get an info about it.
The information-field contains information of the element. In the

result field, you get further information to the corresponding
element.
If you click on an info-field with the right mouse button, you can add
further information in the information-field. Furthermore, you can
delete the info-field or mask out the element.
You can have the hidden elements indicated again. To do so, click
in the "Graphics" pull-down menu on "Display Hidden Elements".
Hint
You can move the info-fields. Click on the info-field, keep pressed the left
mouse button and move the info-field.
The information-fields are only indicated for a moment. For example, the
information-fields get lost after rotation of the co-ordinate system.
Hide elements
Click with the right mouse button into the info field of the element
you wish to mask out.
The context menu is shown.
Click on the "Hide Element" function".
Show elements again

Masked out elements will be shown again, if you click on "Graphics / Show
Hidden Elements".
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-5
1.10 Rotate
In the 3D view, you can change to the "Rotate" mode.
Proceed as follows:
Click on the "3D-View" in the toolbar in the "Graphics of

Elements" window.
Click on the "Rotate" icon.

The mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow in this mode.
Click on one of the three co-ordinate axes of the represented coordinate systems that are displayed and move the mouse to the
right or to the left.
The graphics is rotated in positive or negative direction around the
selected axis.
Hint
It is favourable to rotate in the normal (no zoom) graphics and with the
"Auto Scale" setting in the "Elements Graphics Options" window because
after the rotation, the graphics is automatically resized in the window.
1.11 Contour View

This function allows different contour-related views to be adjusted in the graphics
of elements. For instance, you can have displayed a single contour including all
elements created within this contour (so-called sub elements).
This is how you get to the "Contour View" window:
Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
Or use the menu bar:
Click into the graphics of elements, in order to activate the "Graphic"

function in the menu bar.
Click on "Graphic / View Contour" in the menu bar.
This window offers you the following possibilities:
Contour Selection
Display Subelements of a Contour
Partial Circle Display ON and OFF
Point Selection by Keyboard
Multi-Colour Contour Display
Display Contour as Lines and/or Points.
The settings you make in the " View Contour" window are for all or single contour.
These settings enable you to suppress or show parts of contours in the graphics
of elements.
VII-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.12 Display Sub Elements of a Contour

To change the display of contours, follow these fundamental steps:
First find out whether you want to view a specific contour or whether
all contours are to be displayed.
Then adjust whether and which further geometrical elements are to

be displayed.
Display contour and its sub elements

Of a contour you wish to view, in the graphics of elements, only the contour itself
and its sub elements, in other words, the elements which were created by means
of this contour (fitted-in circle, etc.).
Activate the check box "Only Active Contour".
Above the contour selected, there appear the number of points the
contour contains, the plane in which plane the contour was created
and whether it is an open or closed contour.
Activate the check box "Only Contour Subelements" within the area
"Geometric Elements".
Choose a contour from the list box.
Selecting "All" causes the contour and all geometric elements (circle, line, etc.) to
be displayed, irrespective of whether or not these elements have been created by
means of the selected contour. If "None" is selected, only the active contour will
be displayed.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-7
1.13 Circles as Partial Circle Display

Larger part programs containing numerous elements may cause the graphics of
elements to become unclear and complex. Moreover, sometimes you may
require only partial information on elements (e.g. only on that part of the circle
which runs through a contour) for the graphic view.
Hint
To generate an inlaid circle, use the button "Fit in Element" in the "Circle
Element" dialogue.
Using the "Partial Circle Display" function it is possible to display only that part of
a circle which runs on the contour. The part beyond is masked out. This is based
on the premise that the circle is a sub element of a contour.
VII-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Mask-out circle elements of contours
Activate the "Partial Circle Display" function, in order to mask-out those parts of
circles which do not run on the contour. This is generally based on the condition
that the circle in question is a sub element of a contour.
You get the following graphics of elements:
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-9
1.14 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard

A contour consisting of many points located close to each other makes it difficult
for the mouse to catch the desired contour point. When selecting a point with the
mouse, you always get the point located closed to the mouse pointer, when you
have pressed the left mouse button.
Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
Click into the graphics of elements, in order to activate the "Graphic"

function in the menu bar
Click on "Graphic / View Contour" in the menu bar.

Activate the function "Point Selection by Keyboard".
To select contour points using the keyboard, it is necessary
that the "Point Selection Contour" window is open.
To open the "Point Selection Contour" dialogue, you use, for instance, the
"Element Circle" dialogue with "Fit in Element" activated. You confirm and the
dialogue "Fit in element Circle" will be opened. After your inputs in the dialogue
"Fit in element Circle" you confirm again.
Click with the mouse into the graphics of elements to make sure that
the following keyboard inputs do not apply to the open dialogue, but
to the graphics of elements.
This action has to be repeated, whenever you click with the
mouse into the dialogue, for instance, to undo the last point
area selection, as all subsequent keyboard inputs would
again be related to the dialogue. At the beginning, the mouse
pointer is always positioned onto the first contour point.
VII-10
Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the desired
contour point.
Operate the Enter key to define the selected contour point as the
starting point of an area selection.
Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the contour point
which you wish to define as the starting point of the point area to be
selected.
Operate the Enter key to define the selected contour point as the
starting point.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Key
Mouse pointer movement
RH arrow key,
Arrow key above
LH arrow key,
Arrow key below
Ctrl + arrow key,
Page up,
Page down
Pos 1
Moves mouse pointer to the next

contour point
End
Enter (first time)
Enter (second time)
Moves mouse pointer to the previous

contour point
For fast mouse pointer movement on the
contour
Moves mouse pointer to the first contour
point
Moves mouse pointer to the last contour
point
Start of selection
End of selection
In the "Point Selection by Keyboard" mode, you can use the mouse for an
additional functionality, e.g. for zooming into the graphics. That would provide you
a more detailed view while selecting points.
1.15 Multi-Colour Contour Display

Within the graphics of elements, contours are always shown in white colour. If, for
instance, a measured contour is required to be compared to its nominal contour,
it might be difficult to distinguish these two contours in the graphics of elements.
The "Multicolour Mode" enables several contours to be shown in different
colours.
Click on the " View Contour" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
Click into the graphics of elements to activate the "Graphic" function

in the menu bar.
Click on "Graphic / Contour in the menu bar.

Activate the "Multicolour Mode" function.
In the multi-colour mode, the contours are shown in five successive colours
(white, green, blue, cyan and magenta). If more than five contours are displayed,
the series of colours repeats cyclically in the specified order, beginning with
white.
Deactivate the multi-colour mode for contours
Deselect the "Multicolour Mode" in the "View Contour" using the check box. Then
all contours will appear in the default colour white.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-11
1.16 Contour Display as Lines and / or Points

By default, contours are shown in the graphics of elements as a polygon. This is
an array of lines connecting the individual point co-ordinates of the contour. The
contour points co-ordinates themselves are not shown in this type of display.
Show Contour in Points Display
Perform the following steps if only the points of a contour are to be shown in the
graphics of elements:
Click on the "View Contour" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
Click into the graphics of elements to activate the "Graphic" function

in the menu bar.
Click on "Graphic / Contour View" in the menu bar.

Activate the "View Points" function in the "Contour Display Mode"
area.
This type of view is advisable in conjunction with the function "Point Selection by
Keyboard".
The points - lines view is automatically activated during the selection of
points, irrespective of the setting in the "View Contour" dialogue.
1.17 Learnable Graphic Settings

You can open the window "Learnable graphic settings" only in the GEOPAK
part program editor, as the graphic settings are automatically stored in the learn
mode.
Click on "Output" in the menu bar.

In the drop-down menu "Output", click on "Learnable graphic
settings".
In the dialogue "Learnable graphic settings" you define the structure of the
graphic evaluation.
Define graphic type
Open the list box "Define type of graphic" and select a graphic type.
Select an element from the list box "Reference element".
The list box "Reference elements" only lists elements that are used in
the part program and that can be used with the selected graphic type. In
case that multiple reference elements are possible, always enter either
the current or the nominal element.
Layout of the info windows
You can use the function "Define label layout" to load the number, position and
contents of the info windows of the graphic from a meta file. With this function,
VII-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
the graphic is printed out in the repeat mode exactly according to the layout you
have defined in the GEOPAK learn mode.
In the area "Define label layout", activate the function "Load layout
#".
Enter the number of the layout to be loaded in the repeat mode into
the list box.
To load" Define label layout" is only possible when working with the
element graphic and the airfoil analysis graphic (MAFIS). If you select
another graphic type (e.g. circular runout), this function is deactivated.
For more information about this topic, refer to "Define Layout of Info Windows"
and "Display of Graphic Windows".
1.18 Display of Graphic Windows

Element graphic options
In the "Element graphic options" you determine which elements you wish to have
displayed in the element graphic. For details as to the operation of the buttons,
refer to the topic "Options of the "Graphics of Elements".
Display of the graphic windows
When deactivating the button "Auto scale", you can perform the settings for
the co-ordinates of the visual range. For this, enter the desired values into the
input fields of the areas "Minimum" and "Maximum".
Hint
The graphic origin is positioned in the left bottom corner of the graphic
window.
Setting of views
You can use the view buttons for setting the views, i.e. top view, side view, front
view or 3D view.
Co-ordinate mode
With the buttons "Co-ordinate mode" you determine if the co-ordinates of the
visual range are entered as cartesian co-ordinates, as cylinder co-ordinates or as
spherical co-ordinates.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-13
1.19 Options of the "Graphics of Elements"

You activate the "Element Graphic Options" window by clicking on the icon.
Or click on "Options" in the "Graphic" pull-down menu.
In the "Element Graphic Options" window, you can change the display of the
graphics of elements through further functions.
The window is divided in two parts:
Elements
In the left part of the window, you find the symbols of the different element types.
Here you determine, which elements must be displayed.
Further Functions
You can activate or deactivate the functions through mouse click on the
corresponding icon.
Auto scale: With the auto scale it is possible to view every inch of the
graphics and in full size in the "Graphics of Elements" window. We suggest to
always work with the activated auto scale.
Grid: With this function, you activate the automatic grid display with scale
labelling.
Origin: With this function, you enable to display the origin.
Probe position: With this function, you enable the display of the position of
the probe. The probe is only displayed in the graphics if it is located in the actual
windowing of the "graphics of elements". The probe is represented as a red
sphere in non varying size and is always well displayed.
Probe radius: With this function, you enable the display of the position of the
probe radius. A thin red circumference around the probe shows the actual
diameter of the probe. If the actual probe diameter in the graphic display is
smaller than the symbolic representation of the probe, the actual probe radius is
indicated as a thin black line within the symbolic representation of the probe.
Option Settings: With this function, you can opt for a graphic selection of
elements. So you can click on elements in the "Graphics of Elements" window
and measure for example the angle or the distance between elements. If a
desired measurement task cant be utilised appropriately, these elements are not
displayed at graphic selection.
Symmetry axis: With this function, you display the symmetry axes for the
elements such as circle, cylinder, cone and ellipse.
Co-ordinate system: With this function, you enable the display of the coordinate system.
Flags: With this function, you get an information display for the elements.
Info. for the actual element. With this function, you enable the display of the
status line (operator indicator line).
VII-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.20 Recalculate Straightness, Flatness and

Circularity
Hints on beforehand:
While this chapter exclusively treats the description of the dialogues and graphics
of elements, we give detailed information to these subjects under straightness,
flatness and circularity.
Task: You can mark and remove meas. points in the graphics for the
straightness, flatness and circularity with the mouse pointer. After the
corrections, you can recalculate the form deviation.
How to display the graphics window (e.g. straightness)
Select the "Straightness" in the "Tolerance" pull-down menu under

"Form Tolerance" or
click on the "Straightness" tool for evaluation.

In the "Straightness" window, you click on "Show Straightness
Diagram".
Elements of the Graphics Window:
Toolbar
Graphical display in the left part
Numerical evaluation in the right part
1.20.1
Toolbar in the "Straightness" Window
Zoom graphics clip

Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
Graphical element or point selection
Display element information
Recalculate without selected points
Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon, you can store, in
another window, commands in the part program such as
"Actual Graphics Settings",
"Print Window" and
"Close Window".
Print graphics: If you click on this icon, a printout of the current window
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-15
1.20.2
Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate
Proceed as follows (two methods)
Graphical:
Click on the "Recalculate without Selected Points" button.
The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair pointer.

In the graphics, you select by mouse click the points that are
not supposed to be included in the recalculation. After that, you
confirm in the window "Recalculate without Selected Points".
Numerical:
You can realize this selection also without graphic support

in the "Recalculate without Selected Points" window.
For that, click on the "Select Min. Point " and/or "Select Max.
Point " buttons and confirm.
Hint
Straightness, flatness and circularity over all meas. points are always
accepted, namely
in the field for results,

in the standard printout,
if necessary in the file output and
in the statistical analysis
Note that the function "Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate" is

not learnable
VII-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.21 Print Graphics during Learn and Repeat Mode

This function enables you to print the displayed graphic windows directly from the
learn and repeat modes. Furthermore you can define and store the layout of the
labels.
Click on the "Print Graphics" symbol in the icon bar of the

graphic window you want to print.
Click on the graphic window you want to print.
The drop-down menu "Graphic" is displayed as active.
Click on "Graphic / Print" in the menu bar.
Print graphic in learn mode
Activate the function "Print now".
The graphic is immediately printed.
Confirm your input.
Print graphic in repeat mode
Activate the function "Learn print command".

Confirm your input.
Now, the settings in the area "Define label layout for print command" are
important.
Adapt graphic to the set paper format
In the area "Magnification" you set the required scaling.
For detailed information, refer to the topic "Autoscaling or Manual Scaling".
Label layout in the learn mode
You can use the function "Define label layout for print command" to store the
number, position and contents of the labels of the graphic in a meta file.
Therefore, the graphic is printed in the repeat mode exactly like it has been
learned in the learn mode. For detailed information, refer to the topic "Define
label layout".
Close window
Activate this function if you want to close the graphic window after completion of
the part program command.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-17
1.22 Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode

The graphics of elements shows, for instance, all elements. For your
measurement protocol it may, however, be advisable to record only one element
or a section clipped out from the graphics.
Use a zoom tool to enlarge the desired area of the graphics.

If the set blow-up of the graphic window is to remain
unchanged, you will have to turn the auto scale function
in the "Elements Graphics Options" to OFF. An element
added with auto scale switched ON causes the zoom to be
reset.
Add the element information to your element.
Choose a view, e.g. "3D View".
Turn the graphics to the desired position.
Open the window "Learnable Graphic Commands".

Activate the option "Current View Settings" in the "Learnable
Graphic Commands" window.
In cases where you also want the graphics to be printed out:
Activate the "Print Window" option.

Confirm your settings in the "Learnable Graphic Commands"
window.
Activating the option "Current View Settings" causes the settings of

the "Elements Graphic Options" to be stored as well.
1.23 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with

"Autoscale"
The auto scale function causes the current printout of the graphics for elements
to be fitted into the paper size set by default.
VII-18
Activate the "Print Window" option".
The "Auto scale" mode is shown as activated in the dialogue

window.
Confirm your settings.
The command is then entered into your part program.
v 2.4
14.09.04
1.24 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with a

"Scale Factor"
This function allows surface and form comparisons between elements of different
printouts to be made using the same scaling.
Activate the "Print Window" option.
The "auto scale" mode is shown as activated in the dialogue

window.
Click on the symbol "Adjust Scaling".
The "Print Graphic" dialogue is opened as well.
Activate the "Define Scaling Factor" option in the "Print Graphic"

dialogue.
Enter the scale factor into the input box.
Confirm your settings in the "Learnable Graphic Commands"

dialogue.
The command is entered in your part program.
Confirm your settings in the "Print Graphic" dialogue.

Your scale factor is shown in the "Learnable Graphic Commands"
window.
1.25 Define Scaling

In the windows "Print graphic" and "Learnable graphic commands" you can:
Switch to the mode "Auto scale".
Adjust manual scaling.
Switch on auto scale

When working with the auto scale function, the complete graphic is adjusted to
the paper format settings, reduced or zoomed-in. The complete graphic is printed
on the set paper format.
Activate the option "Auto scale".
All possibilities to a manual input of the scaling factor are inactive.
Enter scaling factor
Activate the option "Define scaling".

Enter the scaling factor into the input field.
To make sure that your graphic fits into the paper format you have set,
you should enter a scaling factor that is smaller than the "recommended"
maximum enlargement shown in the learn mode.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-19
1.26 Print Graphic in Repeat Mode

You can only use the print command of graphics in the repeat mode when you
have deactivated the function "Close window". With this setting, the graphic
windows in the completed part program remain open.
After completion of the part program, you can either
or click into the graphic window you wish to print.
The drop-down menu "Graphic" is displayed as active.
Click in the menu bar on "Graphic / Print"
click on the printer symbol of the graphic window,
In this dialogue you can enlarge or reduce the graphic for your print-out in the
flexible protocol. For detailed information about this topic, refer to the topic
"Define Scaling".
1.27 Define Label Layout

You have the possibility to store the info windows of the graphic together with
their number, position and contents. The settings of the learn mode are then at
your disposal in the repeat mode.
Activate in the section "Print mode" the function "Learn print

command".
Activate the function "Use current layout as #".

Confirm the proposed memory number.
Hint
A memory number 1 indicates that no layout has been defined so far, as
the memory numbers are incremented by 1 each.
Overwrite memory numbers
Open the list box "Use current layout as #" and select one of the already existing
memory numbers.
Loading of an label layout
VII-20
Activate the function "Load layout #".

Enter into the input field the memory number of the layout you wish
to load.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Not defining the label layout
Activate the function "Disregard labels".
The settings of the info windows of the learn mode are not taken on
by the repeat mode.
Do not use memory number 0. The biggest memory number is 65535.

The lable layout can only be defined for the element graphic and the
airfoil analysis graphic.
Close graphic window
Activate the option "Close window" if you want to have the graphic window closed
after the part program command has been executed in the repeat mode.
1.28 Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points

Via the "Recalculate Element from Memory" function it is possible to calculate
new elements out of contour points. For that the "Select Points from Contour"
function of the graphics of elements is available. By this, single points are not
marked and selected, but rather blocks of points.
The "Select Points from Contour" Window is displayed:
Select an element.
Click on the "Memory Recall" icon and confirm.
In the "Recalculate / Copy From Memory" window, you select the
contour out of whose contour points the element is supposed to be
recalculated. In addition, you select the view and confirm.
The "Select Points from Contour" window appears.
In the "Select Points From Contour" mode, single points are not marked and
selected. Now, you can mark and select blocks of points.
A block always has a start and an end point. Start points and end points are
labelled through little reticles. All points between the start and end mark are
selected and represented in red in the graphics. If you move a label, the points
are no longer displayed in red. The labels of the block are displayed in blue. In
the status line of the graphics of elements, the actual data of the point are
indicated under the moved label.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-21
Proceed as follows
Set a block
You set the labels by clicking on a point.
Connect two blocks

If you move a label (tag) of a block to the label of a second block,
both blocks are connected.
Delete a block
You click on a label with the right mouse button. The block is
deleted.
This point is the start label.

The end label is set where you release the mouse button again.
It is also possible to re-utilize and move a label that has already
been set with the mouse.
Further Buttons in the "Select Points from Contour" Window

With the "Select All" button, the whole contour is marked.
If you want to delete all blocks, click on this button.
If you this click on this button, you only delete one block. You always delete
at first the block that is next to the start point of the contour.
If you click on this button, an empty block is inserted. You can manually
input for example co-ordinates if you already know the exact values. Or you can
input e.g. variables. This function especially concerns a part program editor.
1.29 Compare Points

Task: With the comparison of points, you get an overview of the position
deviation of several elements. The elements can either be points, circles, ellipses
or spheres.
Program run
The elements are designated as actual elements and must be

completely filed in a sequence in the memory.
Input the nominal positions as theoretical nominal elements. These

must also be completely filed in a sequence in the memory. Nominal
elements must always be of the same type as the actual elements.
Click on "Compare Points" in the "Output" pull-down menu.

In the "Compare Points" dialogue window, you define the elements
to be compared and the number of the elements. In this dialogue,
you determine whether the actual points and the tolerance diameter
must be displayed in the graphics. Furthermore, you select here a
VII-22
scale factor or the

auto scale.
v 2.4
14.09.04
The "Compare Points" graphics window appears.
The graphics shows the largest and smallest distance of the

actual element(s) to the nominal element(s).
Furthermore, the text that youve input before in the dialogue
window is displayed.
Elements of the "Compare Points" Graphics Window
Toolbar
Toolbar in the "Compare Points" Graphics Window

Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
Rotate the graphic
Display Option
Top view (XY-plane, line of sight towards the Z-axis)
Side face
(YZ-plane, line of sight towards the X-axis)
Front view
(ZX-plane, line of sight towards the Y-axis)
3D view
Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon, you can store in
another window commands in the part program such as

"Print Window" and
"Close Window".
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-23
1.30 Parallelism Graphics

Task: For the parallelism of a projected line to a projected reference line, you can
also have a graphics display.
How to get displayed a parallelism graphics
Select the "Parallelism" in the "Tolerance" pull-down menu under

"Orientation" or
Click on the "Parallelism" tool for evaluation.
The "Parallelism" dialogue window appears. Here, you determine

the actual line and the reference line. Furthermore, you enter the
reference length, the projection plane and the width of tolerance.
A graphical display is not possible with a cylindrical width of

tolerance.
You can realize further settings for the parallelism if you click
the "Further Tolerance Options" button.
In the "Parallelism" window, you click on "Show Parallelism

Diagram".
Now, you can click the "Parallelism Diagram Settings" button

to realize further settings for the parallelism graphics. You can
change the scale in the "Parallelism Diagram Settings" window. You
determine whether the points in the graphic representation must be
connected.
Confirm your settings in the "Parallelism" window to indicate the

Parallelism Graphics.
Elements of the "Parallelism" Graphics Window
Toolbar
Toolbar
Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon, you can store in
another window commands in the part program such as
VII-24

"Print Window" and
"Close Window".
v 2.4
14.09.04
Hint
The parallelism is calculated out of the difference of the largest

distance minus the smallest distance to the reference line.
If the reference length has been selected shorter than the

measuring range of the line, only meas. points within the reference
length are calculated.
Exception: If the reference length = 0.0 had been entered, the

gauge length of the line is inserted.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VII-25
Tolerances
VIII Tolerances
Contents
1
Tolerances ........................................................................ 3
1.1
1.2
Tolerances: General .................................................................... 3

Maximum Material Condition (MMC) .......................................... 4
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
1.4
Tolerances in Detail..................................................................... 5
Straightness ................................................................................. 7
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.5
1.6
Definition ............................................................................................. 9
Graphical Representation ................................................................... 9
Scaling of Tolerance Graphics ................................................. 10
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.8
Definition ............................................................................................. 7
Graphical Representation ................................................................... 7
Flatness ........................................................................................ 8
Roundness ................................................................................... 9
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.7
Definition/Applicability ......................................................................... 4
The MMC in GEOPAK ........................................................................ 4
Roundness Scaling ........................................................................... 10

Straightness/Flatness Scaling........................................................... 11
Position ...................................................................................... 12
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
Definition ........................................................................................... 12
Examples .......................................................................................... 13
Position of Plane ............................................................................... 15
Position of Axis.................................................................................. 16
Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance ............................................. 19
1.9 Concentricity.............................................................................. 20
1.10 Coaxiality.................................................................................... 21
1.11 Parallelism.................................................................................. 22
1.11.1
1.11.2
1.11.3
1.11.4
1.11.5
Parallelism: Example......................................................................... 23
Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Axis ....................................... 24
Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Plane ..................................... 24
Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Axis ....................................... 24
Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Plane..................................... 24
1.12 Perpendicularity......................................................................... 25
1.12.1
1.12.2
1.12.3
1.12.4
Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Axis ............................... 25

Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Plane............................. 26
Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference axis................................ 26
Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Plane ............................ 26
1.13 Angularity................................................................................... 27
1.14 Symmetry Tolerances ............................................................... 28
1.14.1 Symmetry Tolerance Point Element.................................................. 28
1.14.2 Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element ................................................... 29
1.14.3 Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element................................................. 30
1.15 Runout Tolerance ...................................................................... 32

1.15.1 Axial Runout...................................................................................... 33
1.15.2 Circular Runout ................................................................................. 35
1.16 Tolerance Variable..................................................................... 35

14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-1
Tolerances
1.17 Tolerance Comparison "Last Element"................................... 36
1.18 Tolerance Comparison Element............................................... 36
1.18.1 "Tolerance Comparison Elements" Dialogue.................................... 36
1.18.2 Further Input Options ........................................................................ 37
1.19 Set Control Limits ..................................................................... 38
Contours ......................................................................... 39
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Contours: General..................................................................... 39
Pitch ........................................................................................... 40
Comparison (Vector Direction) ................................................ 42
Best Fit Contour ........................................................................ 43
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
Best Fit Contour: Definition and Criteria ........................................... 43

Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit....................................................... 44
Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor) ........................................... 45

Form Tolerance Contour .......................................................... 47
Tolerance Band Editor .............................................................. 48
Define Tolerance Band of a Contour ....................................... 49
Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour ........................................... 50
Filter Contour ............................................................................ 51
Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options............ 53

3.1
3.2
3.3
VIII-2
Nominal-Actual Comparison, e.g. "Element Circle"............... 53

Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison................... 54
Origin of Co-ordinate System .................................................. 55
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
Tolerances
1.1
Tolerances: General
Definition
GEOPAK allows you to carry out tolerance comparisons to DIN ISO R 1101
and 7684, taking into account the "Maximum Material Condition" (MMC; see
symbol above left).
The tolerance tables to DIN 16901, DIN 7168 and ISO R 286 are integrated
within our program, as a standard feature, to be used as a basis for calculation.
This means that, in addition to the nominal value, you have to enter the tolerance
field (type). The actual limits are displayed to you immediately.
There are further trade-specific tables, e.g. for wood or plastic processing
industries, you can create or use.
Furthermore, it is possible to stop the program run due to the results of the
tolerance comparison (see below).
Two tolerance characteristics

We differentiate between two tolerance characteristics.
Tolerances related to a single element only.
You can activate this first group by clicking on the button

"Tolerances" in the dialogues where these elements are defined.
It is possible that you use the symbol disposed in the tolerance
bar.
Still a further option is via the menu "Tolerances" and the
subsequent functions. "
Tolerances related to the position of two elements to each other.
This second group can be activated only via the tolerance bar.
For the various tolerances see under "Tolerances in Details".
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-3
Tolerances
1.2
Maximum Material Condition (MMC)
1.2.1
Definition/Applicability
The MMC allows to extend a given tolerance zone if
a shaft is out of its admissible maximum size, or
a bore is out of its admissible minimum size.
appears
According to ISO 8015, the MMC is to be applied where the
in the drawing. There exist, however, national standards (e.g. in the USA:
ANSI Y 14.5M) that differ from this regulation.
If the
stands on its own, the tolerance extension is taken only from
the element itself.
means that an additional extension can be taken from a
A further
different element. This is shown, by the way, with an additional letter,
e.g.
1.2.2
The MMC in GEOPAK
Case 1: The MMC is allowed only for the element

Continue as follows
VIII-4
Measure element
Activate
Tolerance diameter
Call position tolerance
If the tolerated element has no own diameter, a reference mark

must be selected in the following text box.
This would be the case with a point but not with a circle.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
Case 2: The MMC is allowed also for a reference element
Proceed as follows
Measure reference element
Via the symbol in the "Further Tolerance OptionsHTPC_MSGL_TOL_ELE_OPT" dialogue window, enter the
respective datum label (in most cases a single letter, such as A, B,
C ...).
Measure element
Activate
Activate
In the subsequent text box you select, via the arrow, the datum
label from the list.
1.3
Tolerance diameter of reference element
Tolerance diameter of element

Call position tolerance
Tolerances in Detail
Following is a breakdown of all tolerances. By mouse click you get to every single
topic.
Last Element: You tolerance directly the element that was last.
Element: You select the element in the dialogue window "Tolerance
Comparison Element".
Straightness:
Flatness:
Roundness:
Position:
Concentricity:
Coaxiality:
Parallelism:
Perpendicularity:
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-5
Tolerances
Angularity:
Symmetry Tolerance Point Element:
Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element:
Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element:
Simple Runout Tolerance:
Tolerance Comparison Contours:
In case MMC is allowed with the individual tolerances, please see for
details under "Maximum Material Condition".
VIII-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.4
Straightness
1.4.1
Definition
As far as straightness is concerned,
you can calculate it numerically, or
have its run shown graphically.
In any case, click on the symbol (left on top) and come to the
"Straightness" window.
Select the desired line under "Element".
The result is displayed in the result box.
Enter the admissible geometrical deviation in the "Tolerance Width"

text box.
Hint:
For theoretical lines, intersection lines, symmetry lines and lines
determined by two points only, geometrical deviation is not defined.
1.4.2
Graphical Representation
In the "Straightness" window, activate the symbol (on the left).
Via the symbol (on the left) the "Settings for the Straightness Graphics"
window is displayed. Here, you can select any setting other than the default.
For details refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.
Further Options
Via this symbol, you come to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance
Options".
Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see detailed
information under this topic).
Connection of Points
"Connection of Points", that's what you normally do. When probing manually,
however, the connecting lines may cause confusion, particularly when the points
have not been measured in correct order. It is recommended that you do away
with the connections.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-7
Tolerances
1.5
Flatness
Definition
As far as flatness is concerned...
have its run displayed in a graphic.
In any case, click on the symbol (left on top) and come to the
"Flatness" window.
Select the desired plane under "Element".
The result appears in the result box.
Enter the admissible geometrical deviation in the "Tolerance Width"

text box.
Hint: With theoretical planes, symmetry planes and planes determined by three
points only, geometrical deviation is not defined.
In the "Flatness" window, activate the symbol (on the left).
Via this symbol (on the left), you come to the window "Settings for the
flatness graphics". Here you can select any setting other than the default.
For details refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.
Further Options
Via this symbol, you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue
window.
Using this symbol, you control the functionality "Loops" (see details this
topic).
"Connection of Points", that's what you normally do. When probing manually,
however, the connecting lines may cause confusion, particularly when the points
have not been measured in the correct order. It is recommended that you do
away with the connections.
VIII-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.6
Roundness
1.6.1
Definition
As far as roundness is concerned,
have its run displayed graphically.
In any case, click on the symbol (top left) to get to the "Roundness"
window".
Select the required circle under "Element".
The result is displayed in the result box.
Enter the permissible geometrical deviation into the "Tolerance

Width" text box and click OK..
Hint: For theoretical circles, intersection circles, fitted-in circles and circles
determined by three points only, geometrical deviation is not defined.
1.6.2
Activate the symbol (on the left) in the "Roundness" window.
The symbol (on the left) leads you the window "Settings for Roundness
Graphics". Here you have three options to choose from:
Actual roundness scaling
Tolerance zone scaling
Nominal value with
Upper tolerance
Lower tolerance
For details, refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.
Further Options
This symbol leads you to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options".
Using this symbol you govern the "Loops" functionally (for details refer to
detailed information regarding this subject).
"Connecting points" is the normal case for you. When probing manually, the
connecting lines, however, may cause confusion, particularly when the points
have not been measured in correct order. We recommend that you do away with
the connections.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-9
Tolerances
1.7
1.7.1
Scaling of Tolerance Graphics

Roundness Scaling
The symbols (on the left) of the "Roundness"-dialogue window

enable graphical representation. As far as scaling is concerned, the "Settings for
Roundness" windows allows you to choose from three options.
Actual Roundness Scaling (Default Setting)
If you decide for this option, you can retrace the exact run of the circle in the
graphics (see FIG. below).
In this graphics, however, you do not see whether the points are located within
the tolerance width. This is caused in the present setup by the fact that the points
with minimum and maximum distance define the green field.
Hint
This is applicable accordingly to straightness, flatness, runout tolerances
and parallelism, too.
Consequently, the points are always located within the green field, even if
roundness does not comply with the specification. The roundness figures can be
seen from the result box, the protocol or from data output.
By clicking on the symbol (on the left) in the "Further Tolerance Options"
window = you can report the roundness figures to a statistics program. This
applies equally to the following options.
Tolerance Zone Scaling
Using this option you establish that the green field in fact agrees with the
tolerance zone. The width of this tolerance zone is already entered in the
"Roundness" window. In the graphics you can realise whether the circle is
located within the roundness tolerance (see FIG. below. You can see that the P1
and P40 values are the same as in the figure above for "Actual Roundness
Scaling".
Hint
This is applicable accordingly to straightness, flatness, runout tolerances
and parallelism, too.
VIII-10
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
With large or very small deviations, you may, under certain

circumstances, not be able to retrace the run of the form. In this case,
you should resort to the "Actual Roundness Scaling" function.
Nominal Value Scaling with Upper and Lower Tolerance
To find out whether the circle with its geometrical deviation is still within the
dimensional tolerance, you can perform the scaling operation using the nominal
value and the tolerance limits (Upper / Lower Tolerance). As a result, you see
here with this option, in addition to the figure above, a blue circle. This is the
nominal diameter circle.
The green field is defined by the nominal value and the upper and lower
tolerance you have entered.
It is possible (see FIG. above) that one or more points are located outside the
green field, roundness, however, is in line with the specification. This can be seen
from the result box, the protocol or from data output.
Hint
This is applicable accordingly to straightness and flatness, but not to
runout tolerances and parallelism.
1.7.2
Straightness/Flatness Scaling
Contrary to "Roundness Scaling", these two cases do not allow to check for
dimensional tolerance. You may, however, input an Upper and a Lower
Tolerance. The upper limit is the one located prior to the material, the other one is
located in the material.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-11
Tolerances
1.8
Position
1.8.1
Definition
Using the function "Position" you determine whether the positional deviation of a
point is still within tolerance.
You click on the symbol in the tolerance bar
In the next step

you select, via the symbols, the element type whose position must
be tolerated. You need to know that for points (e.g. piercing point
"Cylinder axis through plane") the material side is unknown and that
therefore the "Maximum Material Condition (MMC) can not be
applied directly.
The structure of the subsequent line is almost identical with the one
for the drawing entries. In addition, help bubbles explain the
individual symbols.
Your drawing tells you whether the tolerance zone is circular

or flat. If circular, you activate the symbol.
In the next text box you enter the width of your tolerance zone
or you make your last entries using the arrow.
If the use of MMCHTPC_MSGL_TOL_MMB is allowed, you

activate the symbol.
If the use of MMCHTPC_MSGL_TOL_MMB with a reference

is allowed , you activate the symbol.
For details about the principles of MMC, please refer to the
topic Maximum Material Condition.
VIII-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.8.2
Examples
Example 1
As an example we take the case of a "Point of intersection of cylinder axis and
plane".
You tolerate the cylinder diameter.
You assign a datum label to the cylinder diameter via the

dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options" .
Then you can apply the MMC in the dialogue window with respect to
position, concentricity and symmetry of the point of intersection. You
recognise this when the text field (Max. Material Condition Element)
is active.
Example 2
For this example we take the case of a "Cutting circle of cylinder jacket and
plane".
You tolerate the circle diameter.

Then you can apply the MMC in the dialogue window with respect to
the position, the concentricity and the symmetry of the point of
intersection, without necessity of an entry into a text field.
Example 3
For this example we take the case of a "Position of a symmetry line in a groove".
You tolerate the groove width as the distance.
You assign a datum label to the groove width via the dialogue
window "Further Tolerance Options".
Then you can apply the MMC in the following dialogue window with
regard to the "Position axis element", parallelism etc. of the
symmetry line. You recognise this by an active text field (Max.
Material Condition Element).
In case of a flat tolerance zone the symbol is not activated - you can
input only one co-ordinate.
In case of a circular tolerance zone (the symbol is activated)...
first select the plane where the tolerance zone is located, and ...
Choose the type of co-ordinate system using the known symbols.
14.09.04
then the co-ordinates of the location.

In this case, you can enter the nominal position either in the
cartesian or the polar system.
v 2.4
VIII-13
Tolerances
Take over the actual value
In the left near the coordinate buttons you find an element button. By a click
on this button you can take over the value of the element that you want to
tolerate.
In case of a spatial tolerance zone (symbol on the left is activated), enter
three co-ordinates. To determine the type of co-ordinate system, use the symbols
(picture below, left-hand column).
In case of polar co-ordinates, you can, in addition, determine your working plane
using the symbols (picture above, right-hand column). The help bubbles provide
you with additional information.
Further Options
Options".
Click on the symbol left to find detailed information about the topic
"Determine Position Tolerance" with the option "Calculate absolute".
VIII-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.8.3
Position of Plane
You can only realize a tolerance of the position of a plane that is
approximately parallel to one of the base planes.
You get the function via the Tolerance menu. In the following dialogue window
select the plane in which you want to realize a tolerance and

enter the width of tolerance.
Next, you decide in which tolerance direction (main direction and in

parallel to which base plane) the tolerance range extends to. Enter the nominal
position of the plane in the text field X, Y or Z.
Further proceeding depends on whether your tolerance zone is round or
rectangular.
Rectangular Tolerance Zone
In this case, enter the co-ordinates of the left lower and the right upper
edge.
Round Tolerance Zone
In this case, enter the co-ordinates of the centre and the diameter of the
tolerance zone.
Via the icons (see left), it is possible to select whether you enter
Cartesian or polar co-ordinates.
For more details, see also the topics
"MMC" and
"Further Tolerance Options".
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-15
Tolerances
1.8.4
Position of Axis
You can only realize a tolerance of the position of an axis element that is
approximately parallel to one of the principal axes.
You get the function via the tolerance menu. In the following dialogue window
first, you decide whether the actual element is a line, a cone or a

cylinder.
You can display the elements in the list.
The further parameters depend on whether you have a round or plane tolerance
zone.
Round Tolerance Zone: The example of a bore of which the axis runs
approximately parallel to the Z-axis, you look on the axis from top (see picture
below).
1 = Tolerance diameter
First, select the X/Y plane and then enter the X and Y co-ordinates.
VIII-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
Finally, enter the co-ordinates of start and end point (see picture below).
1 = start point
2 = end point
If you select another plane, proceed in a similar fashion.

Plane Tolerance Zone: By means of the example of a line in the X/Y plane that
runs approximately parallel to the X-axis we explain, which parameters to enter
(see picture below).
1 = start point
2 = end point
3 = Width of tolerance in error direction
The position of the axis is indicated through the Y value.
The error direction is the Y direction, too.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-17
Tolerances
Therefore, for this example, select under Print Preview (patch of a

surface) as error direction the Y-axis in the X/Y plane.
In the text field, enter the nominal of the position of the line.
If you select another error direction, proceed in a similar fashion.
In our example, enter the X values for the start respectively the end
point.
For more details, see also the topics "Max. Material Condition(MMC)" and
"Further Tolerance Options".
Click on the symbol left to find detailed information about the topic
"Determine Position Tolerance" with the option "Calculate absolute".
VIII-18
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.8.5
Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance
For the position tolerances you can use the option "Calculate absolute" in
certain cases to simplify the input of the nominal co-ordinates.
The illustration below shows four bores (cylinders in top view and the points of
intersection of the cylinder axes with the plane). The nominal co-ordinates differ
only in the signs. This hole pattern has two symmetry axes (X- and Y-axis).
You can either tolerate
the position of the points or
the position of the cylinder axes.
In both cases you can enter the same nominal co-ordinates with the option
"Calculate absolute" for all four bores, i.e. absolute (x = 6.0 and y = 4.0). This is
useful for the loop repetitions.
For the position of an axis, as compared to the position of a circle, you

additionally enter start and end point. When calculating the position tolerance,
their signs remain valid also when carrying out an absolute calculation.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-19
Tolerances
1.9
Concentricity
Definition
With the function "Concentricity" you check whether the location of the centre of a
circle agrees with the location of a reference circle (centre of circle).
Proceed as follows:
In the first step, using the symbols, select the

element of which position must be toleranced.
Hint
For points (e.g. piercing point "Cylinder Axis through Plane") the
material side is unknown and therefore
MMCHTPC_MSGL_TOL_MMB cannot be directly used.
Click in the tolerance bar on the symbol (on the left) and the
"Concentricity" dialogue window appears. The structure of the top
line (below the header) follows roughly the one for the drawing
entries. In addition, help bubbles explain the individual symbols.
In the first text box, enter the diameter tolerance zone.
Example of a solution
For this purpose, we take the case "Cylinder Axis through Plane".
You tolerance the diameter of the cylinder.
Via the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window, allocate

a datum label to the cylinder diameter.
In the "Concentricity" dialogue window, you can then use MMC also
with the "Point" element. This is shown by the fact that the centre
text box in the top line is active.
With the elements circle, ellipse and sphere, the first

relates to the element
itself. This is why the input of a datum label is not required.
As for the rest, you proceed as described under the topic "Maximum Condition".
Further Options
Options".
VIII-20
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.10 Coaxiality
Definition
With the "Coaxiality" function, check the position of two axes to each other. It is
important for the input that the axes are approximately parallel to a main axis of
the co-ordinate system.
Proceed as described in detail of the topic "Concentricity" and

"Maximum Material Condition".
Click in the tolerance bar on the symbol (on the left) and
come to the "Coaxiality" dialogue window. The structure of this line
roughly follows the one for the drawing entries. In addition, help
bubbles explain the individual symbols.
Hint
As start or end point enter one co-ordinate, each of the range of which
checking must be performed (see picture below).
This is what applies for our example (the reference axis shows as the Z axis
upwards):
Start point
=0
End point
=5
The direction of the reference axis influences the signification of start

and end point.
If the reference axis, opposite to the Z axis shows downwards, the following input
is correct:
Start point
= -5
End point
= 0
Further Options
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-21
Tolerances
window.
Using this symbol, you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this
topic).
1.11 Parallelism
With the function parallelism you check the location of two axes to each other. It
is important for the input of the reference lengths that the axes or planes are
approximately parallel relative to a main axis of the co-ordinate system.
In the tolerance bar you click on the symbol (on the left) and come to the
"Parallelism" dialogue window.
First, you have to select your actual and your reference element. The subsequent
inputs depend on these elements. Thus, we differentiate between four initial
situations:
The parallelism of an axis relative to a reference axis

The parallelism of an axis relative to a reference plane
The parallelism of a plane relative to reference axis
The parallelism of a plane relative to a reference plane
For the four cases, proceed as follows:
First, select your actual or reference element in the window

"Parallelism".
The next line is adapted to suit for the drawing entry. Here, in this
line you enter the figures from your drawings.
If MMC is allowed, see details under "Maximum Material Condition".
By a mouse click on this topic, you obtain the latest information about each of the
four initial situations.
If the actual element is a measured line, you can have parallelism also
graphically displayed. The procedure is similar to the one described in detail of
topic Parallelism Graphics.
You inform yourself about this theme with click on Parallelism: Example .
Further Options
window.
Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this
topic).
VIII-22
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.11.1
Parallelism: Example
For the parallelism of a line with a reference line, the system also provides a
graphic.
The following example in the illustration below shows the parallelism of the line
(3) to the reference line (2) as a reference. The graphic clarifies the way of
calculation:
In addition to the measurement points P1 to P4 of the tolerated line (line 3), two
additional points P5 and P6 are generated that have been calculated at the
distance of the input reference length on the line (line 3).
The parallelism results from the difference between biggest and smallest distance
to the reference line. If the selected value of the reference length is shorter than
the measurement range of the line, only the measurement points positioned
within the reference length are included in the calculation.
Exception:
If the input for the reference length is 0.0, the reference length is inserted for the
measurement length of the line.
These results are included in the graphic which is also
available in form of a printout:
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-23
Tolerances
1.11.2
Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Axis
The tolerance symbol (on the left) appearing on a drawing

indicates that the tolerance zone concerned is a circular one. You
click the symbol in the dialogue window.
In the following text box, there appears the width of the tolerance
zone.
If MMC is allowed, details can be seen under "Maximum Material

Condition".
If the tolerance zone is flat, you have to enter additionally the

drawing level where it is defined.
Finally you must enter over which length parallelism has to be maintained
(reference length).
1.11.3
Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Plane
(reference length).
1.11.4
Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Axis
(reference length).
1.11.5
Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Plane
Hint (applies to rectangular tolerance zone only)

For the input of the reference lengths, it is important that the two planes are
approximately parallel to any of the base planes, the reason for this being that
the reference lengths can only be entered parallel to the co-ordinate axes.
VIII-24
To complete the previous steps (for details cf. "Parallelism" and

MMC) additionally enter which length parallelism has to be
maintained (reference length).
With the diameter symbol not activated (on the left), enter the
diameter of the range which must be toleranced.
With the diameter symbol activated, select the axis along which
parallelism must be maintained, and ...
enter the reference lengths in the other two axes.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.12 Perpendicularity
With the perpendicularity function, check the location of two axes relative to each
other. It is important for the input of the reference lengths that the axes or planes
are approximately parallel relative to a main axis of the co-ordinate system.
In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol (on the left) and the
"Perpendicularity" dialogue window is displayed.
First, you have to select your actual and your reference element. The subsequent
inputs depend on these elements. Thus, we differentiate between four initial
situations:
Perpendicularity of an axis to a reference axis

Perpendicularity of an axis to a reference plane
Perpendicularity of a plane to a reference axis
Perpendicularity of a plane to a reference plane
In the four cases, proceed as follows:
First, select your actual or reference element in the

"Perpendicularity" window.
The next line is adapted to suit for drawing inputs. Here, you enter
the figures of your drawings.
If MMC is allowed, refer to details of topic "Maximum Material

Condition".
By a mouse click on this topic, you obtain the latest information about each of the
four initial situations.
Further Options
window.
topic).
1.12.1 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Axis

Since the tolerance zone is flat, you must show, in addition, in which
drawing level it is defined.
14.09.04
Finally, you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be

v 2.4
VIII-25
Tolerances
1.12.2
Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Plane
The presence of the diameter symbol (on the left) in the

drawing indicates to a circular tolerance zone. Click the symbol in
the dialogue window.
The next text box shows the width of the tolerance zone.
If MMC is allowed, refer to details of topic "Maximum Material

Condition".
If the tolerance zone is flat, you must show, in addition, in which

drawing level it is defined.
Finally, you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be

1.12.3
Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference axis
Hint (applies to rectangular tolerance zone only)

For the input of the reference lengths it is important that the plane is more or less
parallel to any of the base planes, the reason for this being that the reference
lengths can only be entered parallel to the co-ordinate axes.
To complete the previous steps (for details cf. Perpendicularity) you

additionally enter over which length perpendicularity has to be
In case the symbol (on the left) is activated, enter the

diameter of the area to be toleranced.
In case the symbol is not activated, select the axis along which
perpendicularity has to be maintained, and ...
enter the reference lengths for the other two axes.
1.12.4
Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Plane
Finally, you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be maintained
(reference length).
VIII-26
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.13 Angularity
Definition
With the angularity function, check the location of an
Axis relative to an axis,
Axis relative to a plane,
Plane relative to an axis,
Plane relative to a plane.
Proceed as follows
In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol (on the left) and
come to the "Angularity" dialogue window.
First, select your respective actual and reference

element.
In the line below, enter the width of your tolerance zone.
If MMC is allowed, refer to "Maximum Material Condition" for more details.
In the bottom text boxes, enter nominal angle and reference lengths.
If your actual element features an axis (cylinder, cone

or line) you have to click the drawing level where the angle must be
maintained.
Further Options
window.
By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this
topic).
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-27
Tolerances
1.14 Symmetry Tolerances

1.14.1
Symmetry Tolerance Point Element
With this function you check the location of an element relative to a symmetry
element. Prior to realize the tolerance check itself, you must
measure the two elements and use them to calculate ...
the symmetry element. This, in turn, becomes the reference

element.
Proceed as follows
come to the "Symmetry Tolerance Point-Element" dialogue window.
By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window, select
your actual and reference element.
If the reference element is only point-based unlike a line or a

plane - you still have to preselect the direction along which deviation
must be calculated. (Symbols "Projection" de-activated, symbols
"Tolerance Direction" activated).
If the symmetry location is given by an axis, the projection plane

where deviation is must be calculated.
If the symmetry location is given by a plane, deviation will be

automatically calculated perpendicularly to this plane.
The value determined is double the deviation from this location.

According to your drawing, you also have to input, in addition to the above, the
tolerance width. For details concerning MMC cf. Maximum Material Condition.
Further Options
window.
topic).
VIII-28
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.14.2
Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element
With this function, check the location of an element relative to a symmetry

element. Prior to performing the tolerance check itself, you must...
measure the two elements and use them to calculate ...
the symmetry element. This, in turn, becomes the reference

element.
Proceed as follows
come to the "Symmetry Tolerance Axis-Element" dialogue window.
By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window, select
your actual and reference element.
If the reference element is point-based, deviation will be calculated

only at this point. It is not necessary to enter start and end points.
If the reference element is an axis, the start and end point for the
actual element must still be entered. If possible, the actual element
should be parallel to one of the co-ordinate axes. Start and end
point correspond to the co-ordinates in this axis. For comparison
see also the topic Coaxiality.
According to your drawing, you also have to input, in addition to the above, the
tolerance width. For details concerning MMC, refer to Maximum Material
Condition .
Further Options
Via this symbol, the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window is
displayed.
topic).
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-29
Tolerances
1.14.3
Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element
With this function, check the location of an actual element relative to a symmetry
element. Before realizing the tolerance check, you must ...
measure the two elements and use them ...
to calculate the symmetry element. This, in turn, becomes the

reference element.
If possible, the planes should be paraxial in order to enter in a

reasonable way the reference lengths and the toleranced direction.
Proceed as follows
In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol, and the "Symmetry

Tolerance Plane-Element" dialogue window appears.
By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window you
select your reference element.
If the reference element is a point, the position comparison is

carried out only at this point. Therefore, no further data is required.
If the reference element is an axis, you must enter, in addition, the

start and end point of the area to be measured (for details
concerning this topic refer to Coaxiality).
If the reference element is a plane, you have to
VIII-30
input the direction ...

and, for the other axes, the corner points of the area (see
picture below; the toleranced direction is the Z-axis).
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
X1 = Start X
X2 = End X
Y1 = Start Y
Y2 = End Y
According to your drawing, you have to input, in addition to the above, the
tolerance width. For details concerning MMC, refer to Maximum MaterialCondition .
Further Options
window.
topic).
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-31
Tolerances
1.15 Runout Tolerance

With the "Runout Tolerance" function, check both the radial and axial runout of
your workpiece.
First, you have to define the axis of rotation. This can be the axis of
a cone or a cylinder, or an axis that has been defined as a
connection line through several circle centres.
In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol and come to the

"Runout Tolerance" dialogue window.
Now, you must differentiate between a

axial runout you measure a plane - or a
radial runout. This involves the measurement of a circle or a
cylinder.
Hint:
For further details, refer to the subject Axial Runout.
If you have measured a cylinder your result will be equal to the
total radial runout.
For this purpose, optionally click on one of these symbols.

Depending on your selection, find the following elements in the list.
By a mouse-click on one of these elements (on the

left), select as reference element the element that determines your
axis of rotation.
Enter the admissible tolerance range in the bottom tolerance box.

Hint:
For the axial runout, you additionally need the diameter of the shaft
(reference diameter) whose surface you have measured.
Using the symbols you can have the radial and axial runouts also in a
graphics.
For details refer to the topics
"Roundness"Flatness"
"Scaling of Tolerance Graphics"
Further Options
window.
topic).
VIII-32
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.15.1
Axial Runout
As far as axial runout is concerned, one distinguishes, as a rule of principle,

between "Simple Axial Runout" and "Total Axial Runout". The reason for this is
that for the limitation of a plane you have to enter a reference diameter in addition
to the rotational axis.
Simple Axial Runout
For Simple Axial Runout, a plane is defined by points located on a circular path
(circle made up of red dots in the line drawing below). This circular path should
be located centrally around the reference axis. Consequently, the reference
diameter (in red) is the diameter of this circular path. It is not the cylinder
diameter.
In the present case, the two points P13 and P14

are not measured points. Determined by GEOPAK,
they define the axial runout since they represent
the maximum deviations.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-33
Tolerances
Total Axial Runout
For Total Axial Runout, a plane is established by points which can be located on
several circular paths. For example, the whole end face of a cylinder can be
captured this way. To capture the edge of the end face as well, you have to enter
the reference diameter which is, in our example below, the diameter of the
cylinder.
In this case, the points P25 and P26 are not measured points. Determined by
GEOPAK, they define the axial runout since they represent the maximum
deviations.
Hint
For axial runout calculation, all measurement points are used, no matter
which reference diameter has been entered..
VIII-34
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
1.15.2
Circular Runout
A circular runout calculation in GEOPAK does not only include the measurement
points of a circle but also two additional points which are positioned on the
circumference of the calculated circle, because a situation may occur in which the
measurement points are all positioned inside a pre-defined tolerance zone, but
not the whole circle.
Although the example illustration below is not representative for a circular runout
measurement, the number of measurement points = 4 is quite usual. The
measurement points on the horizontal and on the vertical axis are still within the
tolerance range. Nevertheless, the tolerated circle does not meet the required
circular runout, because both points on the bisector of the angle are outside the
tolerance range. Although they were not measured, they belong to the calculated
circle.
Diameter and position of the calculated

circle also depend on the selected
mode of calculation.
1.16 Tolerance Variable

You can also realize a nominal-to-actual comparison of calculated values. You
come to the function and the dialogue via the menu bar "Tolerance / Variable...".
In addition, by clicking on the symbol in the following dialogue, you have all
other possibilities of the nominal-to-actual comparison e.g. the transmission to
STATPAK, etc. (see details of Further Tolerance Options).
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-35
Tolerances
1.17 Tolerance Comparison "Last Element"

This function usually deals with a nominal-to-actual comparison as in GEOPAK-3;
but you can, in this case and independently to the type, access the last measured
element.
To this subject, also see details under Tolerance Comparison Elements
Dialogue".
1.18 Tolerance Comparison Element

In this dialogue, you click on the element, of which you want to have a nominalto-actual comparison. Confirm and the dialogue for example "Tolerance
Comparison Element Cylinder" will appear. If you have measured several
elements of one type, the proposal in the dialogue has always reference to the
last measured element of the selected type.
To this subject, also see details under Tolerance Comparison Elements
Dialogue".
1.18.1
"Tolerance Comparison Elements" Dialogue
With this nominal-to-actual comparison, it is possible to check all element

characteristics (position, direction, size, form) in only one dialogue. According to
element type, the dialogue windows are, in part, differently constructed.
The dialogue will appear for example
via the menu bar "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison Elements /

Last Element or Element". Finally, if you click only on the "Element",
you can choose in the following window the type of element, for
which you want to realize a nominal-to-actual comparison (see in
addition details under "Tolerance Comparison Element".
However, you can also click on the symbol in the element

window. After the measurement, the dialogue automatically opens.
Via the symbol you select, which characteristic you want to

check in this dialogue.
Absolute Values
If, for the co-ordinates, you are only interested in the absolute value and not
in the sign, click on the symbol.
VIII-36
v 2.4
14.09.04
Tolerances
Tolerance Class
or some values, you have the possibility instead of entering upper and
lower tolerance limits, to input a tolerance class. Then, GEOPAK calculates out of
nominal value and tolerance class the corresponding limit values and displays
them in the inactive text boxes.
In the tolerance classes, pay attention to the use of capitalization and
small letters.
Instead of using the given tolerance classes, you can create your own
characteristic tables. A helper program will be delivered during installation.
Polar Co-Ordinates
For the position of an element, you can select in the dialogue whether you
want a Cartesian or a polar evaluation (see symbols in the dialogue, bottom left).
In the cylinder co-ordinates, at first, you get the radius in the XY plane. If you
want the analysis in another plane, click several times on the symbol.
With the spherical co-ordinates, at first, you get the Phi angle in the XY
plane and the Theta angle to the Z-axis. If you want the analysis in another
plane, click several times on the symbol.
1.18.2
Further Input Options
For round elements you can, in addition, determine via the symbols
whether you want to input the diameter or the radius.
During the learn mode of GEOPAK you can click on the respective icon of
the element (e.g. line on the top left of the dialogue box) to accept the measured
actual values in the "Nominal Value" column as proposal. The actual values are
rounded up to one digit after the comma, for the unit "Inch" to two digits after the
comma. In the GEOPAK editor the values are set to 0.00.
Options
For the form of some elements, you can also have a graphic chart. Settings
for this graphic
By clicking on the symbol, you can realize different settings to the graphic
in the following window.
Via the symbol, you get further options e.g. the transmission to STATPAK,
the possibility to cancel etc. (also see details under Further Tolerance Options).
topic).
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-37
Tolerances
Position
If you click on one of the symbols you can currently switch over from
"Tolerance single co-ordinates" to
"Tolerance Position" and vice versa.
You can only use this option if the elements can be tolerated with "position
tolerance" (e.g. you can't use the element line).
About "Tolerance Position" you inform yourself with a click on the topic.
1.19 Set Control Limits

With this function (menu bar "Tolerances / Set Control Limits ..."), you can prompt
a warning already before arriving at the tolerance limit. The control limit is a
single value is and is indicated in percent of the tolerance zone. If an actual value
is outside of the control limits - however within the tolerance the following
happens:
VIII-38
The value is represented in another colour as red or green in the

result field as well as in the protocol.
With the corresponding setting of the format, the feature is printed

out, respectively is written into the output file. Significant are the four
dialogues "File Format Specification", "Change File Output Format",
"Print Format Specification", "Change Print Format"). You come to
these dialogues via the menu bar "Printout.
A definite IO-condition will be set (see details in the "io_con_e. pdf"

respectively "io_con_g.pdf" document on our Homepage or on your
MCOSMOS-CD).
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
Contours
2.1
Contours: General
With the "Tolerance Comparison Contours" function, check the geometrical

deviation of an actual contour from a nominal contour. Nominal and actual
contour must be stored in the GEOPAK working memory before the comparison
itself is realized. Moreover, the contours must be available in the same projection.
As a rule, the nominal contour is provided by a CAD system.
Tolerance Comparison Contours
Clicking on the symbol in the icon bar, you come to the

"Tolerance Comparison Contours" dialogue window.
In the text boxes, "Nominal" and "Actual", select from the lists
your contours which are, in fact, already available. The nominal
contour can already be a measured contour (for details cf. Load
Contour). Or load your contour from an external CAD system (for
further details regarding this topic cf. "Load Contour from CAD
System").
Enter into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a "1", if not
already proposed.
Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs

If you want to execute tolerance comparisons with multiple contour pairs, enter
into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a number bigger than "1".
If you want to compare, for example, three nominal contours with three actual
contours, then enter into the input field "Number of nom/act pairs" a "3".
Similar to the loop mode, the memory numbers are counted upwards and the
memory number of the selected contours is used as the start number
According to the input example, the following pairs are created.
Pair 1: (4)act1 / (1)nom1
In order that the tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs can be
executed, all contours must be existing with the relevant memory
numbers. Furthermore, all used contours must be positioned in the
same projection plane.
Your further action is divided into the following sections
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-39
Contours
Pitch
Comparison (Vector Direction)
Best Fit
Tolerance Width
topic).
2.2
Pitch
By making inputs in "Pitch"...
you first of all define the points from where measurement must take
place;
in the next step, by Vector Direction, enter the direction along which
the distance from the opposite contour is measured.
The pitch specifies the distance where the individual comparisons are carried out.
The points at which the nominal and actual comparison is carried out are, in most
cases, not identical with the contour points of the actual respectively the nominal
contour points. This is why they are interpolated (cubic curve). This means that
even the areas between the points are calculated. According to your task, you will
opt for one out of six "pitches".
Constant pitch: Uniform distance on the nominal contour.
Comparison only at nominal points: A comparison is realized at each
point of the nominal contour.
Comparison only at actual points: A comparison is carried out at each
point of the actual contour.
VIII-40
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
Hint
This form is not recommended, as it takes a great deal of time. It is because of
the vector direction that the program has to calculate the point through which the
perpendicular goes to the actual point (see picture below).
1 = Actual contour
2 = Nominal contour
Constant angular pitch: The comparison takes place in a constant angular

pitch relative to the co-ordinate system origin.
Constant pitch (1st co-ordinate): Here, use a uniform distance on the
nominal contour, to be more exact, in the 1st co-ordinate
Example
In the ZX projection, you obtain a uniform distance in the Z-component with this
setting.
Constant pitch (2nd co-ordinate): Here, use a uniform distance on the
nominal contour, to be more exact, in the 2nd co-ordinate
Example
In the ZX projection, you obtain a uniform in the X component with this setting.
Except for nominal and actual points, enter a constant value in the
respective text box below the symbols.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-41
Contours
2.3
Comparison (Vector Direction)
Between nominal and actual distance is calculated. Four possibilities are

available (see below). The most frequent application is the "Comparison
Perpendicular to Nominal Contour". This is the comparison that Mitutoyo offers in
the default.
Comparison perpendicular to nominal contour: A perpendicular on the
contour is formed using the comparison point.
Comparison through origin: A line through the origin of the co-ordinate
system is using the comparison point.
Comparison along first axis: This comparison makes available the
following possibilities:
YZ-Contour parallel to Y-axis

ZX-Contour parallel to Z-axis
XY-Contour parallel to X-axis
RZ-Contour parallel to R-axis (radial plane of section)
Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Phi-axis (completed representation)
Comparison along first axis: This comparison makes available the

following possibilities:
YZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis

ZX-Contour parallel to X-axis
XY-Contour parallel to Y-axis
RZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis
Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Z-axis
Circles between nominal and actual contour: A perpendicular to the

nominal contour is created through the reference point. Then, the biggest
possible circle is created with its centre located on the perpendicular. The circle
diameter is then limited by two contour points.
VIII-42
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
Hint
In certain cases, the circle centre may leave the perpendicular in order to
allow the creation of a bigger circle. In this case, three contour points limit
the expansion of the circle (see ill. below).
2.4
Best Fit Contour
2.4.1
Best Fit Contour: Definition and Criteria
The best fit function rotates and shifts a set of co-ordinate values (points of the
actual contour) in such a way that it fits "best" into another group of given coordinates (points of the nominal contour).
The best fit follows the Gaussian criterion requiring that the sum of
the distance squares is minimal.
This means that the distances of the actual points are calculated
from their respective nominal values, and then are squared and
summed. The "best" location is reached when this sum is as small
as possible.
The best fit is based on the nominal-actual comparison. Should the latter
not be possible, the best fit is possible neither.
For more information, refer to the topic Degree of Freedom for Best Fit.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-43
Contours
2.4.2
Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit
Generally, the actual values can be rotated and shifted as you want. Thus, you
can achieve the best result. For this, operate the functions
"Horizontal",
"Vertical",
"Rotate".
Click either on one of the three symbols, or on two or even all three symbols. The
best fit will be automatically made. The result can be seen from the graphical
representation.
If only one rotation is allowed, said rotation is carried out around the origin of the
actual co-ordinate system.
The results are graphically and numerically shown in the "Tolerance Comparison
Contours" window. Here, you see the abbreviations where UD is Upper
Difference; LD = Lower Difference; MD = Mean Difference). In addition to the
above, via various symbols in this window, you have following possibility
In particular via the information symbol, you have the possibility to set
information flags.
Click on the symbol
The mouse changes to a reticle.
Click on the position in the graphics where you want to set the
information or flag.
With a further click on the flag (keep the mouse button pressed) you
can drag the flag to a different position.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the flag, you can, among
other things, delete the flag.
Using the "Learnable Graphic Commands" symbol, you can preset that the
windows are printed out or applied in the repeat mode. You must activate this
function already in the single mode, since, being in the repeat mode, you will
have no more influence.
VIII-44
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
2.5
Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor)
Definition
An enlarged scale is used to visualize the deviations of the actual contour from
the nominal one. Consequently, the deviations are displayed in a scale larger
than the scale used for watching the nominal contour.
The upper, the lower tolerance and the tolerance width determine
the scale.
The difference from upper and lower tolerance is related to the
length of the nominal contour.
Three examples
Example 1: The nominal contour is 1000mm and the difference from upper and
lower tolerance is 0.1 mm. If, in this case, you take a tolerance width of 5 %, this
will yield a scale factor of 500.
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would be equal to about 10 mm.
lower tolerance is 0.1 mm. If you take in this case a tolerance width of 5 %, this
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would also be equal to about 10 mm.
lower tolerance is 0.02 mm. If, in this case, you take a tolerance width of 2 %, this
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would be equal to about 4mm.
With regard to tolerances the lower tolerance is, as a rule, in the material,
the upper tolerance is outside.
Offset
An overmeasure contour around the nominal contour is created with the offset.
Then, the calculated deviations no longer refer to the nominal contour but to the
overmeasure contour. The reference direction is not influenced by the offset.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-45
Contours
Example:
A slot is limited by inside and outside contour. The distance between the contours
(i.e. the slot width) is 52 mm. The tolerance comparison shall be used to examine
the deviation of the slot width from the nominal measurement 52 mm +-0.025
mm.
The inside contour serves as the nominal contour, the outside contour as the
actual contour.
When carrying out the comparison with an offset (overmeasure) e.g. of 52 mm
and a tolerance of +-0.025 mm, a significant deviation is visible.
Compared with that, no deviation is visible in the graphic when applying the
onesided tolerance of 51.998 mm and 52.032 mm.
The result of the numerical evaluation shows no difference between the two
processes.
VIII-46
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
2.6
Form Tolerance Contour
The form tolerance of a measured contour to a reference contour is determined

according to DIN 7184 in connection with DIN ISO 1101 as follows:
First, the maximum deviation between both contours is determined

(see in the illustration below the radius of the red circle as a dotted
line).
This radius amount is doubled (diameter of circle).
The value of the diameter includes all deviations when the centre of
the circle is moved on the reference contour.
Reference contour (black)

Nominal contour (green)
Ideal circle (blue; part of the constructional drawing)
Circle with biggest deviation (red)
Use the function "Line form tolerance" to calculate this value.

Determine line form tolerance
A prerequisite for this function is that you are already using contours
in your part program.
Load a measured contour (nominal contour).

Load an ideal contour (reference contour).
Use the symbol "Loop counter" to control the functionality "Loops" (for
detailed information, refer to this topic).
The symbol "Further tolerance options" offers further possibilities, for
example, how to perform transfers to STATPAK or how to abort a part program
when the measurement results are outside the tolerance limits, etc. (for more
details, also refer to the topic Further Tolerance Options).
If you activate this symbol you can have a form tolerance chart displayed.
Enter the value of the tolerance limit into the input field "Tolerance width".
Best fit
The best fit is carried out prior to the evaluation of the line form tolerance. The
best fit position of the contour is calculated only temporarily and is not stored. For
details, refer to the topic Best Fit Contour.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-47
Contours
2.7
Tolerance Band Editor
The tolerance band editor makes it possible to specify various widths of tolerance
ranges within a nominal contour.
Every contour point can be assigned a lower and upper tolerance limit, which can
be stored in the GWS file. In case a contour nominal-to-actual comparison is
performed, the measured contour can be compared to the nominal contour and
its tolerance limits.
The tolerance band editor can be called only in the learn mode.
Define tolerance range of a nominal contour
Load a nominal contour.
Select a nominal contour.
The Tolerance band dialogue is shown.
Define the contour tolerance range.
Click in the menu bar on "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison

Elements / Tolerance Band Editor".
For details refer to the topic "Define Tolerance Band of a Contour" and "Edit
Tolerance Band of a Contour".
VIII-48
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
2.8
Define Tolerance Band of a Contour
Define uniform tolerance range

Your intention is to define a uniform tolerance range, i.e. all contour points have
the same upper and lower tolerance limit.
Click on the "Constant Distribution" symbol.

Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the area "Start of Tolerance
Range".
Now no entries are possible in the "End of Tolerance Range" area.
Mark tolerance range
Use the mouse cursor to mark the contour point where the tolerance
range is to start.
Press the left mouse button.
A blue cross is shown.
Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the mouse pointer to
the contour point where the tolerance range is to end.
While dragging with the mouse, a second blue cross is shown.
Release the mouse button at the end of the tolerance range to be

defined.
The defined tolerance range is shown marked with a red frame in

the graphics of elements.
Define proportional tolerance range

You wish to define a tolerance range having a tolerance range start width and a
tolerance range end width. This means: the tolerance width continues changing
from the tolerance range start to the tolerance range end.
Click on the "Proportional Distribution" symbol.
Now it is possible to make entries in the areas "Start of Tolerance

Range" and "End of Tolerance Range".
Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the areas "Start of Tolerance
Range" and "End of Tolerance Range".
Continue as described under "Mark Tolerance Range".
For further information on this topic refer to

Tolerance Band Editor and
Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-49
Contours
2.9
Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour
Relate tolerance range to the whole contour

Click on the selection symbol in order to relate the entries from the areas
"Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range" to the whole contour.
Delete defined tolerance ranges of the whole contour
Click on the dust bin symbol to delete your tolerance ranges of the whole
contour.
Enter tolerance limits using the mouse
Click on the pipette symbol to take the tolerance ranges by means of the
mouse into the input boxes of the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of
Tolerance Range".
Click with the mouse cursor on a contour point within a tolerance

range.
Once the "Proportional Distribution" symbol is activated, the

upper and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered into all
input boxes.
Once the "Constant Distribution" symbol is activated, the upper

and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered only into the
input boxes of the area "Start of Tolerance Range".
Once you have entered the required values, press again the pipette
symbol in order to switch this function off. Should you click, by mistake,
into the graphics of elements, the values entered would be changed.
Show all elements in the graphics of elements
While defining a tolerance band of a contour, only the current contour is
shown enlarged in the graphics of elements. If you wish to watch all elements,
click on the symbol "Show Elements in Background".
For further information on this topic refer to
Tolerance Band Editor and
Define Tolerance Band of a Contour.
VIII-50
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
2.10 Filter Contour

Regular Contours
When filtering a contour (menu bar "Contour / Filter Contour") in GEOPAK, a
smoothing effect is realized. We offer you a Gauss low-pass filter where the high
frequency parts will be suppressed. Depending on application, you should
distinguish:
For round contours, you should use the Gauss Filter / Circle, for
oblong contours, the filter via the line.
When using the Gauss-filter, you must in any case enter the
"Run in / run out"-value.
Select the filter via the list in the "Filter Contour" window.
Irregular Contours
For contours to which it is almost impossible to assign a Gauss-filter due to their
irregular forms, you will select the "Robust-Spline-Filter".
This option allows you filtering for contours and for
Automatic Circle Measurement
Automatic Line Measurement
When the Robust-Spline-filter is selected, the text field for the "Run in / run out"entry is deactivated.
Automatic Circle Measurement
For the automatic circle measurement a filter can be selected when the scanning
symbol is active (see ill. below).
The critical wavelength is calculated with , the circle diameter and on the basis
of 50 UPR (undulations per revolution). It must be stated for every filter. The preset UPR-size is 50. The formula used internally by GEOPAK is then:
Critical wavelength = * Circle diameter / UPR
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-51
Contours
Automatic line measurement

For the automatic line measurement (ill. below) the critical wavelength must be
entered.
Pre-set are the Gauss-filter and a critical wavelength of 1.0.

The measurement unit is limited to millimetres.
VIII-52
v 2.4
14.09.04
Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further Options
Nominal-Actual Comparison: Further

Options
3.1
Nominal-Actual Comparison, e.g. "Element

Circle"
You have measured a circle and want to realize a nominal-actual comparison. To

call this function, you have two possibilities:
Click into the menu bar "Nominal Actual Comparison Elements /

Element and come to the "Nominal Actual Comparison" dialogue
window.
Select via the evaluation tools (toolbar on the lower display margin).
icon and the "Nominal Actual Comparison"
Click into the
dialogue window appears.
By clicking on the characteristics (e.g. diameter), you can determine

whether the displayed characteristic has to be tolerated or not. You
notice that inputs are possible in one case, in the other case the
cells are disabled. With one click, e.g. on the co-ordinate X, you
activate or deactivate the cells.
If you want to tolerate the position in another mode of co-ordinate system,

click on one of the symbols on the left (e.g. cylindrical co-ordinate mode). After
that, the position of the element is directly converted. Normally, the polar
representation is referred to the plane XY; i.e., third axis is the axis Z. If you want
to relate the representation to another plane, click a second or third time on the
corresponding type of co-ordinate system.
With "circular" elements, you can select whether you want the
diameter or the radius for the comparison of nominal and actual
values. The selection is carried out through two symbols below on
the left side of the chart (for example diameter).
With tolerances of positions, it is possible that the sign of the

position (e.g. value X) is important. On the other hand, it happens
that the sign is troubling, since by the simply mathematical
comparison an error is located that is twice as large as the value of
the position.
Via the symbol in the heading of the dialogue window, you can
determine whether the sign is enabled or not: If you click on the
symbol, the sign is disabled.
14.09.04
Instead of numerical values, the tolerance limits can also be

determined by table codes (e.g. H7). Activate each time the symbol
before going to the "type" column. The cells of the numerical values
(columns "Upper" and "Lower Tolerance Limit ") are deactivated.
Input the so-called "Identifier" for the tolerance class into the text
field.
v 2.4
VIII-53

Exit the text field either with a "TAB" or with one click into another box.
Then the numerical values from the tolerance chart are entered into the
boxes "Upper" and "Lower Tolerance".
If you want to carry out further actions after the nominal actual comparison,
confirm via the symbol. A dialogue window appears "Further Options of Nominal
Actual Comparison".
Here, the following options are at your disposal:
abort the part program if one value is excessive and/or too small;
define the feature as reference for a
assign to the feature a further identifier (e.g. drawing grid square) for
easier finding.
transfer the suitable feature to STATPAK or 3D-TOL (for 3D-TOL,

only position tolerances are possible)
assign to the feature a position number for the continuous numbering

and a sequence in the first sample test
Additionally, you can also determine whether values of positions (positions) have
to be tolerated in the current or in the origin co-ordinate system.
3.2
Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison
If you want to execute further actions after the comparison of nominal and actual
values, click e.g. in the "Comparison of Nominal and Actual Values Element
dialogue window
If you want further actions after the comparison of nominal and actual values,
click e.g. in the "Comparison of Nominal and Actual Values: "Element Circle"
dialogue window on the
symbol. Below the headline "Further Options in the
Nominal Actual Comparison" you can then
abort the part program if the upper tolerance limit is exceeded; or ...
abort the part program if the lower tolerance limit remained under.
This is only valid for bilateral tolerance, not for form and position
tolerances.
transfer the feature to STATPAK. For this, first of all a name

must be assigned to the feature. As soon as at least one character
is input for a name, the symbol "Report to Statistic Program" is
activated. In addition, the feature name can be only input for the
protocol.
You may also transmit position tolerances to 3D-TOL. The values are recorded
there and can be consulted for calculations (e.g. Best Fit).
VIII-54
v 2.4
14.09.04

Additional Information:
the position number; you can use it if you, e.g. execute the
measurement for an initial sample. In the program of initial sample
report of Mitutoyo, the features are classified according to this
number, before printing. This allows you to carry out the
measurement in another order than the features are required in the
report
a further designation; this can be, e.g. the grid square of a larger
drawing, so that the feature can be easily found.
a reference identification; this is used if the MMC may be applied.

Here, it is sometimes specified in the drawing that the MMC can
also be applied for a reference element (e.g. ' A '). Where it is
possible, in GEOPAK, to use the MMC you also can input this
reference identification. During the input, you get a list of the
references already defined.
3.3
Origin of Co-ordinate System
Normally, GEOPAK always converts the positions and directions into the current
co-ordinate system. With the development of a new function, we want to keep at
your disposal, at the end of a long part program, the possibility to tolerate the
positions in the original co-ordinate system.
The Situation
You have a long part program and change the co-ordinate system
several times.
You want to execute all nominal-actual comparisons only at the end.
You want to tolerate the positions in your original co-ordinate

system that actually is no longer at your disposal.
Tolerance of the positions

In the "Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison" dialogue
window, click on the symbol on the right and activate for tolerance of the
positions the "Origin of Co-ordinate System". The symbol on the left side always
signifies the actual (last) co-ordinate system.
This is only valid for positions. Diameter or radius are independent from
the co-ordinate system.
14.09.04
v 2.4
VIII-55
Output
IX Output of Data
Contents
1
Output................................................................................ 2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
Output of Data.............................................................................. 2
File Format Specification ............................................................ 3
Standard or Special File Format................................................. 4
Change File Output Format ........................................................ 5
File Format End............................................................................ 5
Print Format Specification .......................................................... 5
Change Print Format ................................................................... 6
Print Format End.......................................................................... 6
Form Feed .................................................................................... 7
Printing according to Layout Head Start ................................... 7
Protocol Archive .......................................................................... 8
External Printing .......................................................................... 8
External Print Format Change .................................................... 8
External Print Format End .......................................................... 8
Output Text .................................................................................. 9
Layout for Surface ..................................................................... 10
Save Contour in ASCII File ....................................................... 11
Open Protocol ............................................................................ 11
Change Protocol ........................................................................ 12
Close Protocol ........................................................................... 12
Protocol Output ......................................................................... 12
Types of Output ......................................................................... 13
Print Preview (Page View)......................................................... 15
Flexible Graphic Protocols ............................................ 16

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic ................................. 17

Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor ................. 18
Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol ........................... 19
Templates of Graphic Windows ............................................... 20
Protocol Output .............................................................. 21

3.1
3.2
14.09.04
Dialogue for Protocol Output.................................................... 21

Scale and Print Graphics .......................................................... 21
v 2.4
IX-1
Output
Output
1.1
Output of Data
For the "Output" of measured data, GEOPAK always proposes two ways. You
can output the data on a printer, and/or store the measurement results in a file. In
GEOPAK, these functions are accessible with the menu bar and the "Output"
menu.
If you need a printed report, you are going to opt for the printer as
output media e.g. if you need documents for the archives. GEOPAK
uses the printer having been determined as default printer in your
Windows system (see details under "Printer Settings").
If you want to use a different printer, you first must select this
printer as default in Windows.
Printing is done page by page.
The format of the data can either be the one predefined by
GEOPAK or your own format. For further details, refer to Print
Layout".
The output of data in a file (storing) is always in ASCII. You will prefer
this solution if you need the data for further processing, e.g. in some
other programs. To do so, use the "File Format Specification"
function. However, you can change the output format via the "Change
File Output Format" function.
It is also possible to print the ASCII-file; however, there is no
formatting information.
You can use both ways, printer output and storage as ASCII file, independently
during the learn mode of the part program. These parallel functions will meet all
your requirements.
Please consider in advance which data you need to be printed or stored
before starting the learn mode. The data are recorded from the moment
you switch the corresponding format on (e.g. "Print Format Start").
IX-2
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
1.2
File Format Specification
In this dialogue (menu bar "Output / File Format Specification") you determine,
e.g. the name of the output file, where to store it and which information it must
include (head data, formula calculation, etc.).
Output File
In the "Output File" text field, you can enter a complete file name
including drive and path (according to Windows conventions a max.
of 255 signs).
If possible, select "signifying" file names. It will be easier to find

them again. If you enter only one file name, this file will be
automatically stored. You will find the file in the MCOSMOS/exe
directory having been created at the installation of MCOSMOS.
If you enter one fixed file name, the output file will be overwritten
each time you execute the part program.
If you want to store all files, you must change the file name each
time you execute the program.
For further information concerning this subject, please refer to
your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", folder
"GENERAL", file "UM_string_code_g(e).pdf.
If you have already created one or more output files, you can use a
list of suggestions; this list appears when you click the arrow symbol.
From this list, you can choose a file by clicking with the mouse.
If you click on the icon, you get a dialogue window (Windows

conventions) so that you can easily find files in the different
directories.
Append
Also click on the "Append" check box. In this case, the new data are
always appended to the existing file. Otherwise, the file is simply
overwritten.
Output
You can click as many boxes as you want, with the corresponding options. Thus,
you meet all requirements for your output file.
For information on whether and how to choose "Standard" or any special formats
refer to the topic Standard or Special File Format.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-3
Output
1.3
Standard or Special File Format
File format
Beginning from Version 2.2, the "Start of File Format" dialogue includes as an
extension the section "File Format". Here you can make your choice using one of
the radio buttons for "Standard" or any other formats. This enables you to create
ASCII files in several formats for a variety of part programs without having to
change the default setting.
Standard
Clicking "Standard" causes the default setting made in the "Settings GEOPAK"
dialogue of the PartManager to remain unchanged. To get to this dialogue, use
the "Menu bar / Settings / Default Settings Programs / CMM / GEOPAK". The
format file name's length is limited to 40 characters.
Special format
In order to get a special format, click the second button. Use the arrow key to
select your format from the list.
This is what you should know:
The list is derived from already existing format files.

The last preceding input is suggested.
After reinstallation the GEOPAK-3 format is suggested.
The "Mitutoyo GEOPAK-3" and "Mitutoyo GEOPAK" formats are
always shown. They refer to the file GEOASCII.INI and the
sections [GEOPAK-3] and [Geopak-Win] respectively.
The other optional formats are derived from files with the extension GAF =
GEOPAK-ASCII format. The file name without this extension is in each case the
name that is shown in the list. The format has to be described in this file. In order
for this to be implemented, we recommend that you contact the Mitutoyo Service.
The GAF file has to be stored in the MCOSMOS-INI directory.
IX-4
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
1.4
Change File Output Format
Before starting the output, you must have specified under "File Format
Specification " what you want to output in the file.
During the execution of the part program, you can change the items that must be
in the file by the "Change Output Format" function. Thus, you can add other items
to your file or delete.
Activate the "Change Output Format" function via the menu bar and the "Output"
pull-down menu.
1.5
File Format End
Via this function (menu bar "Output"), you finish the data output to file. Now, you
can either use this file for other purposes, or even start a new file (cf. under File
Format Specification). Thus, it will be possible to place in order the data sorted
according to "Geometrical Elements", "Tolerances", etc. in different files and to
store it.
You do not have to finish the output explicitly; when you leave the program, the
output file will be automatically closed. The data are stored.
1.6
Print Format Specification
Activate these functions in GEOPAK via the menu bar and the "Output" menu.
Select the "Print Format Specification" function.
When using this function and the following dialogue window, you define which
items (measured results) will be printed.
In the description fields, you can define the text for the headlines
and footers. The printed protocol has a headline and a footer printed
on every page. Font and size of type is defined for the whole
protocol.
Notice that GEOPAK writes, in any case, the version number and
the part program term into the headline. The footer includes the
current page number.
Texts that have once been input are automatically stored. Via the
arrow key, you can activate and use later again the texts that have
once been input. In the protocol, the texts are right justified. To
realize your protocols, cf. under Print Layout.
In the logo file description field, input the path and file name of the
bitmap of your logo.
Instead of typing the file name, you can also click the icon. If
you click on the icon, you get a dialogue window (Windows
conventions) so that you can easily find and activate your file in the
different directories. It is supposed that you have stored your logo
as a bitmap (*.BMP) file in a directory.
14.09.04
If you choose a logo, it automatically appears in the dialogue. In the

protocol, you can see how your logo appears above the protocol
head. The file can be in JPG or BMP format.
v 2.4
IX-5
Output
By clicking in the "Head Data" check box, you can have the head
data of the part printed on the first page of the protocol. You can
define the head data in the PartManager via the menu bar "Settings
/ Head data". These data may be the drawing number, the part
name, the customer information, and others.
When using the other check boxes, you can select which
information will be printed on your protocol.
You will always get the
name of the operator and the

date and time of start printing.
You must know
1.7
Recording starts as soon as you confirm the input of the "Print

Format Specification" by "Ok".
The selected data are recorded until you finish the part program or
stop the output with the "Print Format End" function via the menu
bar "Output".
A page is printed as soon as it will be full.
If a page is full, it will be automatically printed. You can watch the

percentage in the status bar besides the user name (at the bottom
of the page).
Via the "Form Feed" function (menu bar "Output") you can get the
printout even if the page is not yet full.
Via the "Change Print Output Format" function, you can change
print options without stipulating a new printout format.
You can only use one printout format until activating the "Print
Format End" function.
Change Print Format
This function is same as "Change File Output Format".
1.8
Print Format End
Via this function (menu bar "Output"), you finish the data output to file. Now, you
can either use this file for other purposes, or even start a new file (cf. under File
Format Specification). Thus, it will be possible to create different protocols
sorted e.g. according to "Geometrical Elements", "Tolerances", etc. .
You do not have to finish the output explicitly; when you leave the program, the
protocol output will be finished and the current page printed (even if the page is
not complete).
IX-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
1.9
Form Feed
Via the "Form Feed" function (menu bar "Output") you can get the printout even if
the page is not yet full.
1.10 Printing according to Layout Head Start

MCOSMOS proposes a default layout for your print report. If this format is not
satisfactory, you can create your own report. The layout is realized in another
program (see details under "The Mitutoyo Layout"). The structure of the log
heading is stipulated in the layout file and cannot be changed on your own. If you
want, you can have an adjusted layout from the Mitutoyo service.
If you want to use the layout file, you must tell it GEOPAK, this means via the
"Print Layout" (menu bar "Output") function. This function also allows printing out
several reports in only one operation.
Hint
The "Print Layout" function is utilised appropriately at the end of the part
program because all nominal-to-actual comparisons will be listed in the
report.
As a standard, Mitutoyo delivers several possibilities for the layout, e.g.
the initial sample report according to VDA guidelines.
Proceed as follows
If you have, for example created several layout files and activated
them already once, you will find these in a list. To do so, click on the
arrow key on the right of the text field.
If you want to make the selection that MCOSMOS offers, click

on the symbol in the following "Open" dialogue window, first search
- according to Windows conventions - the directory in which
MCOSMOS is installed on your computer.
Under "*/MCOSMOS/Layout" you will find the files proposed from

Mitutoyo and those you have created.
Hint
For further information about the layout, please refer to your MCOSMOSCD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GEOPAK", files "dia_lay_g(e).pdf"
and "UM_user_def_g(e).pdf" and folder "GENERAL", file
"print_lay_2_0_g(e).pdf".
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-7
Output
1.11 Protocol Archive

In this window (menu bar "Output / Protocol Archive"), you enter the folder in
which MCOSMOS stores all the files relevant for a subsequent protocol. The data
can be administrated or printed via the Protocol-Manager. See details under
"Protocol-Manager".
1.12 External Printing

If you activate this function, proceed in the following dialogue the same way as
explained under "Print Format Specification".
1.13 External Print Format Change

explained under "Change Print Format".
1.14 External Print Format End

explained under "Print Format End".
IX-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
1.15 Output Text

Activate the "Text Output" function via the symbol or via the menu bar and
the "Output" menu.
If you want to output additional information in your protocol (see icon on the
left), click on the printer symbol.
This is also valid for the ASCII file.
You may enter
a defined text, which, each time, is the same when you print it or
another text at each part program execution. Then, GEOPAK

will stop at each execution and asks you to enter your text.
You can enter a variable in the text (date etc.). For further information concerning
this subject, please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents",
folder "GEOPAK", file UM_string_code_g(e).pdf.
The input text will be analysed and prepared. In the line under the description
field is shown, which text will be written into the protocol respectively into the file
after the "Preparation of Data".
Assign position number to a text
You can assign a number to entered texts (attributive features) using the input
field "Position number".
In output protocols (e.g. initial sample report), you can use position numbers to
define the sequence of the output data. This is how you can directly position input
text in the protocol.
In the case of identical position numbers, first the input text and then the
relevant tolerance comparison are output.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-9
Output
1.16 Layout for Surface

The "Layout for Surface" window (menu bar "Output" and then the function) has
to do with the dialogue you originally know from 3D-TOL Win. In 3D-TOL, the
different views of the parts or the models will be provided with a name in the
"Labelling" line. In GEOPAK, you cant edit in this line, although it is the same
dialogue. You only can call the layout commands having been generated in 3DTOL and change with some options.
If you have opened the dialogue, you will see in the "Labelling" line the names of
the views, which you have already allocated in 3D-TOL.
You can ask for a list of the different views of the part, you actually work with
in GEOPAK, via the arrow symbol (see picture below).
Click on the view you want (in our example "top view").
You can rotate the part and
print out the view.
With the different options, you can
print the graphics,

print the list of the measured points,
Stop 3D-TOL after having printed and,
if you have opened the info. windows in the selected view, you may
automatically "Re-sort" these.
In the following description fields
drawing no. and
the two comment lines
you can display the default of 3D-TOL via the arrow symbol. It is possible
to edit in these lines in contrast to the "Labelling" (see above).
IX-10
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
1.17 Save Contour in ASCII File

With the "Contour Save" function, you can store contours as ASCII file that
means as a text. Activate this function via the menu bar and the "Output" pulldown menu.
In the "Contour Save" dialogue window in the list field under "Select Element",
you will find the contours you have measured so far. It is a part of the List of
Elements . Here, the number of contours is not limited.
Click the contour you want to store. If you do not see it in the
displayed zone, you can use the scroll bar to view the whole list.
Now enter the name of the file in the "Contour File" field together
with the path where you want to store the contour.
You can also click on the icon and store the file in the
following dialogue window (Windows conventions).
The file names must get the extension <.gws>. Otherwise, the program does not
recognise the special information contained in the file. The three letters g, w and
s come from "GEOPAK-Win Scanning".
Once you have stored the contour in such a file, you can use e.g. Word- or
Notepad to read, print, or modify the data. It is also possible to edit in these text
files (according to Windows conventions).
1.18 Open Protocol

To access this function and the corresponding dialogue, go to the menu bar and
the "Output" menu.
This function and the subsequent options "Change Protocol Format" and "Close
Protocol" enable you to control the output of tolerance comparisons and
elements. For initial detailed information refer to "Protocol Output" .
Hint
Remember right from the beginning that for the control of the print output you
have always to follow this order:
Close protocol
Change protocol format
Close protocol
Printing, however, is also performed automatically at the end of the part program.
The "Open Protocol" dialogue offers you four options under the heading "Output
Options".
It is your decision as a user what print-out option you take:
all tolerance comparisons,
the tolerance comparisons outside the control limits,
tolerance comparisons outside the tolerance limits, or
all elements.
Using this dialogue you also make your decision for one of the "Output Types".
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-11
Output
In contrast to the function File Format Spezifikation the option "head
data" does not stand to the decree in this dialogue. So that you can input
the head data, you must use the option Inout Head Data or Set Head
Data Field.
1.19 Change Protocol

This dialogue (Menu bar / Output / Change Protocol Format) allows you to make
changes to the output format previously selected in the dialogue "Open Protocol".
You have four options. It is your decision as a user
what print-out option you take:
all tolerance comparisons,
the tolerance comparisons outside the control limits,
tolerance comparisons outside the tolerance limits, or
all elements.
1.20 Close Protocol

Using this function (Menu bar / Output) you finish the current print output.
After finishing you can, of course, open a new protocol (for details refer to "Open
Protocol"). Thus it is possible to generate various protocols - designated e.g., by
"Geometric Elements", "Tolerances", etc.
When you leave the program, the protocol output is closed and the protocol
printed out.
1.21 Protocol Output

By means of the "Protocol Output", you can create protocols. Here, you can
select a layout and the type of output.
Hint
The template is a layout or a manuscript for your protocol.
"Layout" List Box
IX-12
On the left side of the dialogue window, you find the "Layout" list box.
If you select a layout, a preliminary drawing of the layout is

automatically displayed.
In the "Layout" list box, you will see all layouts situated in the
..\MCOSMOS\Layout directory.
After the MCOSMOS installation, you find some examples of layouts
in this folder you can use.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
Number of Copies
In the "Number of Copies" list box, you define how many copies you
want to output.
In the list box, you see how many protocols have been requested
at last.
In which form the protocols are printed or stored is explained in the "Types of
Output".
1.22 Types of Output

By means of the radio buttons, which are listed under "Output" on the right side of
the dialogue window, you determine the output format. The following radio
buttons are available:
Printer
If not set before, output is done on the current printer. If, in the
ProtocolDesigner, you have selected another printer for a layout, this
will be used to print the protocol.
For this topic, see details under "ProtocolDesigner". On your
MCOSMOS-CD-ROM you will find also a complete users manual
under "protocolldesigner_g(e).pdf". Click on "Documents" and
"GENERAL".
Print to File
If you select this option, a PRN file (preprint process) will be created.
The condition for this is a postscript printer driver able to create
graphics for a device-independent printing.
Rich Text Format

If you make this option, a file will be created in RTF format. Then, you
can open this file in a text-processing program and if necessary adapt
it.
Hint
The RTF documents will be created according to the Microsoft
specification "Version 1.5". Not all software makers comply with this
specification. So it may happen that the created RTF documents will
be badly displayed by the text-processing programs.
But, out of the ..\MCOSMOS\Layout directory, you can select layouts
that have been optimised for Word.
HTML Format
If you output a protocol in HTML format (without Muli-Mime), several
files will be created by default. For example, the pictures are stored in
a separate file. If you want to send your measurement protocols (e.g.
as email or on CD rom), you should use the Multi-Mime-HTML format.
Adobe PDF-Format
A PDF document will be created that you can read, print and edit (but
editing is limited) with the free of charge "Acrobat Reader" of Adobe.
Multi-Mime-HTML-Format
This format is qualified for sending measurement protocols. With
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-13
Output
Multi-Mime-HTML format in contrast to simple HTML, only one file will
be created.
XML-Format
This format is partially still in the making. XML is meant to offer you
multitudinous possibilities for processing your measurement data.
Output in Formats of Graphic Data File
Bitmap
If you make this option, you get one or several bitmap files,
independently to the size of your protocol.
JPEG graphics
If you make this option, you get one or several JPEG files,
independently to the size of your protocol.
Metafile (EMF)
If the output must be in the Metafile format, you get one or
several Metafile files, independently to the size of your protocol.
Hint
These graphic data files are suitable for a problem-free integration of your
measurement data in presentations.
List Box for File Names
In the list box bottom right, you enter the file name of the protocol.
IX-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Output
1.23 Print Preview (Page View)

This preview option is a "Real Data Print Preview". This means that there are no
global values displayed such as those shown, e.g., in the ProtocolDesigner. What
is displayed are the values obtained from the measurements you have just
performed.
You access the dialogue (picture below) in the GEOPAK learn mode through the
"Menu bar / Output / Protocol Preview".
So it is possible for you to verify your protocol once more before printing. If your
protocol is alright, you will not have to leave the print preview again. You select
your template from the list and confirm. As a result, you obtain a screen-filling
preview from where you can print directly.
In addition to the above, it is possible to store the print preview or to email
it to your customer. For this purpose, you customer needs only a small program
that he can get from you without paying license fees. You find this "invoice.ll"
program on your MCOSMOS CD.
All other symbols in this preview window are ballooned, so you can see right on
the spot what function is concerned.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-15
Flexible Graphic Protocols
To open the dialogue window "Store graphic for template" click on the
symbol (left) of an opened graphic window, e.g. "Graphics of elements".
Alternatively you can use the menu bar "Graphic / Store graphic for template".
With this function you can prepare graphics in the learn mode for the printout in
the flexible protocol.
Background
It is not possible to print graphic windows directly out of the GEOPAK
learn mode into the flexible protocols. For this, you need to store the
graphic windows temporarily as a file. The definition as to which files are
printed out, you find in the templates.
In the input field "Names" of the dialogue "Store graphic for template" you enter a
name of the graphic that is as "telling" as possible. You can also dispose of nine
view numbers. Depending on the template with which you want to print, you have
to select the view number. You know these view numbers (picture on the right)
from the ProtocolDesigner. For detailed information on this program and further
directions for use and Online Help refer to ProtocolDesigner.
The inputs in the input fields "Name" and "Comment" are, subject to a relevant
template, included in the flexible protocol.
Hint
In contrast to the GEOPAK edit mode, you need not select a graphic type,
because in the learn mode, the function "Store graphic for template" is
linked to the graphic. For more information, refer to "Flexible Graphic
Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor"" and "Flexible Graphic Protocols and
Graphic".
IX-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
2.1
Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic
Print Graphic
Activate the function "View number".
The function "For table" is deactivated.
Select view number 1, as the protocol output of Mitutoyo templates

is performed via "view number" 1 as a standard.
Activate the function "Print graphic" if you wish to print out the
graphic immediately after having confirmed the dialogue with "OK".
After clicking the option "Print graphic", the dialogue "Protocol

Output" opens.
In this case, you select in the dialogue "Protocol output" the

template you require for your flexible protocol.
To avoid problems with graphics of older measurements, these view

numbers and the connected data are deleted upon each program start.
Print graphic as a table in the flexible protocol
Activate the function "For table".
The function "View number" is deactivated.
Thus, the graphic is not printed in a single frame but is included in a table in the
flexible protocol. The advantage of printing graphics within a table is that any
number of graphics can be printed, i.e. irrespective of whether you wish to print
out 1 or 100 graphics, you can always use the same template.
Positioning the graphic in the flexible protocol
If you enter a number in the input field "Position number", you can position the
graphic in the flexible protocol. We recommend that you reserve position
numbers for this purpose in your part program in order to avoid a doubling of
position numbers in the flexible protocol.
Change size of graphic in the flexible protocol
If you activate the function "Define scaling", you can enlarge or reduce the
display size of the graphic in the flexible protocol to scale.
You can use this function to fit the graphic into the frame of the template. In case
that the graphic is bigger than the frame, only that part of the graphic is displayed
that fits into the frame.
Values below zero reduce the graphic size.
Values bigger than zero enlarge the graphic size.
Edit graphic
The function "Store graphic for template" automatically stores all graphics as a
meta file. To edit the graphic with the graphic programs Corel Draw, Micrografx
Designer or AutoCAD, click on the button "Edit graphic".
The button "Edit graphic" is only active when a graphic editor has been set in the
PartManager under "Settings / Defaults for programs / button PartManager /
Editor Tab".
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-17

Layout of info windows in the learn mode
You can use the function "Define layout of info windows for print command" to
store the number, position and contents of the info windows in a meta file.
Therefore, the graphic is printed in the repeat mode exactly the same way as it
has been learned in the learn mode. For detailed information, refer to the topic
"Define Layout of Info Windows".
Info windows can only be defined for the element graphics and the airfoil
analysis (MAFIS).
For detailed information refer to "Protocol Output" and "Types or Output".
2.2
Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor
In order to print-out graphic windows like, for example, "Graphics of elements in

the repeat mode, the function "Store Graphic for template is required.
Background
It is not possible to print graphic windows directly out of the GEOPAK
learn mode into the flexible protocols. For this, you need to store the
graphic windows temporarily as a file. The definition as to which files are
printed out, you find in the templates.
To get to the function and the corresponding dialogue use the menu bar and the
menu "Output".
In the part program, this function should always be between the commands
"Open protocol and "Close protocol.
In the command "Open protocol, always ensure that you have selected
the correct template. For detailed information, refer to the topic
Templates of Graphic Windows.
For further information, also read the topic
Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol.
IX-18
v 2.4
14.09.04
2.3
Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol
Positioning the graphic in the flexible protocol

You can position the graphic in the flexible protocol when you enter a number
into the input field "Position number". We recommend to reserve position
numbers for this purpose to avoid a doubling of position numbers in the flexible
protocol.
Change size of graphic in the flexible protocol
If you activate the function "Define scaling", you can enlarge or reduce the
display size of the graphic in the flexible protocol to scale.
Values below zero reduce the graphic,
values bigger than zero enlarge the graphic.
Example: Print-out tolerance graphic "Flatness" in the flexible protocol.
In the dialogue window "Open protocol" you select for example the
template "Flatness".
Select from the list box "Define graphic type" the type "Flatness".
Confirm the "Loop counter", when you want an output of

elements with a tolerance graphic within a loop.
In the input fields "Name" and "Comment" you enter the text that
you want to be output in the flexible protocol.
Activate the function "View number".
The function "For table" is deactivated.
Select view number 1, because the Mitutoyo templates regularly

output the protocols via the "View number 1".
Activate the function "Close window" when you want to close the
graphic window in the repeat mode.
Select from the list box "Reference element" an element that shall
be represented in the tolerance graphic.
Example: Print tolerance graphic "Flatness" as a table in the flexible

protocol
Select in the dialogue window "Open protocol" the template

"Mitutoyo Graphic output in a table.mte".
Follow the steps 2 to 5 of the above example.
The function "View number" is deactivated.
Activate the function "For table".
For details, refer to the topic Templates of Graphic Windows.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-19
2.4
Templates of Graphic Windows
For information about which graphic window requires which template, see the
table below:
Graphic window
Template
Graphics of elements
ELEMGRAPHIC
Tolerance graphic
IX-20
Straightness
STRAIGHTNESS
Flatness
FLATNESS
Roundness
CIRCULARITY
Parallelism
PARALLELISM
Circular Runout
CIRCULARRUNOUT
Axial Runout
AXIALRUNOUT
Compare Points
COMPAREPNTS
Tolerance Comparison Contour
TOLCOMPCONTOUR
v 2.4
14.09.04
Protocol Output
Protocol Output
3.1
Dialogue for Protocol Output
With the dialogue for the protocol output, it is possible to enter additional data in
the protocol.
These can be e.g.
data concerning the part,
data concerning the user or
data concerning the customer.
Via the "Template" list box, you select the layout you want.
Hint
The template is a layout or a manuscript for your protocol.
The selected ProtocolDesigner template must have been related to a
user-defined input dialogue (edl file). You can relate a user-defined input
dialogue only in the ProtocolManager program. For further information
on this subject refer to "Relate User-Defined Input Dialogue to a
ProtocolDesigner Template".
An example for a layout with a dialogue is the "Initial Sample Report of
1998" that you can find in the list box.
Hint
For a better orientation, a preliminary drawing of the selected layout is
automatically displayed.
3.2
Scale and Print Graphics
The function "Learnable Graphic Commands" enables the settings for the graphic
evaluations of the below items to be stored in the GEOPAK Part Program Editor.
Element Graphics
Tolerance Graphics
Straightness
Flatness
Circularity
Parallelism
Airfoil analysis
Circular Runout
Compare Points
Tolerance Comparison Contours
You decide whether the print graphics is printed out with an automatic or
adjustable scale factor.
14.09.04
v 2.4
IX-21
Protocol Output
Add learnable graphic command to part program
Click in the menu bar on "Output / Learnable Graphic Commands".

Select a graphic type from the list box "Define graphic type".
In the list box "Reference element", select an element that shall be
displayed and evaluated in the selected graphic.
Hint
When several reference elements are possible, always select the current
or the nominal element as the reference element.
All elements are displayed in the element graphics.
Therefore the Element Selection list box is disabled in case
you select the element graphics.
Activate the "Print Window" option, when the graphics is to be

printed in the repeat mode.
Only open graphic windows can be printed. In order for the
element graphics to be printed, it is necessary that in the
repeat mode the function "Window / Element Graphics" in
the menu bar is activated.
To print the rest of the graphic windows it is necessary
that the diagram symbol is activated in the corresponding
nominal-to-actual-comparison.
IX-22
Adjust the way your graphics is to be scaled in the printout.
Upon confirmation of your settings the part program command

"Learnable Graphic Commands" will be transferred into your part
program.
Activate the "Close Window" option, when the graphic window which
was followed in performing the part program command in the repeat
mode, has to be closed.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
X Contours
Contents
1
Contours ........................................................................... 3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
Principles ..................................................................................... 3
Contour Import............................................................................. 3
Export Contour ............................................................................ 4
Technical Specification............................................................... 5
DXF Format .................................................................................. 5
VDAFS Format ............................................................................. 6
VDAIS (IGES) Format................................................................... 7
NC Formats .................................................................................. 8
Special formats ............................................................................ 9
Error Message.............................................................................. 9
Manipulate Contour........................................................ 10
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
Manipulate Contour ................................................................... 10

Scale Contour ............................................................................ 10
Edit Contour Point ..................................................................... 11
Mirror Contour ........................................................................... 11
Move / Rotate Contour .............................................................. 12
Create Offset-Contour ............................................................... 12
Idealize Contour......................................................................... 14
Change Point Sequence............................................................ 15
Sort Sequence of Contour Points ............................................ 16
Middle Contour .......................................................................... 17
Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter ............................................... 18
Prepare Leading Contour.......................................................... 18
Activate Leading Contour ......................................................... 19
Scanning with Guiding Contour ............................................... 20
Loop Counter ............................................................................. 22
Scanning of a Nominal Contour ............................................... 22
Define Approach Direction ....................................................... 24
Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy .............................. 24
Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point)............ 25
Contour Connection Element ................................................... 26
Delete Contour Points.................................................... 27

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
14.09.04
Delete Points of a Contour........................................................ 27

Delete via "Single Selection" .................................................... 28
Delete with the Co-Ordinates.................................................... 29
Delete with Radius..................................................................... 30
v 2.4
X-1
Contours
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
X-2
Delete via an Angle Area .......................................................... 31

Reduce Number of Points ........................................................ 31
Delete Linear Parts of a Contour.............................................. 32
Reduce Neighboured Points .................................................... 33
Delete Point Intervals from Contour ........................................ 34
Clean Contour ........................................................................... 34
Delete Contour Loops............................................................... 35
Delete Reversing Paths from Contour..................................... 36
Delete Double Contour Points.................................................. 36
Min. and Max. Point................................................................... 37
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
Contours
1.1
Principles
The following texts describes a function - meanwhile integrated in GEOPAK which was known before as program "TRANSPAK".
With this function it is possible to take over contours from external CAD systems
to GEOPAK. It's primary task is to read in contours for tolerance comparisons.
Condition for the measuring procedures in GEOPAK is that only the required
contour data (e.g. of any two dimensional contour) are included in the CAD files.
In general, it is only possible to read in formats which correspond to the technical
specifications determined in GEOPAK (for further information please refer to
Technical Specification).
No surface data and no dimensioning lines must be included in the data
file. The dimensioning lines are considered as lines to be measured by
the program.
Precondition
The function "Import contour" must be activated by an entry in the dongle.
1.2
Contour Import
Procedure
Click on this icon or choose "Element / Contour" from the menu
bar.
Enter the contour name and the memory number in the dialogue
window "Element Contour".
Click on the icon "Import contour" and confirm.
Dialogue window
In the dialogue window "Import contour" choose the following settings:
The Type of format, e.g. VDAFS or IGES,
The Contour file (CAD file) by choosing this icon.
The pitch: If you do not insert additional points, the initial and end
points of a line or of a sector of circle will be transferred only. The
distance between these two points is normally too large. Use the
function "Pitch" to insert additional points.
The unit of measurement of the file (default, millimetres or inch).
We recommend to use the default setting. If, however, the determined
unit in the CAD file is not correct you have to change it.
In order to obtain exact results for the tolerance comparisons
always activate the option "Set end point". If this option is activated,
two additional contour points are inserted at the beginning and the
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-3
Contours
end of a line or of a sector of circle. The points are inserted with a
distance of 0,01 millimetres.
If a contour contains many small elements, this option is not
necessary. The maximum number of points to be generated is 32
000. If this number is exceeded, GEOPAK displays the error
message "Too many points".
Sort order of points: It may occur that the elements in a CAD
file are not mutually connected. In this case the position of the
elements is not correct (see picture below).
First of all sort the elements in the correct order.

Confirm.
The contour is read. This process will take some time.
The result is shown in the element graphic, in the element list and in
the result field.
If you wish to sort, a maximum number of 7000 elements can be
read.
1.3
Export Contour
The specifications of chapter "Import contour" are valid for this chapter except for
the following descriptions.
Procedure
How to export the measured contour data to an external CAD system:
Click on menu "Output" and choose function "Export contour".
Choose your settings for "Select contour", "Type of format" and
"Contour file" in the displayed dialogue window.
Choose the "unit of measurement" of the file.
Choose the desired contour (2D contour or 3D contour) by
clicking on the corresponding icon.
Confirm. The output of the contour is protocoled in the result field.
After you have scanned a contour, the data can be output to CAD systems via
different common interfaces e.g. VDAFS or IGES.
X-4
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
1.4
Technical Specification
General conditions for data exchange

Attention must be paid during the design with the CAD system that the end
positions of successive design elements coincide with the start position of the
next element (e.g. in AUTOCAD set OFANG to END).
The maximum sequence of polynomial curves is 22.
Only the contour lines may be used in the data output.
If the option "Sort order of points" is activated, the maximum number of geometric
elements to be read is 7000. If this option is deactivated, up to 31999 elements
can be read in. It is possible to create contours with a maximum number of 31999
points.
This specification is only valid for the exchange of contours
between CAD systems and GEOPAK
1.5
DXF Format
DXF format
: ASCII, based on AutoCad V10.0 Autodesk
Convert DXF into GEOPAK

The contours are output as elements.
Blocks must be resolved before the output.
The following elements and group codes are supported:
LINE
10, 20, 30 (starting position) 11, 21, 31 (end position)
POINT
10, 20, 30 (point) (when using the DXF 'POINT' element no

intermediate points are generated in GEOPAK)
CIRCLE
10, 20, 30 (centre), 40 (radius)
ARC
10, 20, 30 (centre), 40 (radius), 50, 60 (angle)
POLYLINE
66
VERTEX
10, 20, 30 (location), 42 (bulge)
SEQEND
3DLINE
10, 20, 30 (starting position) 11, 21, 31 (end position)
Group codes not listed here are ignored. In particular, the use of 210,
220, 230 and with POLYLINE 10, 20, 30 with values not equal to 0 leads
to errors.
Convert GEOPAK into DXF
Contours are output as DXF element POLYLINE. When interpolation is activated
each point corresponds to a VERTEX element.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-5
Contours
1.6
VDAFS Format
VDAFS format
: ASCII, V 2.0 according to DIN 66301.
Convert VDAFS into GEOPAK

The contours are output as "sets".
The following VDAFS elements are supported:
HEADER
Start identifier of the file
BEGINSET
Start of a set
ENDSET
End of a set
$$
Comment
POINT
Point co-ordinates (when using this element, no

intermediate points are generated in GEOPAK.)
PSET
Point sequence
MDI
Point vector sequence; the direction vectors are not

evaluated
CURVE
Curve from segments; the polynomial sequence may not

exceed 22
CIRCLE
Circle
Using language elements not listed above may lead to errors.

Convert GEOPAK into VDAFS
Contours are output as the VDAFS element PSET.
X-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
1.7
VDAIS (IGES) Format
VDAIS is a subset of IGES V3.0.

Convert VDAIS into GEOPAK
Element
Typ
Form
Subord
Sw
PD ptr.
Matrix ptr.
Circular arc
100
2D-point
106
3D-point
106
Straight line
110
Par. Spline curve
112
Geometric elements
Types: linear, quadratic, cubic *

Point (--> composite 116
curve)
Transformation
matrix
124
!0
Composite curve
102
!00
!0
Group
402
1,7,14,15 !00
Structuring element
PD pointer only on geometric elements *

* General restriction compared to IGES.
Convert GEOPAK into VDAIS
Contours are output as the VDAIS element 110 (straight line).
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-7
Contours
1.8
NC Formats
NC programs are generated and read according to DIN 66025.

Reading NC data into GEOPAK
The following G commands are interpreted:
G1
straight line interpolation
G2
circle interpolation in clockwise direction
G3
circle interpolation in counter-clockwise direction
G17
XY plane selection
G18
ZX plane selection
G19
YZ plane selection
Note
the circle in commands G2 and G3 must be defined via the midpoint
(I, J, K);
the co-ordinates can be specified both incrementally and absolutely;
the commands G1, G2, G3 can also be programmed permanently.
Output of GEOPAK in NC formats
The data are output via G1 commands.
Initial and end sequences can be defined specifically for each
control system.
X-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
Contours
1.9
Special formats
In addition to the above-mentioned formats several special formats for programs

such as PC-DRAFT, PERSONAL DESIGNER, etc. are available.
In these formats it is possible to transfer point data only. To a large extent the
formats may be freely defined using control files.
In all cases these formats are ASCII formats. Internal (binary) CAD formats are
generally not supported.
1.10 Error Message

If an error Message is displayed, proceed as follows:
Check the format in the dialogue window "Import contour".
If necessary enlarge the distance of points.
Deactivate the option "Set end point".
As described above it may happen that e.g. an IGES file contains elements which
can not be read by GEOPAK.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-9
Manipulate Contour
2
2.1
Manipulate Contour
Manipulate Contour
A mouse-click on the menu topic "Contour" provides you with various possibilities
to manipulate your contour (position, shape, etc.). The manipulation is done to
the original contours, that is, no new contours are created. You can cancel any
changes made. All functions are of the teach-in type to be used for the repeat
mode.
For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter, please refer to
the title "Loop Counter".
All contours are processed in the actual co-ordinate system, that is, not
necessarily in the system where they were measured.
This is what you can do with the contour:
Scale
Mirror
Move
Create Offset-Contour
You can also "Cancel Points". You activate this function, however, using the
menu "Elements".
2.2
Scale Contour
For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour".
You proceed in the following way:

You click in the menu bar on Contour/Scale and come to the
dialogue window "Scale Contour".
Using the arrow, you select an already existing contour.
You enter the scale factors into the text boxes X, Y and Z and
confirm.
All points of the contour are multiplied - relative to the origin of the actual
co-ordinate system - by these factors.
X-10
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
2.3
Edit Contour Point
You can use this function to change the co-ordinates of an already existing
contour point.
Proceed as follows:
In the menu bar click on "Contour / Edit contour point" and the
dialogue window "Edit contour point " opens.
Use this arrow to select an already existing contour.
Confirm.
The dialogue window "Select points from contour" is opened.
Set the co-ordinates mode.
Enter the contour point you want to change.
In the GEOPAK learning mode you can select the contour point to be changed in
the element graphic using the mouse.
Confirm your selection.
The dialogue window "Edit contour point " is opened.
In the dialogue window "Edit contour point" you enter the new co-ordinates of the
contour point to be changed.
2.4
Mirror Contour

You click in the menu bar on Contour/Mirror and come to the
dialogue window "Mirror Contour".
Using the symbols, you select one of the planes relative to which
you want to mirror the contour, and then you confirm.
The order of points is inverted. The object is, in particular, to establish from the
original and the mirrored contour one common contour (in one sense of rotation)
(for details see under the topic "Connection Element Contour").
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-11
Manipulate Contour
2.5
Move / Rotate Contour
All points of the contour are first moved and then rotated - relative to the origin of
the actual co-ordinate system.
You click in the menu bar on "Move/Rotate Contour" and come to
the dialogue window "Move/Rotate Contour".
You enter the "move" figures into the text boxes X, Y and Z, and
then you confirm.
If you then still want to rotate the contour around an axis, you use
the symbols to select one of the three axes (X, Y or Z).
Furthermore, you enter the figure for the angle in the adjacent text
box.
"Rotate" first
If you want to rotate first and move after,
you rotate (as described above), leave the "move" figures at 0 and
confirm. Then ...
call up the dialogue again and move (as described above). Now the
angle of rotation remains at 0.
2.6
Create Offset-Contour
For details regarding general principles concerning the topic contour see under
"Manipulate Contour".
Introduction
You have scanned a contour in order to generate a CNC part program (e.g. for
wire spark-erosion machines (for details see under the topic Transfer Contour
into External System). What you need for such a transfer is a contour whose tool
radius is increased or decreased. Such a contour is also called an Offset Contour
or an Equidistant. The perpendicular (normal line is formed at each point of the
contour. The point is moved by the "offset" along the perpendicular.
You click in the menu bar on "Contour/Contour with Offset" and
come to the appropriate dialogue window.
In this dialogue window, you select the contour via the list
functions, and then ...
you enter the offset figure.
Use the option buttons to define in which direction the contour
shall be offset.
X-12
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
Increase/Decrease Contour
To define the direction in which the contour shall be increased or decreased,
imagine a closed contour between start and end point. The option "Increase
contour" moves the contour outwards. For this, the material side of the contour is
of no importance.
Left / Right
The offset orientates at the sort sequence of the contour points. The command
"Left" effects the stated offset to the left side of the contour seen in point
sequence.
The calculation of the offset contour makes it possible to clip off parts of
the contour (see picture below. Upon completion of the calculation,
these constrictions are automatically deleted. This is the reason why the
calculated contour may possibly provide less points than the initial
contour. These points are recovered by the "Back function".
On the left (above) the original contour, on the right (below) the contour
after the offset.
The "Offset Contour" is shown in the element graphics and recorded in the result
box.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-13
Manipulate Contour
2.7
Idealize Contour
The possibility to change a measured contour is important for the creation of a

machine tool part program. A point selection of a contour can be put in relation to
a defined geometric element (point, circle, line, angle). Then, the contour equals
the element in this specific range. This contour range is idealized to the element.
The operation of the function consists of three parts:
Selection of a contour to be changed.
Selection of an element to be taken as the ideal element.
Selection of the contour sections to be idealized.
Proceed as follows:
In the menu bar, click on "Contour/Idealize contour".
The dialogue "Idealize contour" opens.
Select contour
In order to be able to work with contours, you must load at least one contour. For
information about how to load a contour, go to the topic Load Contour.
In the list box "Select contour", click on the contour you wish to
idealize.
For information about if and how to apply the loop counter, go
to "Loop Counter".
Select element
In order to be able to select an element, the required element must be part of
your part program. For further information, refer to the topic Elements:
Overview.Use the buttons
Point
Line
Circle
Angle
to select an element type with which you wish to idealize the contour.
In the list box "Select element", click on the element with which
you wish to idealize the contour.
For information about if and how to use the loop counter, refer
to the topic "Loop Counter".
Select contour range
Use the buttons "Selected range" to select:
X-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
Point selection contour. You wish to idealize a contour section with
a manual input. For details, go to "Select Points from Contour".
Defined by element. The contour section is defined by the selected
element.
Complete contour. The complete contour is idealized after the
selected element.
2.8
Change Point Sequence
The function changes the sequence of the points within a contour. The coordinates of the points and the number of the contour points are not influenced.
The function can be applied to a selected range or to the complete contour.
Proceed as follows:
Click in the menu bar on "Contour/Change point sequence".
The dialogue "Change point sequence" opens.
Select contour
To be able to work with contours you need to load at least one contour. For
information about how to load a contour, refer to the topic Load Contour.
In the list box "Select contour", click on the contour for which you
wish to change the point sequence.
For information about if and how to apply the loop counter,
refer to the topic "Loop Counter".
Select contour range
Click on the button "Point selection contour" and you can
define a contour range.
When confirming the dialogue "Change point sequence", the
dialogue "Point selection contour" opens.
Select a contour range. For more information, refer to "Point
Selection Contour".
Select complete contour
To select the complete contour, click on the symbol "Complete contour".
For more information about this topic, refer to Sort Sequence of the Contour
Points beschrieben.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-15
Manipulate Contour
2.9
Sort Sequence of Contour Points
A correct sort sequence of the contour points is important for many types of
calculations. The sequence can be wrong when, for example, a contour has been
imported by an external system. Also the GEOPAK-function "Connection element
contour" can lead to the connection of points to a disordered contour. The
decision as to which of the following functions is the most suitable must be taken
from case to case.
Smallest projected distance
Smallest distance in the space
The points are sorted depending on the distance between adjoining
points. The algorithm starts with the start point (ascending) or the
end point (descending) of the selected range. Then, the next
contour point to the previous one is continuously searched and
sorted anew. This is repeated until the sorting of all contour points is
completed. The point co-ordinates are, depending on the selection,
viewed as a projected point (projected distance) or as a XYZ-point
(in the space).
Reverse sort sequence for points
The sequence of the points is reversed. Thus, the start point of a
contour becomes the end point of the contour and vice versa.
X-co-ordinate
Y-co-ordinate
Z-co-ordinate
The points are sorted depending on the selected co-ordinate. The
start and the end point of the contour may change.
Radius projected
Radius 3D
The points are sorted against the origin of the co-ordinate system
depending on the radius of each point. The start and end point of
the contour will usually change. The radius is calculated, depending
on the selection, either from the projected point (radius projected) or
the XYZ-point (Radius 3D).
Angle range
The points are sorted against the first axis of the contour projection
depending on the angle of each individual point. The angle is always
calculated on the projection plane of the contour. The start point
does not change, the end point may change.
Ascending / Descending
The sort sequence of the previous settings (except "Reverse sort
sequence for points") can be reversed using these option buttons.
X-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
Examples:
Contour points of a gear are sorted with the option "Angle range".
A contour parallel to the X-axis could be sorted easily with the
option "X-co-ordinate".
In most cases, the option "Smallest distance in space" is
sufficient.
2.10 Middle Contour

A Middle Contour is calculated, for instance, in cases where the mean for
correction is to be calculated from a variety of workpieces (nests or forms). A
situation where a new contour with a defined pitch or defined pitches is to be
produced from a single contour is regarded as a special case. Thus, the Middle
Contour becomes necessary in case of a tool correction where the nominal, the
actual and also the tool contour must each have the same number of points. Only
if this is the case, a correction can be performed.

You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar with the
functions "Element/Contour".
Using the dialogue window "Element Contour", you allocate a name
and a memory location to the contour you still want to calculate.
You click on the symbol and confirm.
In the window "Middle Contour" under "Avail.", you select the
contours you want to use for the calculation.
Clicking on the double arrow you move the contours under the
heading "Selected" (or also back).
Additionally, you enter the pitch (the spacing between the points) to
be used for calculating the new contour, and then you confirm..
For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter,
please refer to the title "Loop Counter".
The new contour is displayed in the element graphics and recorded
in the result box..
Hint
In the window "Middle Contour" you can, of course, select just one
contour with a different pitch.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-17
Manipulate Contour
2.11 Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter

You can fit in a circle with given diameter in a contour with two touching points.
The result is the circle shown in the element graphics below.

In the toolbar, click on the symbol on the left.
In the following "Element Circle" window, click under "Type of
Construction" on the "Fit in Element" symbol.
Via the "Fit in Element Circle" and "Select Points from Contour"
windows, you create your circle. See further details to this in the topics
Constructed Circles and Select Points from Contour .
This function can only be used on contours with a point sequence. The "Inserted
Circle is a simulation of the customary methods in order to evaluate spindle and
screw parameters. The starting points must exist shaped as a contour.
2.12 Prepare Leading Contour

A leading contour can be provided, e.g. by a CAD system. Upon completion of
the measurement, an actual / nominal comparison can be made with the scanned
contour.
Scanning following a leading contour requires the following actions to be done
previously:
You click on "CNC On" and on the functions "CMM/CNC On"
disposed at the menu bar.
You see in the GEOPAK status line a yellow dot next to the
CMM symbol.
You click on the symbol in the symbol bar, and...
de-activate in the following dialogue window "Element
Contour" the function "Automatic Measurement".
please refer to the title "Loop Counter".
X-18
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
You click on the symbol and confirm.
Upon completion of the above, the function " Scanning following a leading
contour" in the menu CMM is activated.
2.13 Activate Leading Contour

Before the function "Scanning following Leading Contour" is activated, you must
perform a series of steps. For details see under the topic Prepare Leading
Contour.
This is what you must know
The points are established by probing.

For this purpose, every single point of the leading contour is
probed.
Moreover, it is necessary that a probe is defined.

In the menu "CCM" you click on the function "Scanning following
Leading Contour".
You select the leading contour in the window " Scanning following
Leading Contour".
please refer to the topic "Loop Counter".
Using the known symbols you specify the plane along which
scanning is to take place.
In addition to the selection of the plane you
choose a probing direction.
A graphical sign in the dialogue window on the right shows you the
plane where and the direction from which probing takes place.
Clicking on the symbol you specify that traversing will take
place using "Probing Direction of the Leading Contour".
You enter the safety distance and measurement length.
The probe radius compensation, if necessary, will be carried out by you at a
later time, requiring a separate step.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-19
Manipulate Contour
2.14 Scanning with Guiding Contour

Basis
If you want to scan according to a guiding contour, you must consider the
following items:
The points of the guiding contour and the measured points are
treated as probe centre points. The probe radius cannot be
compensated because when working e.g. on vaulted surface, the
exact point on work piece (P) is not known (see picture below).
In order to avoid a crash, enter the required safety distance.

The measured nominal length limits the search in the probing
direction. This way, you avoid a crash with the probe shaft (see also
the related subject Enter Z Offset).
In the first scanning with guiding contour, you should reduce the
movement speed of the CMM.
Default:
Specify measurement direction (fixed measurement direction)
If you have selected e.g. the X/Y plane, you measure in the +Z or
Z direction.
In order to get a short measurement time, the (dash-lined) Z coordinate adapts itself in our example with the X/Y plane (swung line
below) of the workpiece contour.
If you selected, like above, the X/Y-plain, the probing direction in the
X/Y plane is automatically calculated. It passes vertically to the
contour, namely to the inner or outer side. (see picture below [outer
side]).
X-20
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
Measuring Direction specified through Guiding Contour

If the contour of 3D-TOL has been generated, also a probing direction exists that
you can use (see picture below).
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-21
Manipulate Contour
2.15 Loop Counter

For saving and exporting contours, you also can use "Loop Counters".
The procedure for "Saving".
Via the symbol, click in the list field on the contour, with which
you want to begin in the loop, respectively you want to save as first
contour.
Activate the loop counter via the symbol.
When saving, the loop counter is not automatically registered.
Click on the symbol.
In the window "Save Contour as" you must enter the special
characters "@LC" at an independent place (see example below).
contour@LC.gws
At each m loop flow, a file is (example above) created:
contour1.gws, contour2.gws, .., contourN.gws
Notice
For the export of contours with the loop counter the above mentioned
steps are analogously valid.
2.16 Scanning of a Nominal Contour

This function is used to scan
flat surfaces, e.g. sealing surfaces of cylinder heads, in the
surface mode.
In the edge mode you can scan a nominal contour at high
speed.
For this, you can only use scan probes, like for example
MPP100
SP25
SP80
SP600
The scanning of single points, e.g. with a TP200, is not possible.
The scanning of a nominal contour in the surface mode works like the Phi-Zscanning. However, a contour is used as leading geometry instead of a circle.
Proceed as follows
In the menu "CMM" click on the function "Scanning of a nominal
contour"
Select the leading contour in the window "Scanning of a nominal
X-22
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
contour".
For information about if and how to apply the loop counter,
refer to the topic "Loop Counter".
Add probe radius offset to leading contour
The loaded leading contour is positioned either on the workpiece surface or
in the probe centre. When using a contour positioned on the workpiece surface,
activate the button.
Add probe radius offset to measured contour
The measured contour can be compensated by the probe radius. This is
how you get a contour on the workpiece surface. This button is only active in the
edge mode.
Tolerance Limits
The nominal contour is used to calculate geometrical elements like circles (red)
and lines (blue). The maximum deviation between the nominal contour and the
calculated elements is defined by the tolerance limits of the line and circle
elements.
Enter these tolerance limits into the input fields "Line" and "Circle".
During the scanning process the probe may not loose contact to the workpiece.
Therefore, the offset of the nominal contour is included in the calculation. This
offset is the excursion that is added to the approach direction. For detailed
information, refer to Define Approach Direction.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-23
Manipulate Contour
2.17 Define Approach Direction

Define the scan mode or the movement strategy.
When probing a surface and using the Phi-Z-strategy, click on the symbol
"Start point on the surface".
When probing at an edge in one of the three planes XY, XZ and YZ from
the side, click on the symbol "Start point on the edge". This scan mode is quicker
than the scan mode for an unknown contour. As this is a 2D-scan, the third coordinate remains almost constant.
You can define the angles of the direction vectors of the approach direction in the
input fields X, Y and Z. The entered values are automatically adapted so that the
sum of the cosine four squares is 1. The approach direction is used to determine
on which side of the nominal contour the material is.
If you click on the symbol "Change direction vector", the respective angle of
the direction vector is reversed.
Accept CMM-position
When clicking on the symbol "Machine position", the approach direction to the
first contour point is defined. With this function you can assert that no collisions
occur before starting the contour measurement.
Point distance and scan speed
In the input field "Pitch", enter the point distance of the individual
contour points.
In the input field "Scan speed", enter the speed with which you wish
to scan your workpiece.
2.18 Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy

For your measurement task it can be necessary that an already saved contour
must be recalculated (e.g. in a new co-ordinate system). This can be useful if two
contours must be calculated being of two different co-ordinate systems.
Procedure
In the toolbar, click on the symbol ...
and in the following window "Element Contour" on the keypad.
You can also select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour".
A window "Recalculate from Memory / Copy: Contour" is displayed.
In the list field "Select Contour", click the contour, which must be
recalculated (copied).
In the "Storage" list box, you enter a no. already existing or a new
no. for your contour.
On principle, you can select
X-24
v 2.4
14.09.04
Manipulate Contour
a whole contour or a
section of it (also selectable with the mouse).
If and how to use the loop counter, is fully shown in the topic
"Loop CounterHTPC_SCN_CONT_SAVE_LOP".
Via one of the symbols (here the Phi Z plane), you decide in
which plane the contour must be projected.
Via the symbol, you determine whether the contour must be
recalculated as an open or closed contour.
2.19 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle /

Point)
You can calculate intersections also by using the element combinations "Contour
/ Circle", "Contour / Line" and "Contour / Point". If, in case of the combination
"Contour / Point", the point is not positioned on the contour, the point projected
onto the contour is calculated as the intersection.
Note
The projection of a point onto a contour is defined as the shortest distance
between the point and the contour.
Click on "Element Point" in the toolbar, confirm and the
"Element Point" window is displayed.
In this window, click on the "Intersection" symbol in "Type of
Construction" and confirm.
The "Intersection Element Point" window is displayed.
Insert intersection points as contour points into a contour
In the tool bar "First element", click on the contour symbol
when this button is not yet active.
You select a contour in the list box "First element".
In the tool bar "Second element", you click on the element symbol
that you want to intersect with the contour (e.g. line, circle and
point).
Select an element in the list box "Second element".
You either click on "Insert element point as contour point"
or on "Insert all of the intersection points".
For further details, see
the topic Intersection Element Point.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-25
Manipulate Contour
2.20 Contour Connection Element

Using the function "Connection Element Contour" you can connect single
contours to form a common contour. This function is suitable also for copying a
contour. You can use this function to your advantage, e.g., in cases where you
create a "Contour with Offset". You would then have the original together with the
"new contour" for comparison purposes. You can also overwrite and existing
contour.
Of great importance is the option which allows you to choose between
the Single or Group Selection (for details please refer to the topics "Single
Selection" and "Group Selection").
The general contour is located in the ...
actual co-ordinate system and in the
selected projection plane.
Procedure
You come to the dialogue window "Contour Connection Element" by
clicking on the symbol in the toolbar.
In the window "Element Contour", click on the symbol (picture
left).
Or select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour".
In any case, you must confirm in the "Element Contour" window.
Opened / closed contour: Change status
You can use this function to connect the first and the last contour point of a
contour. The contour is assigned the status "closed contour". In this case, the
button is displayed as pushed.
If the connection between the first and the last contour point is interrupted, the
contour is assigned the status "opened contour".
Hint
For details as how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Contour
Connection Element (Single or Group Selection)", please refer to the
"Single Selection" and "Group Selection".
X-26
v 2.4
14.09.04
Delete Contour Points
Working with contours makes it necessary to change (delete, move) contour

measurement points. The explanations provided for the following functions show
how geometrical elements can be calculated from contour points and, e.g., how
you evaluate only parts of a contour.
Click on "Contour / Delete Points" in the menu bar in order to open the "Delete
Points" dialogue.
Select contour
In order for you to work with contours, you have to load, at least, one contour. For
information on how to load a contour refer to the topic Load Contour.
Decide whether you want to use the loop counter.
The topic "Loop Counter" provides information as to whether
and how to use the loop counter.
Use contours
For details regarding the practical use of contours refer to the following items:
Delete Points of a Contour
Reduce Number of Points
Clean Contour
3.1
Delete Points of a Contour
If, for instance, you wish to evaluate only parts of a contour, or to delete not
desired contour points, the "Delete Points" window gives you four options with
regard to the "Delete Points" function.
Delete via Single Selection
Delete with the Co-Ordinates
Delete with Radius
Delete via an Angle Area
Notice
For the following actions, you must know that the reference point is
always the origin of the actual co-ordinate system.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-27
3.2
Delete via "Single Selection"
In cases where you have to delete single points from a contour, you will use this
function.
Click on the symbol.
Confirm the "Delete Points" dialogue.
The "Selection of Point Contour" window opens.
With the mouse cursor (reticule), you mark in the element graphics
the points you want to delete.
The area is marked in another colour (see Fig. below marked in
red).
The number of the selected groups and their co-ordinates are

transferred to the "Selection of Point Contour" window.
X-28
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.3
Delete with the Co-Ordinates
For cases where you have to delete contour areas from the contour, you will use
this function.
You decide whether you want to use the X, Y or Z co-ordinate for
the selection of the contour points.
Click on the symbol "X-Y-Z Co-Ordinates".
Use the check buttons to determine whether you wish to delete the
points above or below the co-ordinate or between two co-ordinates.
The area where you wish to delete the contour points is to be
entered into the text box adjacent to the co-ordinate symbols. You
can input negative values.
For the example shown in the picture below, we activated the option
"X Co-Ordinate" and "above".
The result is shown in a graphics and in the "Select Points from
Contour" window.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-29
3.4
Delete with Radius
this function.
Click on the symbol "Radius - 3D"
or on the symbol "Radius - projected".
Use the check buttons to determine whether you wish to delete the
points above or below the radius or between two radii.
Enter the radius or the radii (in the present case 10) into the text
box.
For our example (see picture below), we activated the "below"
option.
X-30
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.5
Delete via an Angle Area
this function.
Click on the "Angle Range" symbol.
Enter the "from" angle (e.g.. 50) into the first input box, and, into
the second box, the "to" angle (e.g. 50).
"From" angle 1, "to" angle 2

Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in
the element graphics, Fig. 2.
Contour with deleted points
3.6
Reduce Number of Points
You will reduce the number of points of a contour if you intend to...
speed up calculation,
clean the contour,
process contour data to suit a CAD system or a machine tool.
To this end, there are the following functions available for you:
Delete Linear Parts of a Contour
Reduce Neighboured Points
Delete Point Intervals from Contour
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-31
3.7
Delete Linear Parts of a Contour
This function ensures that contour points located inside the run of the contour are
kept within the contour; points, however, located in areas where the contour is
linear, are deleted.
Example
In the contour shown here (Fig. 1), points not required are to be deleted from the
linear run of the contour. Points deviating less than 0.01 mm from the ideal
contour run are deleted.
Contour with not deleted contour points.

Perform the following steps:
Click on the symbol "Deviation from Chord".
Indicate in the "Maximum Deviation" input box the width of the gap
determining which points are deleted, Fig. 2.
The points shown in red are deleted from the contour.
X-32
v 2.4
14.09.04
Enter e.g. 0.01mm into the input box designated "Maximum

Deviation".
The element graphics has shown you that the linear portion of the
contour run is 3 mm.
Enter the value 3 mm into the "Max. Pitch" input box.
Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in
the element graphics, see Fig. 3.
Contour with deleted points.
3.8
Reduce Neighboured Points
This function enables you to delete contour points located close to each other.
This is the case mostly with runs of curves or small radii.
Click on the button "Reduce Neighboured Points".
Enter a figure, e.g. 1 mm, into the input box "Lowest Pitch".
Points located within this distance are deleted.
Points shown in red are deleted from the contour.

The distance is calculated from every point which was not deleted.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-33
3.9
Delete Point Intervals from Contour
This function enables you to delete point intervals from contours. By entering a
figure of your choice into the input box "Take every xth Point" you determine the
points which are not to be deleted.
Click on the button "Keep Points by Interval".
Enter a figure, e.g. 3, into the input box "Step of Points to save".
The first contour point and every third contour points will not be
deleted, see Fig. 1.
Points shown in red are deleted from the contour.

Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in the element
graphics, see Fig. 2.
Contour with every third point.

Supposing the contour consisted of 1000 contour points and you entered
1001, the contour would be deleted, except the first point.
3.10 Clean Contour

A contour consists of measurement points arranged in the order of measurement.
The contour should include no points of the same position (double points), no
loops and no reversing paths.
Using the following functions you can:
Delete Contour Loops
Delete Reversing Paths
Delete Double Points
X-34
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.11 Delete Contour Loops

The reason for contour loops can be the functions "Contour with Offset" and
"Probe Radius Compensation" in the scanning dialogue. Performing the function
"Delete Contour Loops" causes the crossing point of the loop to replace the
contour points of the loop, see Fig. 1.
The crossing point is shown in green and the loop points in red.
Click on the symbol "Delete Contour Loops".
Enter the max. number of points into the input box "Biggest Loop".
The time required for calculating this function depends on the number of
loop points which you have entered.
Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in the element
graphics, se Fig. 2.
Contour with no loop

If a contour contains several loops, all these loops will be deleted.
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-35
3.12 Delete Reversing Paths from Contour

Reversing paths are formed as a result of the connection of two contours with
each other and the superposition of contour points.
Contour with reversing paths.

Click on the symbol "Delete Reversing Point Sequences".
Enter an angle, e.g. 10, which covers the reversing paths, into the
input box "Reversing Angle".
The origin of the angle is, in this case, the point 5.
The function recognises reversing paths, provided they are located within the
entered angle. This function recognises also the end of the reversing paths and
deletes the points not required (shown in red).
Upon confirmation of your entries to get the following contour in the element
graphics, see Fig. 2.
Contour with no reversing paths
3.13 Delete Double Contour Points

In order to delete double contour points, click on the symbol. Double
contour points (same position of single meas. points) cannot be used for contour
calculation.
Neighboured points whose distance is less than 0.0001 mm are regarded as
double contour points.
X-36
v 2.4
14.09.04
3.14 Min. and Max. Point

If, e.g. for fabrication of eyeglasses, you want to know which size must have the
blank, you can use the min-max function in GEOPAK. The function is used,
among other things, to evaluate the greatest extension of a contour in the minus
and plus values of X, Y and Z.
With this function, you also can for alignment of a co-ordinate system set the
part on "0" (origin) at an extreme value. All subsequent positions are relative to
this extreme value.
Notice
The extreme values are even evaluated (interpolated) if the point itself has
not been measured.
Click on the point symbol in the toolbar because the extreme
values will be stored as point elements.
In the following "Element Point" window, click on the "Min/Max
of Contour" symbol in the "Type of Construction" line and confirm.
In the "Min/Max of Contour" window, select at first a contour.
In the symbol boxes of the adapted contour, you see

that it is also possible to evaluate the extreme values outside the
contour (see red points).
With this function, you determine the point on the contour,
which is the nearest to the origin.
With this function, you determine the point on the contour,
which is the farthest to the origin.
If you will choose specifically the first or the last point of a
contour you click one of the symbols.
Click on one of the symbols (optionally) and confirm.
The point is displayed in another colour on the graphics.
Position of the Point
In the picture below, we have evaluated e.g. the extreme value outside a
gearwheel (above right side). To locate the co-ordinates already shown in the
picture, you continue as follows:
14.09.04
v 2.4
X-37
Click in the element graphics on the symbol (left side).
Via click on the green point, you first get the point
no. in a rectangular box.
Through click on the right mouse button on this rectangular box, you
get a list from which you can, e.g. call your information (picture
below).
Through click e.g. on the Y co-ordinate, you get the requested value
(picture below).
X-38
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
XI CMM Movement
Contents
1
CMM Movement ................................................................ 3

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
Move CMM .................................................................................... 3

Move CMM along an Axis............................................................ 4
Circular Movement ...................................................................... 4
Drive Manually to Point ............................................................... 6
Manual Measurement Point ........................................................ 6
Define Clearance Height ............................................................. 7
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.7
Error Height.................................................................................. 7
1.7.1
1.7.2
1.7.3
1.7.4
1.8
Definition ............................................................................................. 7
Procedure and Options ....................................................................... 8
Co-Ordinate System............................................................................ 8
Change of Probe ................................................................................. 8
Measurement Point...................................................................... 8
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
Definition ............................................................................................. 7
Procedure............................................................................................ 7
Move Clearance Height....................................................................... 7
Measurement Point: Two Options....................................................... 8

Option 1............................................................................................... 9
Option 2............................................................................................... 9
Details ............................................................................................... 10
Measurement Point (Laser)....................................................... 12

Measurement Point with Direction ........................................... 12
Direction Entry via Variables .................................................... 13
Groove Point .............................................................................. 14
Measurement Point with Imaginary Point................................ 15
1.13.1 Three Options ................................................................................... 15

1.13.2 Procedure.......................................................................................... 15
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
Probing of Edge Point ............................................................... 16

Automatic Line Measurement................................................... 18
Automatic Plane Measurement................................................. 20
Automatic Circle Measurement ................................................ 21
Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement.................................. 23
Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue ................ 24
Automatic Cylinder Measurement............................................ 26
Scanning .................................................................................... 27
1.21.1 Scanning of Known Elements ........................................................... 28

1.21.2 Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z Planes .................................. 29
1.22
1.23
1.24
1.25
14.09.04
Element finished ........................................................................ 30

Delete Last Meas. Point............................................................. 30
Stop............................................................................................. 30
Turn Rotary Table ...................................................................... 31
v 2.4
XI-1
CMM Movement
1.26
1.27
1.28
1.29
1.30
1.31
1.32
1.33
1.34
1.35
Deflection................................................................................... 32
Trigger-Automatic ..................................................................... 32
Installation of CNC Mode.......................................................... 32
Measuring Speed....................................................................... 34
Movement Speed....................................................................... 34
Safety Distance.......................................................................... 34
Measured Nominal Length ....................................................... 34
Positioning Accuracy................................................................ 35
Change CNC Parameters.......................................................... 35
Best Fit: Definition and Criteria................................................ 36
1.35.1
1.35.2
1.35.3
1.35.4
1.35.5
1.35.6
1.35.7
Two Purposes ................................................................................... 37

Program Run..................................................................................... 37
Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points................................................ 37
Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points ........................................ 38
Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit....................................................... 38
Tolerance and MMC for Best Fit ....................................................... 39
Graphics for Best Fit ......................................................................... 39
1.36 Calculation of Minimum-/Maximum ......................................... 39
XI-2
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
CMM Movement
1.1
Move CMM
Procedure
You can either click the icon, which is located in the tool bar for the
machine (left margin) or select via the menu bar "Measurement / Move Machine".
In both cases you get the dialogue window "Move CMM".
On the left side, you see the icon. If you want to move the
machine to a specific position, click here and input the co-ordinates
of this position. By a click on the arrow on the right end of the input
fields, you can recall the last inputs. Furthermore you can define
variables (e.g. store Z) in the "Formula Calculation"; then you can
use these variables for the input.
Now you can select which Types of Co-ordinate Systems you want
to use; at any time, you can click on the corresponding symbol.
A click on the icon enables you to move the machine

according to the actual position.
The in-home position depends on the construction of the

machine; it is the position where it goes after power up.
Depending on the actual position of the machine, these movements can

lead to a collision.
For the in-home movement, the machine moves along the spindle
axis first, then the two other axes together.
If you need the actual position of the machine in your input

window (e.g. because you only want to change one of the values),
click on the icon; then you get the actual position in the selected
mode.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-3
CMM Movement
1.2
Move CMM along an Axis
Through this function, it is possible to proceed the probe in an axis. Enable the
function via the menu bar "CMM / Move Along Axis".
Just enter the value of the target co-ordinate in the axis. The input is
only possible in Cartesian.
If you want to display the data of the point where the probe is
now situated, click on the symbol.
Normally, the program supposes moving along an axis in the part co-ordinate
system, but shifting to the machine co-ordinate system is possible. Proceed as
follows:
1.3
Keep the dialogue window "Move Along an Axis".
In the following dialogue window, choose in the upper icon

bar the symbol "CMM Co-ordinates" and confirm through "Ok".
This way, you overwrite the co-ordinate system.
Click on "Co-ordinate System" in the menu bar and in the pull-down

menu on "Determine Co-ordinate System".
Circular Movement
The "Circular Movement" function serves the purpose of getting the probe on the
quickest way from the start to the end point. You access the dialogue through the
"Menu bar / CMM / Circular Movement". This function can be used in the CNC
mode only.
There are two methods offered for the "Circular Movement" function.
Method 1
This method (Default Setting) is used to approach three points.
First determine in the "Circular Movement" window which coordinate mode you want to use.
Enter the co-ordinates of start, pass through and end point, and
then click OK.
It is also possible, however, that you use the CMM symbol to enter the
current CMM position.
XI-4
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
In any case, the CMM with the probe first moves from the current
position to the start position.
1 = Start point
2 = Pass through point
3 = End point
Movement commands issued by CAT300 as "Circular Movement" within an

element measurement cycle will be stored automatically in the part program.
The centre of the circle must be located within the CMM volume.
Use this symbol to change to "Method 2".

Method 2
This method allows you to determine the movement path by
driving plane,
radius,
start and end angle,
sense of movement (using the clock symbols clockwise and

anticlockwise), and
centre of circle.
For the centre of circle you select (see above) the co-ordinate mode or the
CMM's current position. This is, of course, based on the assumption that you
(can) move the probe precisely to the position which is to become the centre of
circle.
This "Method 2" is not for use in space, but only in the driving planes XY,
YZ and ZX.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-5
CMM Movement
The angles refer to the first axis of the base plane.
The centre of the circle must be located within the CMM volume.
Use this symbol to change to "Method 1".
1.4
Drive Manually to Point
Drive to a certain position

If you wish to measure at a certain position of the part with a manual CMM you
can make use of the function "Drive manually to point". To open the dialogue box
choose "Machine / Drive manually to point" from the menu bar.
Make the following entries:
the coordinates of the desired position

the precision to reach the position (in the "Capture range" text box
of the dialogue box).
In the Cartesian mode simply click on the icon to determine the axes to be
considered. This option is available in the Cartesian mode only. In the polar mode
the influence of the individual axes is extremely high so that it is useless to select
a single value.
Display window
After confirmation a window indicating the determined coordinates on the right
will be displayed.
1.5
The numbers in blue on the left indicate the distances of the nominal
positions along the machine axes.
It is possible to jam two axes each and to drive in one axis only.
If the "Capture range" of the axes has been reached the digits are
displayed in green.
The window disappears as soon as the numbers for every selected
axis are green.
Manual Measurement Point
You can see the Manual Measurement Point function in the part program and in
the CMM menu of the editor. In learn mode, this command is automatically
ended. This means,
for each element that you record at a manual CMM, and

at a CNC-CMM for elements that are measured in manual mode
(before the CNC ON command).
Hint
It is possible to reuse the manual measurement point function in an
element. For example if you want to realize a change of probe between
the measurement points.
XI-6
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.6
Define Clearance Height
1.6.1
Definition
The clearance height is a height, which is automatically driven before element

measurement. After each measurement, the machine returns to clearance height
position. In many cases, this avoids entering intermediate positions between the
elements. Thus, a hole mounting pattern can, e.g. be measured without an
intermediate position.
1.6.2
Procedure
Activate "CMM / Clearance Height" via the menu bar.

In the following dialog, click the symbol (left) to define the clearance height
in the text box (right).
You define the axis in which axis to move via the axis symbols (in the
picture it is the X axis) The selected axis is displayed.
To get help, you can call the actual machine position via the symbol.
Deactivate the clearance height by clicking once more on the symbol.
1.6.3
Move Clearance Height
The clearance height is always automatically driven between two elements. But
you can also drive the machine to the actual clearance height whenever you
want. This can be useful, e.g. for tests. Then, click on the function Move
Clearance Height in the CMM menu. This procedure has the same effect as
Move CMM in an Axis.
1.7
1.7.1
Error Height
Definition
The error height is meant to be the height that you drive in case of a machine
error, for example at a collision. In opposition with the clearance height, several
error heights can exist. This function is mostly used in part programs for palette
operation or for shifts without any attendance. The error height ensures that, for
example in case of a collision at a part, the measurement passes on to the next
part.
That is why you must define the error height in a way that the CMM is able to
duly terminate the "Collision Measurement" and
the next part can unobstructedly be driven
To ensure this, it may be useful to define several clearance heights. In these
cases, the error heights are driven in opposite to the definition made.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-7
CMM Movement
1.7.2
Procedure and Options
Activate the function via the "CMM / Error Height menu bar.
You can define the error heights at the symbol. The numbers are
automatically counted (upwards) and displayed.
You can change the last defined error height.
You can delete the last defined error height.
For security, you should reduce the Movement Speed (in the dialog
below on the left).
1.7.3
Co-Ordinate System
During the measuring process different co-ordinate systems are possible.

Therefore GEOPAK must know to which co-ordinate system the axis and the
error height refer.
1.7.4
Change of Probe
You always drive the error height with the actual probe. For a problem free
movement it can become useful to change the probe between the error heights.
When the error height has been reached the program changes to the probe you
have indicated in the dialog.
1.8
1.8.1
Measurement Point
Measurement Point: Two Options
You can make the machine probe a point either by the joystick box; for
this, press the "MEAS"-button, then move the machine to the part. The other way
is via the keyboard, either the icon on the left margin, or via the menu bar
"Measurement / Probing Point" as soon as you have activated an element. Then
you get the corresponding dialog window.
Normally, there are two possibilities to define a measurement point.
XI-8
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.8.2
Option 1
1. Point on the surface: Here, the theoretical touch point on the surface of the
part is given, and the travelling direction. This works in nearly all cases, even if
you use a probe with a different diameter, as the probe size is taken into account
when measuring.
1 = stylus ball radius

2 = theoretical touch point
3 = travelling direction
4 = safety distance
1.8.3
Option 2
2. Probe centre: Here, you specify the location of the probe centre a certain
distance away from the surface point. In addition, the probing direction is also
required.
1 = start position
2 = travelling direction
3 = change over point
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-9
CMM Movement
1.8.4
Details
Point on the surface:
Enter the co-ordinates for the theoretical touching point, or

Select the data from the list box, where the last ten inputs are stored
and offered to you when clicking on the arrow or
take the actual position of the machine by clicking the icon.
The program knows the Safety Distance and the probe diameter and uses them
to calculate the movement.
1 = movement speed
2 = measurement speed
During the input of the co-ordinates, you can select between three Types of Coordinate Systems . Just click on the icon for the type of co-ordinate system you
want. GEOPAK always starts with the Cartesian co-ordinate system.
Cartesian co-ordinate system
Cylindrical co-ordinate system
Spherical co-ordinate system
After input of the probing point, GEOPAK needs the direction of probing. For this,
you have two possibilities:
I Input of angles; this input is done in the prompt fields besides the symbol
Here, you enter the angles of the probing direction with the axes X, Y, and Z.
The angles can be input through one of the following three methods:
XI-10
key the values in, or
click on the
icon; this makes the direction of the probing vector
pointing into the opposite direction, e.g.: X=90 becomes X=270.
select a value out of the list boxes, which appear after a click on the
arrow besides the input box, or
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
II Input of a Target: Here, a target point, which can even be situated in the part,
gives the direction. It is not necessary that the probe can reach the target; this
target is only taken to calculate the direction.
1 = measurement point
2 = imaginary point
The co-ordinates of the target are entered in the lower input boxes. If you
select the input by target, the icons and the corresponding input fields are
inactive. For the input of the targets, you can also select the Types of Co-ordinate
Systems (cf. above).
Note
A click on the icon shows the actual position of the probe; this position
means the co-ordinates in the part co-ordinate system, and it is immediately
transformed to the selected co-ordinate system type.
Centre of Probe: In this case, you do not input the theoretical touch point,
but the point in front of the material where the machine switches from movement
speed into measurement speed.
For the input of this point, you can also select one of the three Types of Coordinate Systems (cf. above).
Laser probe
For working with a laser probe, refer to the topic Measurement Point (Laser).
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-11
CMM Movement
1.9
Measurement Point (Laser)
For the topic "Measurement point (probing point)" you must always differentiate
between point measurement and scanning measurement. For point
measurement, proceed as described by the topic Measurement Point. When
working with a laser probe, this dialogue is extended by the functions
"Surface mode" or
"Edge mode" respectively.
To switch between the surface and the edge mode, use the tool bar (see ill.
below). However, a change between a surface and an edge measurement must
in any case be announced to the machine control before starting a new
measurement.
You can also use a joystick for probing.

For detailed information about measuring with a laser probe, refer to the topic
group Laser Probe "WIZprobe" .
1.10 Measurement Point with Direction

Define the measurement point (probing point) via the menu bar "Measurement"
and the "Measurement Point (Probing Point)" function. You can also click on the
symbol in the tools for machine. You come to the corresponding dialogue
window.
In order to determine the measurement point, you have three options (see details
of topic Measurement Point ). One of the possibilities is the following.
Measurement point with direction: At this procedure, you do not have a
theoretic workpiece. Select a centre of probe with direction in which the probe
must move.
XI-12
Enter the data for a centre of probe with direction in the upper three
input fields, or
From the list boxes, select the data which has been recorded here
over the last ten measurements, or
select the data of position of machine via the symbol
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1 = start position
2 = movement direction
3 = centre of probe with direction
You can choose one of three Types of Co-ordinate Systems hereafter.

Cartesian Co-ordinate System
Cylinder Co-ordinate System
Sphere Co-ordinate System
You still must enter the direction in which the system of probe has to move.
You can do that in the input fields beside the symbols. Here, you determine the
angle of the probing direction to the axes X, Y and Z.
You have three possibilities:
Enter the values you want, or
Select a value from the pull-down list fields, or
Click on the symbols and change the direction vectors of the

X, Y or Z components if you want probing into the opposite
direction. Example: X=0 is becoming X=180.
1.11 Direction Entry via Variables

Apart from the possibility to enter fixed angles or components of the direction
vector, you can also enter values via variables. In this case please observe that
all components of the direction value are defined via variables and
the sum of the squared components is 1.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-13
CMM Movement
1.12 Groove Point

Differently from the touch trigger system, which records a measurement point at
the first contact with the part, you can drive with a scanning probe e.g. in a vformed slot so that the ball is fitting at the same time to the two flanks (see
pictures below).
Start of probing
Contact and change of direction
Groove point
The probing must always be vertically realized to the Z-axis.
It is always the centre of probe that is output.
You get this function via the "Menu Bar / CMM / Measurement Point
(Probing Point)". Click on the icon on the left in the following dialogue. Cf. the
topic Measurement Point with Direction
XI-14
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.13 Measurement Point with Imaginary Point

You determine the measurement point (probing point) via the menu bar "CMM"
and the function "Measurement Point (Probing Point)".
You also can click on the symbol in the tools for machine. You obtain the
corresponding dialogue window.
In order to determine the measurement point, you have three options (refer to
detailed information Measurement Point). One of the three possibilities is the
following.
1.13.1
Three Options
Measurement point with imaginary point: When proceeding this way, you
determine the direction by means of a centre of probe with direction and an
imaginary point. Normally, you measure the origin of the element.
1 = Measurement Point
2 = Imaginative Point
1.13.2
Procedure
Enter the data for a centre of probe with direction in the upper three
input fields, or
Choose data from the list fields which have been recorded over the
last ten measurements or
Choose data of position of machine (symbol).

Enter the data for the imaginary point in the lower three input fields.
When applying this procedure, the symbols (direction vectors)

are inactive.
In the basic configuration, you see the co-ordinate initials X, Y and

Z.
Even now, you can select one of the three Types of Co-Ordinate Systems .
Cartesian Co-ordinate System
Cylinder Co-ordinate System
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-15
CMM Movement
Sphere Co-ordinate System
Start position as a proposal
You can also select the start position that you have already entered by
clicking on the symbol. In this case the co-ordinates of the start position for
travelling to the imaginary destination are taken over. You will use this option
when you intend to change only one co-ordinate, for example. As, however,
GEOPAK calculates the probing direction from the difference of the co-ordinates,
at least one co-ordinate needs to be changed.
1.14 Probing of Edge Point

If you want to probe an edge point at a thin sheet, you can realize this in
GEOPAK with a special probing strategy. This strategy can also be applied if the
sheet you want to measure is bent compared with the model or the learnt part.
Near the edge point on the sheet, one or several probing processes will be
executed. The height of the real edge probing will be calculated out of these
preceding probing processes (surface points). It is possible to independently
adapt the safety distance from the general setting, separately according to your
required edge and surface point(s).
Select the element "Point".

In the CMM pull-down menu, click on the "Edge Measurement"
function.
The following dialogue is divided in "Edge Point" and "Surface Point".

Representation for all Options of the Edge Measurement
1 = Edge point; 2 = Measurement Deepness; 3 = Edge Point Probing Direction

Representation for the "1 Surface Point" Option
1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point; 2 = Surface Point Probing Direction

XI-16
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
At the 1 Surface Point option, the height will be adjusted.
Representation from top
1 Surface Point
Red Point = Preceding Probing Point

2 Surface Point
1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point; 2 = Min. Edge Distance

If there exist two surface points, not only the height but also the direction of the
edge probing will be adjusted.
3 Surface Point
1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point; 2 = Min. Edge Distance

If there are three surface points, also a lateral bending of the sheet will be
compensated.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-17
CMM Movement
1.15 Automatic Line Measurement

To open the dialogue box
click on this icon in the "Element Line" dialogue box or
choose "Machine / Autom. element measurement / Line" from the

menu bar or
click on this icon in the tool bar on the left margin of the
GEOPAK main window.
Start point
In the "Automatic line measurement" dialogue box enter the coordinates of the
start point (depends on the type of coordinate system).
Angle
This is the angle between the line in measuring direction and the first axis of the
direction plane, i.e. if you enter an angle of 0 or 180 degrees you will achieve the
opposite measuring direction (see following picture).
XI-18
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
Probing
Choose the "Probing" icons if you wish to probe
in the driving plane
along the driving direction
to the right or to the left.
On the right side of the dialogue box the selected probing mode will be displayed
(see example in the picture below).
See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements ".

See also "Filter Contour".
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-19
CMM Movement
1.16 Automatic Plane Measurement

At the automatic plane measurement, the driving strategy is the same as in the
automatic circle measurement. That means the measurement points will be
distributed on a circle. The probing is done vertically to the driving plane.
You get the function via
the symbol in the CMM tools, or via

the menu bar "CMM / Autom. Element Measurement / Plane", or via
the symbol out of the "Element Plane" dialogue.
With the symbols, you determine whether you probe by moving up or

down (in positive or negative plane direction).
Circular
If you can make a rotation with your CMM, you should activate this (see
symbol) if you measure the base of a circumferential groove. You avoid
intermediate positions that would be necessary if you would drive on straight
lines.
If you can move from a meas. point to the next one without a collision, the
straight way is the fastest and shortest.
Slot Width
If your CMM is not able to make a rotation, you should input, in case of a
circumferential groove, a slot width (see symbol). This slot width indicates how
much place is available for moving around. GEOPAK then calculates the driving
ways between the probing positions, this means
out of this slot width,
out of the actual ball diameter and
out of the safety distance.
The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest

possible. It depends essentially on the number of meas. points and the slot width.
XI-20
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.17 Automatic Circle Measurement

You can use the "Automatic Circle Measurement" if you measure a circle or an
ellipse. As part measurement, you can use the "Automatic Circle Measurement"
also for a cylinder, a cone or a sphere.

the menu bar "CMM / Autom. Element Measurement / Circle", or via
the symbol out of the "Element Circle" dialogue.
Input the circle parameter that means the nominal diameter for the diameter. The
ball diameter and safety distance are automatically calculated by GEOPAK.
The option "In Clockwise Direction or Anticlockwise" is only relevant if
you only measure the part of a circle.
Circular
If it is possible with your CMM to make a rotation, you should activate this
(see symbol) if you measure an outer circle (bolt). You avoid intermediate
positions that would be necessary if you would drive on straight lines.
At an inner circle (bore hole), the straight way is the fastest and shortest.
Slot Width
If your CMM is not able to make a rotation, you should input, in case of an
outer circle, a slot width. This slot width indicates how much place is available for
moving around. GEOPAK then calculates the driving ways between the probing
positions, this means
out of this slot width,
out of the actual ball diameter and
out of the safety distance.
The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest

possible. It essentially depends on the number of meas. points and the slot width.
Thread Pitch
If you want to measure the position of a thread hole, click on the symbol and
input the thread pitch.
If the symbol is not activated, the CMM will drive on the same height. That would
falsify the position (see pictures below). If you have input the thread pitch, the
probing always takes place under the same conditions. This way, a good position
determination is possible.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-21
CMM Movement
Without thread pitch
With thread pitch

See also "Filter Contour".
XI-22
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.18 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement

With this function and the relevant dialogues we provide you with the advantages
of the Automatic Circle Measurement also for the measurement of inclined
circles: The part program is shorter, easier to change and learn.
In particular, you can use this function to measure the surface and within the
surface the inclined circle with only one part program command.
Furthermore it is easier to distribute the measurement points on the circle more
evenly.
Graphical presentation
The illustration below (lateral cross-section) gives you an overview of the
graphical presentation of the surface and circle measurement.
The numbers 1 to 6 show the sequence of actions.
At position 2, the surface measurement is finished.
Position 3: Start into the hole.
Circle measurement at positions 4 and 5.
Position 6: From here you can move to clearance height.
a: Circle diameter
b: Circle centre
c: Approach height
d: Approach depth
e: Edge distance
f: Surface normal
g: Diameter for surface measurement
h: Safety distance
For how to proceed further, find detailed information in Automatic Inclined Circle
Measurement: Dialogue .
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-23
CMM Movement
1.19 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue

Surface and Circle
In our example for the topic Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement
we assume that both surface and circle are measured. You have taken this
decision already in the dialogue "Element inclined circle" (Menu
bar/elements/inclined circle) using the symbols for "Measurement" and
"Automatic measurement" (see above).
In the following dialogue (excerpt in ill. below), you perform the settings that are
already known to you from the automatic circle measurement.
Additionally required are details about approach height and approach depth.
Inner and outer circle

As opposed to the automatic circle measurement, you must use
vectors in this dialogue to define the starting position of the circle measurement
on the surface. The origin for this vector is the circle centre. With the end angle
you define where the last measurement point is taken (end angle 0 = end angle
360 degrees).
These data are not required for the inner full circle.
Edge distance and plane vector
For the plane measurement you additionally require the distance to the edge and
the vector for the angularity of the plane (see dialogue excerpt below). This
vector is perpendicular to the plane.
XI-24
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
Further elements possible

The option buttons in this dialogue (dialogue excerpt below) are deactivated in
learn mode. In the edit mode you must decide between:
Not connected with a plane Select this option when measuring

anything other than an inclined circle (e.g. cylinder, sphere, cone).
Plane still to be measured (see above under "Plane and circle").
Plane is complete. In this case, a plane exists and only the circle
must be measured.
Hint
When editing a part program, it may become necessary to change one of
these options, e.g. switching from "Plane is complete" to "Plane still to be
measured".
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-25
CMM Movement
1.20 Automatic Cylinder Measurement


the menu bar "CMM / Automatic Cylinder Measurement / Cylinder ",
or via
the symbol out of the "Element Cylinder " dialogue.
For the automatic cylinder measurement, GEOPAK presets the following

strategy:
Measurement is made - parallel to the driving plane of the circles

you preset by the "Number of Steps" (minimum 2).
If you want to determine the number of points for each single circle,
you must divide the total number of points (see in the dialogue
window leftover) through the "Number of Steps".
The measurement of the cylinder begins on the height of the coordinate (first step) you entered. The last step will be measured by
the variation in elevation higher or deeper.
If higher or deeper will be indicated by the driving direction.
Since the direction of axis of the cylinder always corresponds to the

direction of the first up to the last meas. point, you also determine
the direction of axis of the cylinder through this driving direction.
If this given probing strategy is not sufficient, dont use the "Automatic Cylinder
Measurement" function but rather use for example the "Automatic Circle or Line
Measurement".
Problem
The driving strategy in GEOPAK differs from that in GEOPAK-3 to the
extent that the last position is situated at another place. This can lead to
with GEOPAK-3 part programs converted to GEOPAK - a collision of
the following driving command.
Problem Solving
You can select a GEOPAK-3 compatible driving strategy by activating the
symbol in the dialogue. You activate the symbol via the "PartManager / Settings /
Defaults for Programs / CMM / GEOPAK / Dialogues" and to the end the "Display
Button for GEOPAK-3" function.
XI-26
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.21 Scanning
For the scanning, you have further options via the menus "Measurement Point:
Two Possibilities and "Measurement Point with Direction". Meantime, you should
be sufficiently familiarized with these two topics.
Open or closed
For scanning, it is important if you have an open or closed contour. If the
contour is closed, click the symbol. Then, scanning is terminated as soon as the
CMM has reached the starting point.
With an open contour, deactivate the symbol and determine via the target point
the zone you want to record. In this case, you have multiple possibilities to finish
a scanning (the following example with a scanning in the X/Y plane.
Enter the X as well as the Y values of the target point. The scanning
is only terminated if the X as well as the Y co-ordinates have been
reached.
Enter the X value and activate the symbol "Ignore Second

Axis". The scanning is terminated as soon as the value of the X coordinate has been reached.
Enter the Y value and activate the symbol "Ignore First Axis".
The scanning is terminated as soon as the Y co-ordinate has been
reached independently from the X value.
If you want get information about scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z
planes, click the symbol on the left.
It is also important to know if you operate with a measuring or a switching probe
system. If you work with a measuring probe system, you must input the scanning
speed (1-20 mm/sec) and the Deflection of the probe.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-27
CMM Movement
1.21.1
Scanning of Known Elements
Scanning with a "Measuring Probe" is possible for the four elements
Line,
Circle,
Cylinder and
Plane.
Provided your CMM has a controller capable of measuring known elements, it is

possible to perform measurement at a scanning speed of up to 100mm/sec.
Known elements are elements that you can find in your drawings by their
properties (diameter, position etc.).
On principle, the scanning of the above mentioned elements is subject to the
same conditions as described in the following chapters
Automatic Line Measurement ,
Automatic Circle Measurement ,
Automatic Cylinder Measurement ,
Automatic Plane Measurement .
Click on the scan symbol in the respective
"Automatic Element Measurement" dialogues. Enter the scanning speed in the
adjacent text box. For the optimum scanning speed refer to your records
regarding the probing system and the CMM.
In order to obtain an optimum result, enter a minimum of 50 points into
the text box designated "Number of Points".
Scanning of cylinders
For the scanning of cylinder it is assumed that you know that only solid cylinders
can be measured.
Provided your controller has the "Scanning of Known Elements" option,
measurement will take place in spiral form. Otherwise, superimposed circles will
be measured.
XI-28
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.21.2
Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z Planes
If you scan with an open contour in the other planes and want to "Ignore Axis"
(see details of topic "Scanning" for the target point, you should respect the
following axis co-ordinations:
1st axis
2nd axis
YZ
ZX
RZ
Phi Z
Phi
You select the RZ scanning if you work with rotating and symmetrical profiles.
This can be, e.g. bottles or mouthpieces of trumpets. The driving plane is
determined through the Z axis and the starting point (picture below).
You decide for Phi Z scanning if you move a circle on the one hand, but at the
same time must record different heights (see picture below). The circle is lies
symmetrically around the Z axis. The radius is indicated through the starting
point.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-29
CMM Movement
1.22 Element finished

With this function (menu bar "CMM / Element Finished"), you tell GEOPAK that
the actual element is finished and no other measurement points are expected. At
this moment, the calculation of the elements will be realized.
If, after calculation, you notice that the element had incorrect points or if
you still want to measure other points, you can delete the command via the
symbol. Then, you automatically return to the element measurement.
If you know in advance how many points you want to measure, you can
already activate this in the element dialogue with the "Aut. Element Finished"
symbol. This way, after having reached the number of points to be measured, the
measurement is terminated and the calculation is automatically executed.
1.23 Delete Last Meas. Point

With this function, you can delete the respective last measured point in
single/learn mode as well as in repeat mode. This can only be done if the CNC
mode is deactivated.
You can start this function via the symbol or the menu bar "CMM / Delete
Last Measured Point".
1.24 Stop
Via this function that you can activate either via the symbol or the menu
bar "CMM / Stop", it is possible to stop the CMM in case of a crash.
This is the same function that you have on your joystick ("R.STOP").
XI-30
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.25 Turn Rotary Table

In case you have a rotary table, the corresponding dialogue gives you
several possibilities. You access the dialogue through the "Menu bar / CMM/
Turn Rotary Table".
It is your decision to choose either an
absolute angle of rotation, or
a relative angle of rotation.
Click on the symbol "Absolute Rotary Angle" and enter into the text box
below an angle the table rotates to. Using the hand symbols you determine the
sense of rotation.
Click on the symbol "Relative Rotary Angle" and enter into the text box
below an angle by which the table is to rotate. Entering a positive angle causes
the table to go round clockwise, entering a negative angle causes it to go
anticlockwise.
In any case, when the table rotates watch whether there are workpieces
on the table and where precisely they are located..
For measurement the symbol "Co-Ordinate System" should always be activated
(depressed) in order to make sure that the co-ordinate system of the workpiece
automatically rotates, as well. This function is usually not switched off unless the
rotary table is set up.
Manual mode using the joystick box
Mitutoyo rotary tables can also be turned manually using the joystick box. The
controller transmits the end position to GEOPAK. In the learn mode this table
rotation is stored in the part program as "Turn Rotary Table Absolute".
The controller does, however, not transmit the sense of rotation. Therefore
GEOPAK determines the shortest travel. In cases where this method should not
practicable (due to fouling conditions with the workpiece), the rotary table has to
be turned under software control.
See also information on the subject "Scanning with the Rotary
Table:Introduction".
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-31
CMM Movement
1.26 Deflection
To be sure having a contact with the workpiece, the measuring probe works with
a so-called deflection. The control minds that the deflection does, at each point of
the part, not go beyond the limits of the defined values in a dialog. As for a
spring, a better deflection corresponds to a better probing of the part.
On principle is valid: The deflection must be the same as the probe
calibrated one.
Notice
According to the actual status of development, a deflection between 0,25 and 1
mm, depending on the connected probe system, is possible.
Feature for SP 600
When you have swivelled the SP 600, this is influencing the own weight of the
probe pin so that going backwards to 0 is not possible any more. Here, we have a
"Pre-Guiding". By this means, the maximum deflection is reduced.
1.27 Trigger-Automatic
You use the trigger automatic with optical systems that give a signal when
running over a border. For exact measurement it is important that the
measurement recording is always realized in the same direction (clear - dark or
dark -clear). This is why every second signal is ignored.
Enable / disable the trigger automatic by clicking on the symbol in the
CMM menu.
This function is only activated if you have input it into the INI.file.
1.28 Installation of CNC Mode

You have determined the probe and the co-ordinate system. Via the menu bar
"Measurement" and the function "CNC Parameters and CNC Enabled", you come
to the corresponding dialog window. Here, you are prompted to input the required
values for the measurement task.
For CNC mode you need information to the following items (also see the dialog
window):
Movement Speed
Measuring Speed
Safety Distance
In the following dialogue window, you can change all settings at the same time.
Enter values
If you want to enter values for the single positions, click on the CMM symbol.
Characteristic features
XI-32
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
For the movement and the measurement speed, you have two specific values.
You can select between the
max. value or the
default.
The default value for the measurement speed (probing speed) is the value able
to realize the max. accuracy. If your part program is determined to function on
different CMMs with different properties, you should select the default setting.
Continue with values
But if you want to continue single parameters, click on the symbol.
In addition to "CNC Parameters...", you can read in the headline of this dialog
window "... and CNC ON". If you confirm your inputs, the part program is stored
according to your specification. In repeat mode, CNC mode is enabled.
In the pull-down menu "Machine", you also find the "CNC Parameter" functions.
With this dialog, you can change one or several parameters in the actual
program. The "CNC Parameters" dialog window compared with the "CNC
Parameters and CNC ON" dialog window is extended by two parameters:
Measuring Length
The measuring length is the max. length of a CMMs moving speed
to probe a part.
Positioning Accuracy
The positioning accuracy describes the distance between probe and
intermediate position. If the probe came to the intermediate position
with this distance, the CMM continues to the next position.
In the status line of the GEOPAK main window you see, next to the
symbol for the CMM, the status of operation.
Green: CNC-mode off

Yellow: CNC-mode on
Further Options
We inform you about further options for the CNC mode with the following terms
"Clearance Height" and "Error Height".
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-33
CMM Movement
1.29 Measuring Speed

The measuring speed is the speed with which the CMM is moving to probe the
part.
The "Minimal" or "Maximal Measuring Speed" depends on the CMM

and the probing system.
On principle is valid: The lower is the measuring speed, the more

exact is the measurement. Yet, steady measurement could
unnecessarily prolong the measurement time. For an optimal
measurement speed respecting both "Accuracy " and
"Measurement Time" refer to documentation of CMM. The optimal
speed is 3 mm/sec.
1.30 Movement Speed

With the movement speed, the co-ordinate measuring machine (CMM) moves
between the measurement points. Normally, the movement speed is specified.
But, if you work with a heavy probing system it may happen that you must reduce
the speed.
You have to pay special attention to new machines with a movement
speed between 600 and 1000 mm/sec. These movement speeds require
a much higher braking distance, otherwise the probe can be damaged.
1.31 Safety Distance

The safety distance is the distance between the theoretical probe point on the
surface of the piece and the point where the CMM changes from movement
speed to measurement speed.
If the measurement points are directly probed (Scanning,) and you have
a too small safety distance, you risk collisions if the contour shows and
distinct irregularities.
1.32 Measured Nominal Length

The measured nominal length is the maximal length of a CMM moving in
measurement speed in order to probe a part. This avoids that wrong
measurement results are possible.
Example: The parts to be measured are located on a palette. If there are missing
one or more parts, the CMM would measure the next part on the palette and you
would get wrong measurement results. You can avoid this by entering a
determined measured nominal length.
XI-34
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.33 Positioning Accuracy

The positioning accuracy is used when there are several movement commands
in the buffer of the machine. It defines the point of movement of the machine
where the controller considers the target as "reached" and starts moving towards
the next target. It does not affect the accuracy of the measurement.
1 = destination A
2 = intermediate position B
3 = destination C
4 = positioning accuracy
5 = work piece
You should know:
If you select a high value, the part program executes faster than
with a small value.
The value is used in all cases when there are subsequent

movements of the machine.
1.34 Change CNC Parameters

In case you want to change, during CNC run, the parameters e.g. measurement
speed or movement speed, click on this function (menu bar "CMM / CNC
Parameters").
In the following dialogue window, you can change all settings at the same time.
Enter values
If you want to enter values for the single positions, click on the CMM
symbol.
Characteristic features
For the movement and the measurement speed, you have two specific values.
You can select between the
max. value or the
default.
The default value for the measurement speed (probing speed) is the value able
to realize the max. accuracy. If your part program will be determined to function
on different CMMs with different properties, you should select the default setting.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-35
CMM Movement
Continue with values
But if you want to continue with single parameters, click on the symbol.
Enter two further Parameters
The "CNC-Parameter" dialogue window has been upgraded with two further
parameters compared with the "CNC Parameters and CNC on"
Measuring Length
The measurement length is the max. length of a CMMs
measurement speed to probe a part.
Positioning Distance
The positioning distance describes the distance between probe and
intermediate position. If the probe came to the intermediate position
with this distance, the CMM continues to the next position.
In the status line of the GEOPAK main window (bottom left) you see, next to the
symbol for the CMM, the status of operation.
Green: CNC mode off
Yellow: CNC mode on
Further Options
We inform you about further options for the CNC mode with the following terms
"Clearance Height" and "Safety Plane".
1.35 Best Fit: Definition and Criteria

At best fit, a group of co-ordinate values (points) is rotated and shifted in a way
that it suits "best" into another group of specified co-ordinates.
These specified co-ordinates are nominal values; the others are

designated as "Real Value" or "Actual Values".
Always one actual and one nominal value build a couple of points.
The best fit is based on the analogy of the Gauss criterion. This
criterion requires that the sum of the squares distances is small.
This means that the distances of the actual values are calculated
from their corresponding nominal values, and then they are squared
and summed up. The "best" fit can be reached, if the sum is minute.
For a best fit, you need at least two couples of points.
Notice
You can access the results of best fit (rotation and movement) as described in
formula calculation under the topic "Table of Operands".
XI-36
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.35.1
Two Purposes
A best fit can do duty for two different purposes:
for evaluation if an alignment of points are together within a

tolerance (see also "Tolerance and MMB at Best Fit", "Graphic at
Best Fit"), or
You can determine a co-ordinate system (see "Create Co-Ordinate

System with Best Fit ").
1.35.2
Program Run
The process is different according to
whether you have a fixed number of actual points (see "Best Fit with
Fixed Number of Points" to which are assigned nominal values or
whether the number of the couple of points is variable (see "Best Fit
with Variable Number of Points").
1.35.3
Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points
Program Run:
You measure the elements representing their actual values.
Confirm with "OK" and come to the "Best Fit Elements" window of
the elements you have measured. These elements have a fixed
point.
In this window you select an element and press the symbol.

The element you have selected is transferred to the window
"Expected Values" which only contains the selected elements.
In the pull-down menu, you select "Co-Ordinate System / Best Fit".

In the "Best Fit" window, activate the "Single Selection-Criterion"
and select the degrees of freedom (see "Degrees of Freedom for
Best Fit").
When the element is transferred, GEOPAK prompts you under "co-ordinates" to

input the nominal values for the element. The element and the nominal value are
indicated in the window "Best Fit Elements".
If you have, by mistake, transferred an element into the "Selection" window,
you can remove it again with the symbol.
Notice
Even if you have measured lots of elements you can make a clear and short
element list for selection. You only display the type you need, the others are
filtered. To do so, you disable the element symbols above the element list.
Immediately after your "OK"
the calculation is realized, and
in the protocol there are data about how much mm you have moved
respectively rotated your elements.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-37
CMM Movement
1.35.4
Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points
With a variable number of couples of points it is not possible to enter the nominal
values before. Example: A sub-program for rims with 4 or 5 fixing holes. In this
case, the nominal values are not entered for each element but the allocation is
realized via other elements that are input as "Theoretical Elements".
Program Run
You define the theoretical elements to which you have assigned

nominal values.
These theoretical elements must have sequenced storage numbers

and must be of the same type.
You measure the actual elements in the same order and completely
store them.
You select in the pull-down menu Co-ordinate System / Best Fit ".
Now, a selection window in which you can
In the "Best Fit" window, activate the "Group Selection". For the
remaining preference possibilities refer to "Degrees of Freedom for
Best Fit".
select the first nominal and respectively actual element as well as

the number of your couples of points, is displayed.
With "OK", you start the calculation and
the result is recorded.
1.35.5
Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit
Definition
Generally, the actual and nominal values can be moved and rotated as you like it.
Thus, you get the best result. To do so, activate the "Rotate & Shift" function.
In some cases, you optionally can only rotate or shift (see "Only Rotate" or " Only
Shift ").
Details
With the buttons below this selection you can modify once again the degrees of
freedom. Thus, if for example a movement is only possible in one direction or if a
rotation can only be carried out around one determined axis.
The selection in the top row facilitates the input.
If only one rotation is allowed, you can also enter the rotation point around which
rotation shall be realized. If there is no input, rotation is effected around the origin
of the actual co-ordinate system.
XI-38
v 2.4
14.09.04
CMM Movement
1.35.6
Tolerance and MMC for Best Fit
For a judgement "OK / NOK" a tolerance is necessary. You can input this
tolerance in the first window "Best fit". The position of the single actual values is
checked after the best fit against this tolerance limit.
Only for single selection
In case that not points, but circles are taken for the best fit calculation, it is also
possible to apply the MMC, if allowed. Then the individual tolerance limits are
expanded by the difference to the maximum material size. You inform the
program about this by clicking the check box "MMC".
In the window for the nominal values you must additionally input the maximum
material size of the diameter, which is:
The smallest allowable size of a hole;
The largest allowable size of a boss.
1.35.7
Graphics for Best Fit
For an evaluation of the result of the best fit calculation, a graphical

comparison can be activated by the symbol.
In the graphics, you can see the nominal points and the actual points, either
before or after the calculation.
The distances between the nominal and actual positions are

enlarged; you can either input or automatically set the scale factor.
The tolerance for each position is also displayed.
If an actual value is further away from its nominal than twice the
tolerance, it is not displayed. Only an arrow shows the direction
where the actual value lies. This is to avoid long lines crossing the
whole of the drawing.
1.36 Calculation of Minimum-/Maximum

On principle, you can calculate all defined element features with this function.
This function allows, for example to determine from a number of circles the
biggest or the smallest diameter. You have two possibilities: Single- or Group
Selection.
Activate the function via the menu bar "Calculation / Minimum <->
Maximum".
After termination of the calculations you have different values at

your disposal.
You can access these values in the formula calculation (see details
in topic "System Variable in Formula Calculation").
14.09.04
v 2.4
XI-39
Further Options
XII Appendix
Contents
1
Further Options ................................................................ 2
Delivery ............................................................................. 3
2.1
2.2
Form and Scope........................................................................... 3

Installation.................................................................................... 3
Prerequisites..................................................................... 4
3.1
3.2
Minimum Configuration .............................................................. 4

Required Knowledge ................................................................... 4
Support and Service......................................................... 5
Hotline ............................................................................... 6
14.09.04
v 2.4
XII-1
Further Options
Further Options
A series of further options add to the capabilities offered by GEOPAK.
You have
alignment programs for probe changing systems
The external program call-up is programmable and, as such, can

be integrated with the part program.
A virtual machine supports you in machine-remote programming.
The PartManager offers another series of options for GEOPAK:
There are, e.g., the Manager Programs capable of combining

several part programs to one Manager Program.
The Remote-Manager enables part programs to be started
under remote control via a file-supported port in GEOPAK, that
is from other computers within a network.
Q-PAK causes part programs to be executed automatically in a
wait loop. A graphic user prompting system supports the user.
Also the Q-PAK dialogue shows the pictures of those

workpieces which were entered by the user already in the
PartManager.
Communication with other control systems is ensured by our "IOConditions".
Use the "string coding" function to insert all sorts of information of a

part program into a text line. It is also possible to output the value of
a variable or the contents of a text variable.
The scope of delivery comprises:
XII-2
A part program converter from GEOPAK-3 (DOS) to GEOPAK

A port to import external part programs in the GEOPAK-ASCII
format
Another function allows an output of the measured elements in the
formats DMIS, DXF and IGES.
v 2.4
14.09.04
Delivery
Delivery
2.1
Form and Scope
The GEOPAK program is executable under the Windows 2000 / XP operating

systems.
GEOPAK is supplied on CD-ROM.
Being the basis of the MCOSMOS system and responsible for the
part management, the PartManager is always comprised with our
delivery.
The program is copy.-protected by means of a so-called "Dongle".
Online Help and User's Manual are part of our delivery.
GEOPAK is available in most of the European languages and also

in some Asian languages as well.
2.2
Installation
GEOPAK uses the Mitutoyo Installation Program (picture below) for its
installation.
The user will be guided through the complete installation by clear, action
orientated dialogues, which enable the user to carry out the installation by
himself.
14.09.04
v 2.4
XII-3
Prerequisites
3
3.1
Prerequisites
Minimum Configuration
The requirement for running GEOPAK is an IBM-compatible PC with minimum

Pentium 4 processor (min. 1 GHz, recommended 2 GHz). The program requires
a minimum of 256 MB RAM and 30 GB HD memory capacity (not including the
capacity requirements for the temporary files and part program files).
In connection with 3D-TOL, 1.5 MHZ (recommended 3 MHZ) and 512 MB main
memory are required, provided that the CAD models do not exceed the free
main memory capacity. The graphics card must be unlimited open-GL-capable
and must have a minimum of 128 MB capacity (recommended 256 MB).
Sufficient memory is an essential prerequisite for flawless running of the

measuring programs.
3.2
Required Knowledge
The user of GEOPAK should have basic knowledge of geometry, basic

knowledge of form and position tolerances as well as basic PC-knowledge (able
to use Windows).
XII-4
v 2.4
14.09.04
Support and Service
Support and Service
Maintenance is performed by way of software updates to adapt to new

requirements.
For application problems, we support 3D-TOL-users with a hotline service (see
chapter 12: Hotline).
For information about other software products, please visit our CTL homepage:
www.mitutoyo-ctl.de.
For information about our hardware products, please first visit our homepage:
www.mitutoyo.de.
Being a leading supplier,

Mitutoyo is of course
represented on all relevant
trade fairs. Furthermore,
highly qualified Mitutoyo
experts offer training courses
for customers.
The statements in this description are not binding. We reserve the right to changes in
the course of the technological progress.
The program itself and this product information are protected by copyright and may
neither in part nor in whole be copied and/or distributed. Copyright Mitutoyo
Messgerte GmbH (all rights reserved).
Neuss, September 2004

Mitutoyo Messgerte GmbH
Borsigstr. 8 - 10
D - 41469 Neuss
Phone: 0 21 37 / 1 02-0
Fax:
0 21 37 / 86 85
E-Mail: MitutoyoGmbH@mitutoyo.de
14.09.04
v 2.4
XII-5
Hotline
Hotline
Should you have any topical questions in spite of the documentation provided by us,
you are kindly requested to contact us at the following telephone numbers.
01805 / 102-333 is the number for our hardware service (0.12

/min). Depending on whether you ring us from Northern or
Southern Germany, you will be connected with Neuss or Leonberg.
At the number 01805 / 102-343 (0,12 /min) you reach our software
experts. Your call is directed to a branch office located in your
vicinity. If the number there is engaged, your call will be directed to
Neuss. There is an info voice installed for each branch office.
You can reach us on the phone on weekdays from 7.30 a.m. to 8.00 p.m.,
and on Saturdays from 8.00 a.m. to 2.00 p.m.
XII-6
v 2.4
14.09.04

Um Geopak 2 4 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Um Geopak 2 4 e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Um Geopak 2 4 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEOPAK

The geometric 3D software for co-ordinate

registers and calculates the geometric data of your parts

Copyright (c) 2004 Mitutoyo

Part Program Editor

Part Program Editor ........................................................ 5

Introduction Part Program Editor............................................... 5

Learn Mode: Basics ........................................................ 8

Learn Mode: Introduction ........................................................... 8

Temperature Compensation ..................................................... 12

Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM ..................................... 13

Reference Position .................................................................... 16

Compensation and Rotary Table ..................................................... 16

Probe Offset to Z-spindle................................................................. 17

Learn Mode Main Window ............................................ 18

PartManager and GEOPAK ....................................................... 18

Input Characteristics ................................................................. 24

Part Program Editor

Programming Help Contents........................................ 28

Programming help: Functions ................................................. 28

Variables and Calculations........................................... 30

Definition of Variables .............................................................. 31

Input of Variables ...................................................................... 33

Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable .............................. 35

Operators and Functions.............................................. 42

Arithmetic Operators ................................................................ 42

6.13.1 Minimum maximum calculation........................................................ 49

Part Program Editor

6.14 Best Fit ....................................................................................... 51

Other GEOPAK Variables.......................................................... 52

Scale all elements (including element point) .......................... 59

Definition and Types........................................................................ 62

Delete Last Step......................................................................... 63

Part Program Editor

Set Head Data Field................................................................... 69

Part Program Editor

Part Program Editor

Introduction Part Program Editor

Part Program Editor

Part program window

Part Program Editor

Learn Mode: Basics

Learn Mode: Basics

Learn Mode: Basics

Starting Learn Mode

Learn Mode: Basics

Start the part program like usual in the PartManager.

Otherwise, also your settings in the PartManager (Settings / Defaults for

Learn Mode: Basics

...you have the choice between these options:

Learn Mode: Basics

This topic concerns the co-ordinate measuring instruments by means of which

What you should know

Learn Mode: Basics

Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM

Except for CNC-operated machines which have the temperature compensation

Learn Mode: Basics

Learn Mode: Basics